Owner's Manual for Mercedes-Benz models including: A-Class New Shape Car
Disclaimer Das folgende PDF-Dokument für dieses Fahrzeugmodell bezieht sich in allen Sprachversionen nur auf die Fahrzeuge, die für den deutschen Markt bestimmt
Disclaimer ADlalslafonlggueangde vPeDrFs-iDonoskuomf ethnet ffüorlldoiwesinesg FPaDhFrzdeoucgummodeenltl fboerztiehhist sviechhicinleamlleondel TrSehpleraatfceohlsvloelwresilnoygnteovnevrnesuhiroicnalueofsfditniheteeFnaOdhwrezndeeufrog`sre,sMdaailenufoüanrl tddheeenscGdreiburmtessacnhaelmlnmaMrokaderektltsab,nesdsetwriimehsimcahtnd sciponerdrceuisanpldeodqniuedidptoemnGedenertumotsafcnyhoreeungrVuvolearhsticcohlnreis.f.tCeonuennttrsyp-rsepcehcenif.icBiltatnegwueangdeevnaSrieatsiiocnhsaanre pIhoresnsiabuleto. rPislieeartseennMoeterctehdaets-yBoeunrzvSeehrivcicleesmtüitgzhptunkott, bume eeqinugipepderudckwteitshEaxlelmthpelar dPfüelresacnsredibeceroednFftauahncrctzteyiuognumsr .aoTduhetihlsleoarulisnoeddaFfaMfheerczrtecsuegdsmaefsoe-dtByee-llnrjaezhleSrevearznvuitceseryhCsatelteenmntr.seatnodofbutnacintions. PalperaisnetecdonvetarscitoynofuorraoutthheorrviseehdicMleemrcoeddeelss-Banednzvdeheiaclleersmhoipdeiflyyoeuarws.oTuhldisliPkDeF tdDooiecrseuecmsePeivDneFt-aiDspotkrhiunemtleeadntetOstwevnlleterdrs`iiseoMank.atPunoeulsalesliVbfoelersoviotanhreidaratvri.oeMnhsöicgtloleicyhmoeouAdrbevwlesehiacicnhludenvmgeeahnyizcnuleot mbIheroetdmaeklkeyonenaiknrtesot.eancFcaohurnzetuagskMönenrcteendneisc-hBtebnezrüccoknssicthatnigttlyseuipnd, daateMs etrhceeidrevse-hBiecnlzes to tsheeinsetaFatehrozfetuhgeeasrttänandidgidnetrmodnuecueesstcehnaSntgaensdindedreTseigcnhnainkdanepqausipstm, seonwt.iePlease TtÄhhnedereeorfunonlrigeneennoOintweFntoherarm`tstuMhnidasnAPuuDasFlstidsaotttchuuenmgcevunorrtneiinmtnmaotn.wdBavityaterliedbpevlaeccrhestsieontnhS.eIietpirdsianphteords,sdviabesrlesiothnat dwieehvsicieahstiPwoDnaFs-DadfeofkleiuvcmetirenengdtywinoiukthreisnypeoemucriFfvaiecllhvdiecahlseigc. eledrcuocukltde Enxoetmbpelatrakeersnetinztt,odasccmoiut nt adsemMFearcherzdeeusg-Bauesngzeclioefnesrtawnutlrydea.dapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment. Please also read the printed Owner`s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner`s Manual in the vehicle. Copyright All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes.
Internal use only
Thank you for buying Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Man- ual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operat- ing lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Owner's Manual. Dis- regarding them may lead to damage to the vehi- cle or injury to people. The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol- lowing factors: R Model R Order R National version R Availability
The illustrations in this Owner's Manual show a left-hand drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehi- cles, the layout of car parts and control ele- ments differs accordingly. Mercedes-Benz is constantly developing its vehi- cles further.
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R Design R Equipment R Technical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif- fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus- trations. The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle: R Digital Owner's Manual R Printed Owner's Manual R Service booklet R Equipment-dependent Supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of the documents on to the new owner.
177584051177158Z4051110Z1202
2 Contents
Symbols ........................................................ 5 At a glance .................................................... 6 Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Indicator and warning lamps (standard) ........ 10 Indicator and warning lamps (widescreen cockpit) ......................................................... 12 Overhead control panel ................................ 14 Door operating unit and seat adjustment ..... 16 Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 18 Digital Owner's Manual ............................. 20 Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual .......... 20 General notes ............................................. 22 Protection of the environment ...................... 22 Take-back of end-of-life vehicles ................... 22 Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts ....................... 23 Owner's Manual ............................................ 24 Operating safety ........................................... 24 Declaration of conformity ............................. 25 Diagnostics connection ................................ 32 Qualified specialist workshop ....................... 33
Vehicle registration ....................................... 33 Correct use of the vehicle ............................ 33 Information on the REACH regulation ........... 34 Notes for persons with electronic medi- cal aids ......................................................... 34 Implied warranty ........................................... 35 QR code for rescue card ............................... 35 Data storage ................................................. 35 Copyright ...................................................... 38 Occupant safety ......................................... 39 Restraint system ........................................... 39 Seat belts ...................................................... 41 Airbags ......................................................... 45 PRE-SAFE® system ....................................... 53 Automatic measures after an accident ......... 54 Safely transporting children in the vehi- cle ................................................................ 54 Notes on pets in the vehicle ......................... 73 Opening and closing .................................. 75 Key ............................................................... 75 Doors ............................................................ 79 Load compartment ....................................... 83
Side windows ............................................... 85 Sliding sunroof ............................................. 88 Anti-theft protection ..................................... 92 Seats and stowing ..................................... 95 Notes on the correct driver's seat posi- tion ............................................................... 95 Seats ............................................................ 96 Steering wheel ............................................ 103 Easy entry and exit feature ......................... 104 Memory function ........................................ 105 Stowage areas ............................................ 106 Sockets ....................................................... 119 Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial ...... 120 Fitting/removing the floor mats ................. 123 Light and sight ......................................... 124 Exterior lighting ........................................... 124 Interior lighting ........................................... 132 Changing bulbs (only for vehicles with halogen headlamps) .................................... 133 Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system ............................................ 136
Contents 3
Mirrors ........................................................ 140 Climate control ........................................ 143 Overview of climate control systems .......... 143 Operating the climate control system ......... 144 Driving and parking ................................. 152 Driving ........................................................ 152 DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................ 162 Manual transmission .................................. 165 Automatic transmission .............................. 166 Function of the 4MATIC .............................. 171 Refuelling .................................................... 171 Parking ....................................................... 177 Driving and driving safety systems ............. 185 Trailer hitch ................................................ 239 Bicycle rack function .................................. 243 Vehicle towing instructions ......................... 245 Instrument display and on-board computer .................................................. 246 Notes on the instrument display and onboard computer .......................................... 246
Instrument display overview ....................... 247 Overview of buttons on the steering wheel .......................................................... 248 Operating the on-board computer .............. 248 Overview of what is shown on the multi- function display .......................................... 250 Head-up display .......................................... 250 MBUX multimedia system ...................... 253 Overview and operation .............................. 253 System settings .......................................... 262 Navigation .................................................. 267 Telephone ................................................... 275 Mercedes me and apps .............................. 278 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ...... 287 Radio & media ............................................ 291 Sound settings ........................................... 296 Maintenance and care ............................. 298 ASSYST PLUS service interval display ........ 298 Engine compartment .................................. 299 Cleaning and care ....................................... 306
Breakdown assistance ............................. 314 Emergency .................................................. 314 Flat tyre ...................................................... 316 Battery (vehicle) ......................................... 322 Tow-starting or towing away ....................... 327 Electrical fuses ........................................... 333 Wheels and tyres ..................................... 337 Notes on noise or unusual handling char- acteristics ................................................... 337 Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres ........................................................... 337 Notes on snow chains ................................ 337 Tyre pressure .............................................. 338 Wheel change ............................................. 342 Emergency spare wheel .............................. 353 Collapsible spare wheel .............................. 355 Technical data .......................................... 358 Notes on technical data .............................. 358 On-board electronics .................................. 358 Regulatory radio identification of small components ............................................... 360
4 Contents Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview ............................ 360 Operating fluids .......................................... 362 Vehicle data ................................................ 371 Trailer hitch ................................................. 372 Display messages and warning/indi- cator lamps ............................................... 376 Display messages ....................................... 376 Warning and indicator lamps ...................... 432 Index ......................................................... 447
In this Owner's Manual, you will find the follow- ing symbols:
& DANGER Danger due to not observing the warning notices
Warning notices draw your attention to haz- ards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe envi- ronmental notes
Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behaviour or environmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes.
* NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage
Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged.
# Observe notes on material damage.
% These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you.
#
Instruction
(/ page) Further information on a topic
Display Information on the multifunction dis- play/media display
4 Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system
5
Relevant submenus, which are to be
selected in the multimedia system
*
Indicates a cause
Symbols 5
6 At a glance Cockpit Left-hand-drive vehicles
At a glance Cockpit 7
1 Steering wheel gearshift paddles
169 E z Calls up navigation
2 Combination switch
126 F | Calls up radio or media
3 Instrument display
247 G % Calls up the telephone
4 DIRECT SELECT lever
166 H ß Calls up favourites
5 ü Start/stop button
153 I y Calls up vehicle functions
è ECO start/stop function
161 J c Active Parking Assist
6 Media display
253 K DYNAMIC SELECT switch
7 Climate control systems
144 L Touchpad
8 £ Hazard warning light system
127 M Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys-
9 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps
50
tem
A Glove compartment
109 N Adjusts the steering wheel
B Stowage compartment
109
O ý Switches the steering wheel heater on/off
C Cup holder
P Control panel:
D 8 Controller for volume and switching sound on/off
253
On-board computer
Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system
253
Cruise control or variable limiter
on/off
I Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
255
255
255
255
255
235
163
255
248
103
104
248
196
201
8 At a glance Cockpit
Q Diagnostics connection R Opens the bonnet
32 S ! Electric parking brake
300 T Light switch
181
124
10 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard) Instrument display (standard)
1 ! ABS 2 #! Turn signal lights 3 h Tyre pressure monitoring system 4 # Electrical fault 5 L Distance warning 6 J Brakes (yellow) 7 J Brakes (red) 8 ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 9 ! Electric parking brake (red) A % Diesel engine: preglow B ; Engine diagnostics C R Rear fog light
At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard) 11
443 D K High beam
126
126
L Low beam
124
445
T Standing lights
124
436 E å ESP® OFF
443
442
÷ ESP®
440 F 6 Restraint system
440 G Fuel level
443
434
247
440 H æ Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location
436
440
indicator
I Ù Power steering
435
436 J ü Seat belt
125 K ï Trailer hitch
434
435
12 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (widescreen cockpit) Widescreen cockpit instrument display
1 #! Turn signal lights 2 ï Trailer hitch 3 6 Restraint system 4 å ESP® OFF
÷ ESP® 5 R Rear fog light 6 K High beam
L Low beam T Standing lights 7 ÿ Coolant temperature 8 Coolant temperature display 9 ! Electric parking brake (yellow) A J Brakes (yellow) B # Electrical fault
At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (widescreen cockpit) 13
126 C L Distance warning
442
435 D ! ABS
443
434 E Ù Power steering
435
443 F h Tyre pressure monitoring system
445
443 G % Diesel engine: preglow
125 126 124 124 436 247 440 440
H æ Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator
I Fuel level J ! Electric parking brake (red) K ü Seat belt L J Brakes (red) M ; Engine diagnostics N ä Indicator lamp inoperative
436
247 440 434 440 436
436
14 At a glance Overhead control panel
1 Sun visors
2 p Switches the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
3 | Switches automatic interior lighting con- trol on/off
4 c Switches the front interior lighting
on/off
5 u Switches the rear interior lighting
on/off
At a glance Overhead control panel 15
6 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp
132
on/off
7 ; me button
132 8 G SOS button
9 3 Opens/closes the panorama sliding
132
sunroof
3 Opens/closes the roller sunblind 132 A Inside rearview mirror
132
280
280
88
88
141
16 At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment
1 V Operates the memory function 2 Adjusts the seats electrically 3 w Switches the seat heating on/off 4 s Switches the seat ventilation on/off 5 ß Ü Locks/unlocks the vehicle 6 Opens the door 7 Í Operates the outside mirrors 8 W Opens/closes the right side window 9 W Opens/closes the rear right side win-
dow A S Child safety lock for the rear side win-
dows
At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment 17
106 B W Opens/closes the rear left side window
85
99 C W Opens/closes the left side window
85
102 D Adjusts the head restraints
99
102 E Configures the seat settings
101
80 F Adjusts the seat backrest inclination
98
79 G Adjusts the seat height
98
140 H Adjusts the seat cushion inclination
98
85 I Adjusts the seat fore-and-aft position
98
85 J Adjusts the seat cushion length
98
73
18 At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns
1 Safety vests
2 Fire extinguisher
3 ; me button
G SOS button
4 £ Hazard warning light system
5 Stowage compartment for customer literature
6 Starting assistance
7 To check and top up operating fluids
8 Tow-starting or towing away
9 Flat tyre
At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns 19
314 A B-pillar with:
315
QR code for accessing the rescue card
280 B Tow-starting or towing away
280 C Warning triangle
127 D TIREFIT kit
E First-aid kit (soft sided)
326 F Fuel filler flap with:
362
information label on fuel type
329
information label on tyre pressure
316
QR code for accessing the rescue card
35
329
314
318
315
171
339
35
20 Digital Owner's Manual Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info 5 Owner's Manual 5 Õ
The Digital Owner's Manual describes the func- tions and operation of the vehicle and the multi- media system. # Select one of the following menu items in the
Digital Owner's Manual: R Search: search for keywords in order to find
quick answers to questions about the opera- tion of the vehicle. R Quick start: here is where you find the first steps towards setting up your vehicle.
R Tips: find information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle.
R Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions.
R Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the Instrument Dis- play.
R Bookmarks: gain access to your personally saved bookmarks.
R Language: select the language for the Digital Owner's Manual.
1 Back 2 Adds bookmarks
3 Picture 4 Contents section 5 Directions of movement of contents section 6 Menu
Some sections in the Digital Owner's Manual, e.g. warning notes, can be expanded and col- lapsed. Additional methods of calling up the Digital Owner's Manual: Direct access: open the required content in the Digital Owner's Manual by pressing and holding an entry on the tab bar in the multimedia sys- tem:
Instrument Display: call up brief information as display messages in the instrument cluster LINGUATRONIC: call up via the voice control system For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is deactivated while driving.
Digital Owner's Manual 21
22 General notes
Protection of the environment
* NOTE Plug-in hybrid # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style
The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle. Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the envi- ronment. Please observe the following rec- ommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style. Operating conditions: # Make sure that the tyre pressure is cor-
rect.
# Do not carry any unnecessary weight (e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them).
# Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib- ute to environmental protection.
# Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style: # Do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine. # Do not warm up the engine while the
vehicle is stationary. # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable
distance from the vehicle in front. # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration
and braking. # Change gear in good time and use each
gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
# Switch off the engine in stationary traf- fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function.
# Drive in a fuel-efficient manner. Observe the ECO display for an eco- nomical driving style.
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles EU countries only: Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in accordance with the European Union (EU) Endof-Life Vehicles Directive. A network of vehicle take-back points and dis- mantlers has been established for you to return your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these points free of charge. This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle and conserving resources. For further information about the recycling and disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-
back conditions, please visit the national Mercedes-Benz website for your country.
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by not using recycled reconditioned components MercedesBenz AG offers recycled recondi- tioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the implied warranty is valid as for new parts. # Recycled reconditioned components and parts from MercedesBenz AG.
* NOTE Impairment of the operating effi- ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding
Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: R Doors R Door pillars R Door sills R Seats R Cockpit R Instrument cluster R Centre console R Lateral roof frame
# Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas.
# Do not carry out repairs or welding. # Have accessory parts retrofitted at a
qualified specialist workshop.
General notes 23
You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele- vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal- function. Only use Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model. Mercedes-Benz tests original parts and conver- sion parts and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or independ- ently approved by a testing centre. Certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz Genuine- Parts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehi- cle's general operating permit.
24 General notes
This is the case in the following situations: R The vehicle type is different from that for
which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted. R Other road users could be endangered. R The exhaust gas or noise level gets worse. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (/ page 360) when ordering MercedesBenz GenuineParts.
Owner's Manual This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of this Owner's Manual going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit- ted with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illus- trations.
The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehi- cle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.
Operating safety
* NOTE Plug-in hybrid # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc- tions or system failure
In order to avoid malfunctions or system fail- ures: # Always have the specified service/
maintenance work as well as any nec-
essary repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to improper modifications to electronic components
Modifications to electronic components, their software or wiring can impair their func- tionality and/or the functionality of other networked components or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the vehicle's operating safety. # You must not tamper with wiring, elec-
tronic components, or their software. # Always have work on electrical and
electronic devices carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop.
If you modify the on-board electronics, the gen- eral operating permit is rendered invalid. Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data".
& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or off-
road, regularly check the vehicle under- side. # Remove trapped plants or other flam- mable material, in particular. # If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driv- ing too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension compo- nents
In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle: R the vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a
high kerb or an unpaved road R the vehicle is driven too fast over an
obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pot- hole R a heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components
In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tyres may not be visible. Compo- nents damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no lon- ger absorb the resulting force as intended. If the underbody panelling is damaged, flam- mable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and
General notes 25
the underbody panelling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # Have the vehicle checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. or # If driving safety is impaired while con- tinuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist work- shop.
Declaration of conformity Electromagnetic compatibility The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Regu- lation UN R10.
26 General notes
Wireless vehicle components
For EU and EFTA countries only: The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle and of the informa- tion systems and communication devices inte- grated in the vehicle: The manufacturers of the wireless components ensure that all wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full texts of the EU declarations of conform- ity are available at the following website: https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/ baix/cars/certificates-of-conformity/en_GB/ index.html
You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
For Brazil only: Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle: These systems are not protected against harmful interference and must not cause interference in properly approved systems.
Nigeria only: Connection and use of the wireless communica- tion equipment in this vehicle are permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission.
Ukraine only: The manufacturer hereby declares that the wire- less vehicle components meet the technical reg- ulations for two-way radios. You can obtain fur- ther information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Wireless applications in the vehicle Besides the typical frequencies for mobile com- munications, cars from Mercedes-Benz make use of the following automotive radio applica- tions:
Wireless applications in the vehicle Technology
Convenience central locking system Wireless power transmission
Frequency range
20 kHz (990 kHz) 105 kHz (90119 kHz)
Transmission output/magnetic field strength 72 dBA/m at 10 m 42 dBA/m at 10 m
Technology
Convenience central locking system Wireless power transmission
Frequency range
120 kHz (119135 kHz) 127 kHz (119135 kHz)
Near-field communication Convenience central locking system, garage door opener, tyre pressure monitoring system Heater booster function remote control, garage door opener Heater booster function remote control, garage door opener Bluetooth®, Kleer, RLAN, remote control, wire- less headphones RLAN Sensor for interior protection, RLAN
13.55313.567 MHz 433 MHz (433.05434.79 MHz)
868 MHz (868.0868.6 MHz)
869 MHz (868.7869.2 MHz)
2.4 GHz ISM band (24002483.5 MHz)
5.1 GHz UNII-1 (51505250 MHz) 5.8 GHz UNII-3 (57255875 MHz)
General notes 27
Transmission output/magnetic field strength 42 dBA/m at 10 m 66 dBµA/m at 10 m with the magnetic field strength level decreasing 3dB/octave above 119 kHz 42 dBA/m at 10 m 10 mW ERP
25 mW ERP
25 mW ERP
100 mW EIRP
25 mW EIRP 25 mW EIRP
28 General notes Technology Convenience central locking system 76 GHz radar Carsharing module
Information about the specific absorption rate For France only:
Frequency range
7.25 GHz UWB (6.08.5 GHz)
7677 GHz NFC: 13.55313.567 MHz Bluetooth®: 24022480 MHz
Transmission output/magnetic field strength
-41.3 dBm/MHz EIRP mean 0 dBm/MHz EIRP peak
55 dBm peak EIRP
NFC: 42 dBA/m at 10 m Bluetooth®: + 4 dBm (power category 2)
The values were determined and tested in accordance with the Décret n° 2019-1186 guide- line regarding the indication of the specific
absorption rate (SAR) of wireless vehicle compo- nents.
Information about the specific absorption rate
Vehicle component (designation in accordance with EU DoC)
SAR value in W/kg
Radio data transmission telephone sys- tem Hermes 2.1 Compensator ECE DE003 & ECE DE004 DAI RSE Tablet PC SM-T230NZ NRCS2P NTG7RSU NTG7 RAMSES 1.0 and 1.1
0.24 W/kg
< 0.4 W/kg < 0.2 W/kg 1.8 W/kg 0.7 W/kg 0.003 W/kg 0.07 W/kg 0.08 W/kg 0.036 W/kg
Jack Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:
EC declaration of conformity 1. The undersigned, representing
General notes 29
Applicable limit value
2 W/kg
2 W/kg 2 W/kg 2 W/kg 4 W/kg 2 W/kg 2 W/kg 2 W/kg 2 W/kg
Manufacturer: BRANO a.s. 747 41 Hradec nad Moravicí, Opavská 1000,
30 General notes
The Czech Republic ID No.: 64-387-5933 VAT No.: CZ64-387-5933 herewith declares under our sole responsibility that the product: 2. a) Name: Jack Type, Number: A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18 B) A 240 580 00 18 C) A 639 580 02 18 D) A 639 580 03 18 E) A 910 580 00 00 F) A 247 580 00 00, A 293 580 00 00 Year of manufacture: 2020 Complies with all relevant provisions Directive No. 2006/42/EC b) Description and purpose of use:
Car jack is intended solely for lifting of the con- crete car, in accordance with the instruction label on the car jack. 3. References of harmonized and other standards or specifications ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, AS 2693, DBL 8230.10, DBL 7382.20, DBL 7392.10, DBL 8451.15, MBN 10435, Technical documentation of the product is stored at the premise of the manufacturer. The person responsible for assembling the technical documentation of the product: Head of the Tech- nical Department Brano a.s. 4. Hradec nad Moravicí Place 5. 05.10.2020 Date Engineer Petr Petr [Signature]
Director of division ZZ
TIREFIT kit
Method 1
Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity: EC declaration of conformity, CE We, Aircom Automotive Sp. z o.o. Sp.k. ul. Fabryczna 20B 55-080 Pietrzykowice Poland (1) hereby declare that the product Electric air pump (2) Models: (3)
5N0 012 615C 5N0 012 615F 9P1 012 615A 9P1 012 615B
1EA 012 615 8P0 012 615A 8P0 012 615E 7P0 012 617A
4L0 012 615 760 012 615 A000583 5001 6898012
3220901 2 8888002 695
meet all the essential requirements for the fol- lowing guidelines: (4) 2006/42/EC (EC Machinery Directive) 2014/30/EU (EC EMC Directive) 2000/14/EC (EC Outdoor Noise Directive) Person authorised to compile the technical documents referred to in Annex VII A of Directive 2006/42/EC: Aircom Automotive Sp. z o.o. Sp.k. Dominik Gschwender (5) ul. Fabryczna 20B 55-080 Pietrzykowice Poland
Applied harmonised standards: (6) DIN EN 12100:2012 / DIN EN ISO 3744:1995 DIN EN 60204-1:2006 / DIN EN ISO 2151:2009 DIN EN 60335-1:2012 / DIN EN ISO 4871:2009 DIN EN 1012-1:2011 / DIN EN ISO13732-1:2008 DIN EN 55012:2010 / DIN EN 61000-6-3:2011 DIN EN 61000-6-1:2016 Other technical standards and specifications applied: none (7) Pietrzykowice, 23.04.2019 [Signature, D. Gschwender] Dominik Gschwender, general management Note: this declaration loses its validity if techni- cal or operational changes are made without the consent of the manufacturer.
Method 2
Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity: EC declaration of conformity
General notes 31
In accordance with EC Directive 2006/42/EC We hereby declare that the product Product designation: Daimler electric air pump Model designation: 0851ve, DT/UW 200046 IBK-LK2 MB part no.: A 000 583 8200 complies with the following relevant regulations: 2014/30/EU Applied harmonised standards, in particular: DIN EN 55014-1: 2012 DIN EN 55014-2: 2016 Manufacturer: Dunlop Tech GmbH Address: Offenbacher Landstrasse 8, 63456 Hanau Authorised representative: IMS dept. Date: December 2019 Signature: IMS-AE, IMS-AE-L
32 General notes
Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is a technical inter- face in the vehicle. It is used, for example, within the scope of repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data by a specialist work- shop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be connected by a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to con- necting devices to the diagnostics con- nection
If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired. # For safety reasons, we recommend that
you only use and connect products approved by your Mercedes-Benz service centre.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.
* NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection
Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery.
# If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance.
Please also note the information about the 12 V battery and short-distance trips in the "Driving and Parking" chapter (/ page 157).
Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following effects: R Malfunctions in the vehicle system R Permanent damage to vehicle components Please refer to the warranty terms and condi- tions for this matter. Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnos- tics connection can lead to emissions monitor- ing information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection.
Qualified specialist workshop
* NOTE Plug-in hybrid # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
A qualified specialist workshop has the neces- sary special skills, tools and qualifications to
correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to safety-rele- vant works. Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop: R Safety-relevant works R Service and maintenance work R Repair work R Modifications as well as installations and
conversions R Work on electronic components
MercedesBenz recommends a MercedesBenz service centre.
Vehicle registration Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehi- cles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehi- cle checks if Mercedes-Benz has your registra- tion data.
General notes 33
It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the following cases: R if your vehicle was not purchased at an
authorised specialist dealer. R if your vehicle has not yet been examined at
a Mercedes-Benz service centre. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle owner- ship. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service centre, for example.
Correct use of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle: R the safety notes in this manual and respec-
tive Supplements R technical data for the vehicle
34 General notes
R traffic rules and regulations R laws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles
Information on the REACH regulation EU and EFTA countries only: the REACH regulation (Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006, Article 33) stipulates a duty to sup- ply information about substances of very high concern (SVHCs). MercedesBenz AG acts to the best of its knowl- edge to prevent these SVHCs from being used and to enable customers to safely handle these substances. There are SVHCs known to MercedesBenz AG, according to supplier infor- mation and internal product information, found in individual components of this vehicle in quan- tities of over 0.1 percent by weight. Further information can be obtained at the fol- lowing addresses: R https://reach.daimler.com/de/home/ R https://reach.daimler.com/en/home/
Notes for persons with electronic medical aids
* NOTE Plug-in hybrid # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating sta- tus of the vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets. These fields can be found, for example, in the area around the multimedia and sound system or also in the area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment. For this reason, the following can occur in isola- ted cases, depending on the aids used: R Medical aids malfunctioning R Adverse health effects
Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac- turer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possi- bility of medical aids malfunctioning, MercedesBenz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components. Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out by a qualified specialist workshop: R vehicle components carrying live voltage R transmission aerials R multimedia system and sound system
If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Implied warranty
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instruc- tions.
Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola- tion of these operating instructions. This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. # Follow the instructions in these operat-
ing instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehi- cle damage.
QR code for rescue card QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card con- tains the most important information about your
General notes 35
vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
Data storage Data processing in the vehicle Electronic control units Electronic control units are fitted in your vehicle. Control units process data which, for example, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such as driver assistance systems, while others enable convenience or infotainment func- tions. The following provides you with general informa- tion regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties, and for what pur- pose, can be found in the information directly
related to the functional characteristics in ques- tion in their respective operating instructions. This information is also available online and, depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally.
Personal data Every vehicle is identified by a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the coun- try, this vehicle identification number can be used by, for example, governmental authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the licence plate number. Therefore, data generated or processed by con- trol units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about, for example, your driving behaviour, your location, your route or your use patterns.
Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of data If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide gov-
36 General notes
ernmental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufac- turer. For example, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal offence. Governmental entities are themselves, in individ- ual cases and within the applicable legal frame- work, authorised to read out data from the vehi- cle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the airbag control unit, for example.
Operational data in the vehicle This is data regarding the operation of the vehi- cle, which have been processed by control units. This includes the following data, for example: R vehicle status information such as the speed,
longitudinal acceleration, lateral accelera- tion, number of wheel revolutions or the fas- tened seat belts display R ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor
Generally, the use of these data is temporary; they will not be stored beyond the period of operation and will only be processed within the
vehicle itself. Control units often contain data memories for vehicle keys, for example. Their use permits the temporary or permanent docu- mentation of technical information about the vehicle's operating state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or faults. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow- ing data are stored: R operating status of system components,
such as fill levels, tyre pressure or battery status R malfunctions or faults in important system components, such as lights or brakes R system reactions in special driving situations, such as airbag deployment or the interven- tion of stability control systems R information on events leading to vehicle damage
In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been used only tem- porarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, for example.
If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identification number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as breakdown services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures. In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics con- nection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, mal- functions and other faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle identification number to the manufacturer. Furthermore, the manufac- turer is subject to product liability. For this rea- son the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, for example, for recalls. These
General notes 37
data can also be used to examine the custom- er's warranty and guarantee claims. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work.
Convenience and infotainment functions You can store convenience settings and individ- ual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, for example: R seat and steering wheel positions R suspension and climate control settings R individual settings, such as interior lighting
Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, for example: R multimedia data, such as music, films or pho-
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia system
R address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an inte- grated navigation system
R entered navigation destinations R data about the use of Internet services
These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time. This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in par- ticular, when you use online services in accord- ance with the settings that you have selected.
Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay®) If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smart-
phone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain information is simultaneously transfer- red to your smartphone. Depending on the type and integration, this includes position data, day/ night mode and other general vehicle statuses. For more information please consult the Owner's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system. This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in par- ticular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of additional data processing is deter- mined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the specific app and the operating system of your smartphone.
Online services Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connec- tion, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wire- less network connection is made possible by the
38 General notes
vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online func- tions can be used via the wireless network con- nection. This includes online services and appli- cations/apps provided to you by the manufac- turer or by other providers. Manufacturer's services Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, for example, in the Owner's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, processed and used, other than for the provision of serv- ices, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, for example, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a con- tractual agreement or when consent has been given.
You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactiva- ted. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system. Third party services If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsi- bility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufac- turer has no influence on the content exchanged. For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of per- sonal data.
Data protection rights Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on offer, you are entitled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection
and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service offers. There you will also find the contact information for the manufac- turer and its data protection officers. At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.
Copyright Information on licences for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Restraint system Protection provided by the restraint system
The restraint system includes the following com- ponents: R Seat belt system R Airbags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing systems
The restraint system can help prevent the vehi- cle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected. A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro- tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, seat belt tensioners and/or airbags supplement the protection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Seat belt tensioners and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident.
In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occu- pant must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos-
sible. R Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in
an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
However, no system available today can com- pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.
Occupant safety 39
Reduced restraint system protection
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system
Vehicle occupants may no longer be protec- ted as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system. # Never alter the parts of the restraint
system. # Never tamper with the wiring or any
electronic component parts or their software.
If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom- modate a person with disabilities, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use driv- ing aids which have been approved for your vehi- cle by Mercedes-Benz.
Restraint system functionality When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 6 restraint sys-
40 Occupant safety
tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional.
Malfunctioning restraint system A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys- tem if: R the 6 restraint system warning lamp does
not light up when the ignition is switched on R the 6 restraint system warning lamp
lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc- tions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and
repaired immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.
Function of the restraint system in an acci- dent
How the restraint system works is determined by the severity of the impact detected and the type of accident anticipated: R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Only for certain countries: rollover
The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is preemptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the colli- sion. Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a deci- sive role in the deployment of an airbag. Nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly with- out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if
only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle decel- eration. Depending on the detected deployment situa- tion, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other: R Seat belt tensioner: frontal impact, rear
impact, side impact, rollover1 R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: fron-
tal impact R Knee airbag: frontal impact R Side airbag: side impact R Window airbag: side impact, rollover1, frontal
impact
1) Only for certain countries. The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 50).
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot airbag components
The airbag parts are hot after an airbag has been deployed. # Do not touch the airbag parts. # Have a deployed airbag replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, partic- ularly if a seat belt tensioner is triggered or an airbag deployed. If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an air- bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R The bang will not generally affect your hear-
ing.
R In general, the powder released is not haz- ardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.
Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can- not perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly.
Occupant safety 41
# Always ensure that all vehicle occu- pants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.
Always observe the instructions about the cor- rect driver's seat position and adjusting the seat (/ page 95). In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro- vide the intended level of protection, each vehi- cle occupant must observe the following infor- mation: R The seat belt must not be twisted and must
fit tightly and snugly across the body. R The seat belt must be routed across the
centre of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. R The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. R Push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoul-
42 Occupant safety
der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this. R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin- ted, abrasive or fragile objects. R Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Never allow babies and chil- dren to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads (/ page 106). Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat.
If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 55).
Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position
The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself. # Adjust the seat properly before begin-
ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoul- der.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature
Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable addi- tional restraint system. # Always secure persons under 1.50 m
tall in a suitable restraint system.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts
Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations: R the seat belt is damaged, has been modi-
fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed R the seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty R modifications have been made to the seat
belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters.
Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified seat belt tensioners could acciden- tally trigger or fail to function as intended. # Never modify the seat belt system, for
example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor. # Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean. # Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. The sports seat is designed for the standard three-point seat belt. If you fit a different multi- point seat belt, for example a four-point seat belt, the restraint system cannot provide the intended level of protection.
Depending on the type of vehicle, there may be openings in the seat backrest. These openings have no function.
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to modified seat belt systems
If you feed seat belts through the opening in the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be damaged or may even break in the event of an accident. # Only use the standard three-point seat
belt. # Never modify the seat belt system.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tension- ers
Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protec- tive function. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic
seat belt tensioners immediately
Occupant safety 43
replaced at a qualified specialist work- shop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. * NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. # Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted.
Fastening seat belts If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can- not be pulled out any further.
44 Occupant safety
# Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the cor- responding seat.
% A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Observe the notes on fastening the seat belt (/ page 41).
* NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buckled
When the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the restraint system may deploy unneces- sarily on the front passenger side, e.g. the seat belt tensioner. # Only buckle the seat belts as intended.
% Observe the notes on correctly fastening the seat belt (/ page 41) and stowage options (/ page 106). Information on fitting a child restraint sys- tem and on children travelling in the vehicle can be found in the "Children in the vehicle" section (/ page 59).
Seat belt adjustment function Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: after a front seat belt has been fastened, the automatic seat belt
adjustment may apply a certain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia sys- tem (/ page 44).
Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment.
Releasing seat belts # Press the release button in the seat belt
buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue.
Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger The ü seat belt warning lamp in the instru- ment display is a reminder that all vehicle occu- pants must wear their seat belts correctly. In addition, a warning tone may sound. As soon as the driver and front passenger fasten their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out.
Function of the rear seat belt status display The rear seat belt status display is only available for certain countries.
When the ignition is switched on, the rear seat belt status display informs you for a certain amount of time which rear seat belt is not fas- tened. You can immediately dismiss the rear seat belt status display using the back button on the lefthand side of the steering wheel (/ page 248). If a vehicle occupant unfastens a seat belt in the rear while the vehicle is motion, the rear seat belt status display appears again. In addition, a warning tone may sound. In this case, the rear seat belt status display cannot be hidden using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.
Airbags Overview of airbags
Occupant safety 45
1 Knee airbag 2 Driver's airbag 3 Front passenger airbag 4 Window airbag 5 Side airbag
The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant.
46 Occupant safety
Potential protection provided by each airbag: R Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head
and ribcage R Window airbag: head R Side airbag: ribcage and pelvis
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co-driver airbag is enabled
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the codriver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information (/ page 70). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 70). Information on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 50).
* NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied
In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if: R There are heavy objects on the front
passenger seat.
R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied.
# Stow objects in a suitable place. # Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Depending on the detected accident situation, the window airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied.
Protective capacity of the airbags Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection offered by a cor- rectly fastened seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position
If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended pro- tective function.
Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following: R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant
women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen. R Adopt the correct seat position and keep as far away as possible from the airbags. R Observe the following information.
# Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant.
To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat
correctly; the driver's seat and front passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the informa- tion on the correct driver's seat position (/ page 95).
R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed.
R Always lean against the seat backrest when the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags.
R The occupants must always keep their feet on the floor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may other- wise be in the deployment area of the airbag.
R If children are travelling in the vehicle, observe the additional notes (/ page 55).
R Always stow and secure objects correctly.
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the follow- ing in particular: R There are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air- bag.
Occupant safety 47
R There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar).
R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.
R There are no accessory parts, such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an air- bag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deploy- ment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation.
R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.
48 Occupant safety
Limited protection provided by airbags
& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi- cations to the cover of an airbag
If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may no longer function correctly. # Never modify the cover of an airbag and
do not affix objects to it.
The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 45).
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers
Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as inten- ded. In addition, the operation of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff could be restricted.
# You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the correspond- ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc- tioning sensors in the door
The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work per- formed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged. # Never modify the doors or parts of the
doors. # Always have work on the doors or door
trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag
A deployed airbag no longer offers any pro- tection.
# Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced.
Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.
Status of the front passenger front airbag Function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint sys- tem. The front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled accordingly.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat
Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the sys- tem. # Do not store any objects under the co-
driver seat.
# When the co-driver seat is occupied, make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.
When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information (/ page 70). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 70).
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system
Objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system could affect the func- tion of the automatic co-driver airbag shut- off. # Do not place any objects between the
sitting surface and the child restraint system. # Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system is resting on the sitting surface of the co-driver seat.
# Make sure that the backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system is, as far as possible, resting on the seat backrest of the co-driver seat.
# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 41). R Sit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos-
sible.
The front passenger airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the follow- ing situations: R The front passenger transfers their weight by
supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest. R The front passenger sits in such a way that
their weight is raised from the sitting sur- face.
Occupant safety 49
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag
The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R the classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa- bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R the front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. R the person is seated correctly.
# Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
50 Occupant safety
If the front passenger seat is occupied, the clas- sification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place after the front passenger airbag shutoff self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag. Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (/ page 50).
Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica- tor lamps
Vehicles without automatic front passenger air- bag shutoff have a special sticker affixed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side (/ page 69).
Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously. The status of the front passenger airbag is dis- played via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps after the self-test: R ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may
deploy during an accident. The indicator lamp goes out after 60 sec- onds. R ON and OFF are not lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident. R OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disa- bled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not fit a child restraint system to the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the sta- tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation. After fitting a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continu- ously.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Always ensure that the front passenger
airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. # NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENA- BLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.
When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information (/ page 70). Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG
Occupant safety 51
OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do not fit the rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat. Instead, fit the rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat. After fitting a forward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat: depend- ing on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off. Always observe the fol- lowing information.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forwardfacing child restraint system
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in the event of an accident, the child could: R come into contact with parts of the vehi-
cle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
52 Occupant safety
# Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. While doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the front passenger seat accordingly.
# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information (/ page 70). If a person is sitting on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con- tinuously or be off, depending on the person's stature.
A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information: R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an
adult or a person with a stature correspond- ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This indicates that the front passenger airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person with a build corresponding to that of an adult must not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat. R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is either lit continuously or remains off, depending on the classification. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off: move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the per- son of smaller stature should use a rear seat.
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the self-test, the front passenger airbag is disabled. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa- bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The person is seated properly with a cor- rectly fastened seat belt. R The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible.
Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Child restraint system on the front passenger
seat (/ page 70) R Suitable positioning of the child restraint sys-
tem (/ page 59)
PRE-SAFE® system PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protec- tion)
PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driv- ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas- ures to protect the vehicle occupants. PRE-SAFE® can implement the following meas- ures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: close the
sliding sunroof.
R Vehicles with memory function: move the front passenger seat to a more favourable seat position.
R PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multi- media system is switched on, generates a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro- tective mechanism of a person's hearing.
* NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat
The automatic adjustment of the seat posi- tion may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. # Stow objects in a suitable place.
Reversing the PRE-SAFE® system measures If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings your- self.
Occupant safety 53
# If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases.
Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact. PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat. R Activating the rear hazard warning lights at a
higher flashing frequency. R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle
is stationary. This brake application is cancel- led automatically when the vehicle pulls away.
54 Occupant safety
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed.
System limits The system will not initiate any action in the fol- lowing situations: R when reversing
or R when the vehicle is towing a trailer and there
is a risk of a rear impact
The system will not initiate any braking applica- tion in the following situations: R whilst driving
or R when entering or exiting a parking space
while using Active Parking Assist
Automatic measures after an accident
Depending on the type and severity of the acci- dent, and depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following measures can be implemented, for example: R automatic braking (post-collision brake) R activating the hazard warning lights R triggering an automatic emergency call
(/ page 288) R switching off the engine
To restart the vehicle, switch the ignition off and switch it back on (/ page 153). Depending on the type and severity of the accident, it is possible that the vehicle can no longer be started. R switching off the fuel supply R unlocking the vehicle doors R lowering the side windows R displaying the emergency guide in the multi- media system display R switching on the interior lighting
Function of the post-collision brake Depending on the accident situation, the postcollision brake can minimise the severity of a fur- ther collision or even avoid it. If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake can implement automatic braking. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is automatically applied. The driver can cancel automatic braking by tak- ing the following actions: R braking more strongly than automatic brak-
ing R fully depressing the accelerator pedal with
force
Safely transporting children in the vehicle Always observe when children are travelling in the vehicle % Also strictly observe the safety notes for the
specific situation. In this way you can recog- nise potential risks and avoid dangers if chil- dren are travelling in the vehicle (/ page 55).
Be diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have seri- ous consequences. Always be diligent in secur- ing a child carefully before every journey. To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 1.50 m in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information: R Always secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi- cle. R The child restraint system must be appropri- ate to the age, weight and size of the child. R The vehicle seat must be suitable for fitting a child restraint system (/ page 59).
Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than chil- dren secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you fit a child restraint system to a rear seat.
The generic term child restraint system The generic term child restraint system is used in this Owner's Manual. A child restraint system is, for example: R a baby car seat R a rearward-facing child seat R a forward-facing child seat R a child booster seat with a backrest and seat
belt guide Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest.
The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.
Observe laws and legal requirements Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle. Make sure that the child restraint system is approved in accordance with the valid test speci- fications and guidelines. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
Occupant safety 55
Only use approved child restraint systems Only child restraint systems that meet the fol- lowing UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle: R UN-R44 R UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems) Information on child restraint system approval categories and details on the approval label on the child restraint system (/ page 60).
Detecting risks, avoiding danger
Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R the ISOFIX or i-Size securing rings R the vehicle's seat belt system R the Top Tether anchorages Fitting an ISOFIX or an i-Size child restraint sys- tem is preferred.
56 Occupant safety
Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of fitting the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys- tem, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint system (/ page 63).
Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the oppo- site direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer- vical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.
Always secure a child restraint system cor- rectly
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system
The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. # Be sure to comply with the manufactur-
er's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use. # Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat. # Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint sys- tem. # Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them. # Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle
If the child restraint system is incorrectly fit- ted or not secured, it can come loose. The child restraint system could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Always install child restraint systems
correctly, even when not in use. # Always comply with the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instructions.
R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-specific information: - Fitting the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system to the rear seat (/ page 63). - Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 68).
- Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat (/ page 70). Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 70). If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the jour- ney, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the cur- rent situation (/ page 50).
R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system.
R Also secure Top Tether if present.
Do not modify the child restraint system
& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi- cations to the child restraint system
The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. # Never modify a child restraint system.
Occupant safety 57
# Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer.
MercedesBenz recommends Mercedes-Benz care products for cleaning child restraint sys- tems recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition
& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems
Child restraint systems or their retaining sys- tems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function. It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. # Always immediately replace child
restraint systems that have been dam- aged or involved in an accident.
# Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.
Avoid direct sunlight
& WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight
If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly on metallic parts of the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child
restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. # Protect the child restraint system with a blanket, for example. # If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it.
58 Occupant safety
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Observe when stopping or parking
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
& WARNING Danger to life due to expo- sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi- cle
If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in partic-
ular, unattended in the vehicle.
Overview of recommended child restraint systems % Further information on the correct child
restraint system can be obtained at a quali- fied specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. Securing with ISOFIX
Weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 months)
Type1
BABY SAFE plus
Size category
E
Approval
E1 04 301 146
Order number2
B6 6 86 8224
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
Weight category I (9 to 18 kg and from approximately 9 months to 4 years)
Type1
DUO plus
Size category
B1
Approval
E1 04 301 133
Type1 Order number2
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer.
DUO plus A 000 970 43 02
2 With colour code 9H95.
Securing with the vehicle seat belt
Weight category 0 (up to 10 kg and approx- imately 6 months) and weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and approximately 15 months)
Type1
BABY SAFE plus II
Approval
E1 04 301 146
Order number2
A 000 970 38 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
Weight category I (9 to 18 kg and from approximately 9 months to 4 years)
Type1
DUO plus
Approval
E1 04 301 133
Order number2
A 000 970 43 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
Weight category II/III (15 to 36 kg and from approximately 3 to 12 years)
Type1
KIDFIX XP
Approval
E1 04 301 304
Order number2
A 000 970 49 02
Type1
AMG KIDFIX XP
Approval
E1 04 301 304
Order number2
A 000 970 33 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
Occupant safety 59
Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for fitting a child restraint system
Left/right rear seat Preferred securing system: ® ISOFIX child seat securing system
(/ page 61) or ° i-Size child seat securing system (/ page 62) ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 65).
Alternative securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 66)
Front passenger seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 66)
Be sure to observe: R If the front passenger seat is occupied,
ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag
60 Occupant safety
is correct for the current situation (/ page 50). R Notes on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 48). Centre rear seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 66)
There may be further information such as the ISOFIX size categories, depending on the approval category of the child restraint system. Approval categories in accordance with UNR44
Approval categories for child restraint sys- tems
Only use approved child restraint systems Only child restraint systems that meet the fol- lowing UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle: R UN-R44 R UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems)
Identification on the child restraint system Information about the approval category, weight category and approval number, for example, is on the approval label on the child restraint sys- tem.
Example of an approval label R Universal: child restraint systems in the
"Universal" category are approved for instal-
lation in vehicles. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the suitability of seats for securing child restraint systems, on seats labelled U, UF or IUF. The identification IUF refers to ISOFIX child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or support points. R Semi-Universal: child restraint systems in the "Semi-Universal" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. R Vehicle-specific: child restraint systems in the "vehicle-specific" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
Approval categories in accordance with UNR129
Example of an approval label R iSize: child restraint systems in the "iSize"
category are approved for installation in vehi- cles with iSize mounting brackets. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the
suitability of seats for securing child restraint systems, on seats labelled iU. The identification iU refers to iSize child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or support points.
Observe the suitability of vehicle seats Depending on the approval category, there are forward-facing and rearward-facing child restraint systems. Their use can be restricted for certain vehicle seats: R Suitability of seats for attaching ISOFIX child
restraint systems (/ page 61) R Suitability of seats for securing iSize child
restraint systems (/ page 62). R Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured
child restraint systems (/ page 66)
Occupant safety 61
Fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys- tem on the rear seat
Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems. ® The symbol indicates seats suitable for
attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in accordance with UN R44 (/ page 60). Attach only child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with UN R44 as per the following ISOFIX tables.
Carry cot
Size class Equipment
Left/right rear seat
F ISO/L1
X
G ISO/L2
X
X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight group and/or size class.
62 Occupant safety
Weight group 0 (up to 10 kg and up to approx. 6 months)
Size class Equipment
Left/right rear seat
E ISO/R1
IL
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint sys- tem manufacturer's vehicle model list.
Weight group 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 months)
Size class Equipment
Left/right rear seat
E ISO/R1
IL
D ISO/R2,
IL
ISO/R2X
Size class Equipment
Left/right rear seat
C ISO/R3
IL (1)
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint sys- tem manufacturer's vehicle model list.
(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system.
Weight group 1 (918 kg and approx. 9 months to 4 years)
Size class Equipment
Left/right rear seat
D ISO/R2,
IL
ISO/R2X
C ISO/R3
IL (1)
B ISO/F2
IUF
Size class Equipment
Left/right rear seat
B1 ISO/F2X
IUF
A ISO/F3
IUF
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint sys- tem manufacturer's vehicle model list.
IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight group.
(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system.
Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching iSize child restraint systems
iSize is a standardised securing system for spe- cially designed child restraint systems. ° The symbol indicates seats suitable for
attaching an iSize child restraint system
in accordance with UN R129 (/ page 60). Child restraint systems that are permitted in accordance with UN R44 as per the ISOFIX tables (/ page 61) or UN R129 as per the following iSize tables may be attached.
iSize child restraint systems (ISO/R2, ISO/ F2X, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)
Front passenger seat
Left/right rear seat
X
iU
X Not suitable for an i-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category.
i-U Suitable for forward-facing and rearward-facing i-Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category.
Fitting an ISOFIX or iSize child restraint sys- tem on the rear seat
& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back- rest may fold forwards, even while the vehi- cle is in motion. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be
pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the boot or load com- partment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. # Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indica- tor will be visible.
Occupant safety 63
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is excee- ded.
Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint systems and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example. # If the child and the child restraint sys-
tem together weigh more than 33 kg, only use an ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system with which the child is secured with the vehicle seat belt. # Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.
Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system: R in the manufacturer's installation and operat-
ing instructions for the child restraint system used R on a label on the child restraint system, if present
64 Occupant safety
Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with. When fitting a child restraint system, observe the following: O Always observe the correct use of the seats
and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system. ISOFIX child seat securing system (/ page 61) or iSize child seat securing system (/ page 62) O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.
® When fitting an ISOFIX child restraint sys- tem, also observe the following: O When using a baby car seat in weight
group 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child
restraint system in weight group 1 on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint sys- tem. O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight group 1: remove the head restraint from the respec- tive seat, if possible. In addition, the back- rest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly. O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys- tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.
° When fitting an iSize child restraint sys- tem, also observe the following: O When using a rearward-facing child
restraint system: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint sys- tem. O When using a forward-facing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possi- ble. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly.
Occupant safety 65
1 ISOFIX mounting bracket 2 iSize mounting bracket Before every journey, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system or the iSize child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehicle.
* NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the centre seat during installation of the child restraint system
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap- ped.
# Attach the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint sys- tem to both mounting brackets in the vehicle.
Securing Top Tether
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked after Top Tether belts are fitted
The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when you are driving. As a result, child restraint systems will no longer be able to perform their intended pro- tective function. This may also cause addi- tional injuries. # Always lock rear seat backrests after
fitting Top Tether belts.
# Observe the lock verification indicator.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indica- tor will be visible. ¯ If the child restraint system is equipped
with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with ISOFIX or iSize and the vehicle.
66 Occupant safety
Vehicles with adjustable head restraints: # If necessary, slide the head restraint
upwards (/ page 100). # Guide Top Tether belt 3 under the head
restraint between the two head restraint bars. Vehicles without adjustable head restraints: # Top Tether belt with one seat belt strap: guide Top Tether belt 3 over the centre of the head restraint. or # Top Tether belt with two seat belt straps: guide one Top Tether belt 3 past the head
restraint on the right and left sides respec- tively. All vehicles: # Fit the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's instal- lation instructions. # Hook Top Tether hook 2 into Top Tether anchorage 1 without twisting. # Tension Top Tether belt 3. In doing so, com- ply with the child restraint system manufac- turer's installation instructions.
Vehicles with adjustable head restraints: # If necessary, slide the head restraint down-
wards (/ page 100). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt 3.
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt Notes on the suitability of seats for attach- ing belt-secured child restraint systems
Rear seats Weight category 0: up to 10 kg
Left/right rear seat
U, L
Centre rear seat1
U, L
Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg
Left/right rear seat
U, L
Centre rear seat1
U, L
Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg
Left/right rear seat
U, L
Centre rear seat1
U, L
Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg
Left/right rear seat
U, L
Centre rear seat1
U, L
Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg
Left/right rear seat
U, L
Centre rear seat1
U, L
1 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable for this seat.
U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Univer- sal" category in this weight category.
L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
Notes on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat R If it is absolutely necessary for you to fit a
child restraint system to the front passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on
child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 70). R Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 50).
Front passenger seat Weight category 0: up to 10 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1
X
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2
U, L
Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1
X
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2
U, L
Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1
UF, L
Occupant safety 67
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1 Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1 Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2
1 Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest posi- tion.
U, L
UF, L U, L
UF, L U, L
2 The vehicle is equipped with automatic front passenger airbag shutoff. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
X Not suitable for children in this weight category.
U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Univer- sal" category in this weight category.
68 Occupant safety
L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat
& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back- rest may fold forwards, even while the vehi- cle is in motion. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be
pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury.
R Objects or loads in the boot or load com- partment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indica- tor will be visible. When fitting a belt-secured child restraint system, observe the following: O Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. O For a child restraint system in the "Univer- sal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that the system has been approved for the vehicle seat. Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems" (/ page 66).
O When using a weight category 0/0+ baby car seat and a weight category I rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system.
O When using a weight category I forwardfacing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly.
O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.
O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys- tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in
place will not result in any restrictions on use. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.
# Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the rear seat.
# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet.
Notes on vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff
Sticker visible when the front passenger door is open Vehicles without automatic front passenger air- bag shutoff have a special sticker affixed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side.
Occupant safety 69
Make sure you observe the following informa- tion: R Never fit a rearward-facing child restraint
system to the front passenger seat R Always fit a rearward-facing child restraint
system to a suitable rear seat - Suitability of seats for attaching belt-
secured child restraint systems (/ page 66) - Secure the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 68). R Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 70)
70 Occupant safety
Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Always ensure that the front passenger
airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. # NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENA- BLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.
Observe the specific instructions for the rear- ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 70).
Warning notice on the front passenger sun visor Always observe the status of the front passenger airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica- tor lamp: R If it is absolutely necessary to fit a child
restraint system to the front passenger seat, always observe the information on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 48). R When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front
passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (/ page 50). R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag is ena- bled. The front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident.
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat When fitting a belt-secured child restraint sys- tem on the front passenger seat, always observe the following: O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and
forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 70). O Observe the child restraint system manufac- turer's installation and operating instruc- tions. O For a child restraint system in the "Univer- sal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that the system has been approved for the vehicle seat.
Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems" (/ page 66). O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly. O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys- tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.
O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.
# Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible.
# Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.
# Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.
# Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat.
Occupant safety 71
# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for- wards and downwards from the seat belt out- let.
# If necessary, adjust the front passenger seat accordingly.
Child safety locks Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
72 Occupant safety
R get out and be struck by oncoming traf- fic.
R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle. # Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of
children.
& WARNING Danger to life due to expo- sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi- cle
If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended
period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in partic-
ular, unattended in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are travelling in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
# Always activate the installed child safety locks if children are travelling in the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the important safety notes in the "Notes on the addi- tional door lock" section. There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows. The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside.
# Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or 2 (deactivate).
# Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly.
Activating and deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows
Occupant safety 73 R indicator lamp 1 is off: via the switch on
the corresponding rear door or driver's door
# To activate/deactivate: press button 2. The rear side window can be opened or closed in the following cases: R indicator lamp 1 is lit: via the switch on the driver's door
Notes on pets in the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unat- tended in the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten- ded or unsecured, they could press buttons or switches, for instance. An animal may: R activate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example R switch systems on or off and endanger
other road users
Unsecured animals may be thrown about the vehicle in the event of an accident, or sudden steering and braking manoeuvres, and injure vehicle occupants.
74 Occupant safety
# Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle.
# Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car- rier.
Key Overview of key functions
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
* NOTE Damage to the key caused by magnetic fields
# Keep the key away from strong mag- netic fields.
Vehicle key 1 Locks
Opening and closing 75
2 Indicator lamp 3 Unlocks
% If indicator lamp 2 does not light up after pressing the Ü or ß button, the bat- tery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible.
Replace the key battery (/ page 77). The key locks and unlocks the following compo- nents: R Doors R Fuel filler flap R tailgate
If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Antitheft protection is primed again. Do not keep the key together with electronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the key's functionality.
76 Opening and closing
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Acoustic lock. % Please note:
The selected setting for the acoustic locking verification signal must comply with the rele- vant national road and traffic regulations. In some countries, including Germany, using the acoustic locking verification signal is for- bidden by traffic laws (in accordance with §16 Para. 1 and §30 Para. 1 of the German national road traffic regulations). The driver of the vehicle must comply with these regu- lations. In countries where the use of this function is forbidden, this function is not activated in the vehicle and must not be acti- vated.
Changing the unlocking settings Possible unlocking functions of the key: R Central unlocking
R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap # To switch between settings: press the
Ü and ß buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice. Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected: R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the Ü button twice. R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel filler flap are unlocked.
Deactivating the function of the key Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the function of the key, the KEYLESS-GO func- tions are also deactivated. Access or drive authorization by KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that particular key. Activate the function of the key so that all its functions will again be available.
You can also deactivate the function of the key to reduce the energy consumption of the key if you do not use the vehicle or a key for an exten- ded period of time. # To deactivate: press the ß button on the
key twice in quick succession. The key indicator lamp flashes twice briefly and lights up once. # To activate: press any button on the key. % When the vehicle is started with the key in the stowage compartment of the centre con- sole, the function of the key is automatically activated (/ page 154).
Removing/inserting the emergency key Removing the emergency key
Inserting the emergency key
# Press release button 1. # Insert emergency key 2 to the intermediate
position or fully until it engages. % You can use the intermediate position of
emergency key 2 to attach the key to a key ring.
# Press release button 1. Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly.
# Pull out emergency key 2 until it engages in the intermediate position.
% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the intermediate position is not available.
# Press release button 1 again and fully remove emergency key 2.
Replacing the key battery
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to swallowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub- stances. Swallowing batteries may cause severe internal burns to occur within two hours. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil-
dren. # If the cap and/or the battery compart-
ment does not close securely, do not
Opening and closing 77 use the key any longer and keep it out of the reach of children. # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat- teries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.
78 Opening and closing Requirements: R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist work- shop. # Remove the emergency key (/ page 77).
# Press release knob 2 down fully and slide cover 1 in the direction of the arrow.
# Fold out cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove.
# Remove battery compartment 3 and take out the discharged battery.
# Insert the new battery into battery compart- ment 3. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the bat- tery when doing this.
# Push in battery compartment 3. # Re-attach cover 1 and push it until it
engages.
Problems with the key, troubleshooting
You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle Possible causes: R The key battery is weak or discharged.
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 75).
# Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 77).
# Use the replacement key. # Use the emergency key to lock or unlock
(/ page 82). # Have the key checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
There is interference from a powerful radio signal source Possible causes if the function of the key is impaired: R high voltage power lines R mobile phones R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R shielding due to metal objects or induction
loops for electrical gate systems or auto- matic barriers
# Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the key and the potential source of interference.
You have lost a key # Have the key deactivated at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. # If necessary, have the mechanical lock
replaced as well.
Doors Notes on the additional door lock
The additional door lock is only available for vehicles for the United Kingdom.
& WARNING Risk of injury to persons inside the vehicle when the additional door lock is activated
If the additional door lock is activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. # Never leave persons, in particular chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle. # If there are persons in the vehicle, do
not activate the additional door lock.
The additional door lock is automatically activa- ted in the following situations: R The vehicle is locked using the key. R The vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO.
If the vehicle has been locked via Mercedes me connect, the additional door lock is not activa- ted. If the additional door lock is activated, the doors cannot be opened from the inside. % After locking you can issue a signal with the
horn. You can prevent the additional door lock from being activated by deactivating interior protec- tion before locking the vehicle (/ page 94).
Opening and closing 79
Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside # United Kingdom only: observe the notes on
the additional door lock (/ page 79).
# Pull door handle 1.
80 Opening and closing Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside
# To unlock: press button 1. # To lock: press button 2.
The red indicator lamp on button 2 lights up once the vehicle is locked. This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.
The vehicle is not unlocked: R If you have locked the vehicle using the key. R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY-
LESS-GO.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY- LESS-GO
Requirements: R The key is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the key and the vehicle
does not exceed 1 m. R The driver's door and the door on which the
door handle is used are closed.
* NOTE Vehicle damage due to uninten- tional opening of the tailgate
R when using an automatic car wash R when using a high pressure cleaner # Deactivate the function of the key in
these situations. or
# Make sure that the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle.
Observe the notes: R on washing the vehicle in a car wash
(/ page 306) R on using a high pressure cleaner
(/ page 308)
Opening and closing 81
# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur- face of the door handle.
# To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface 1 or 2.
# Convenience closing: touch recessed sen- sor surface 2 until the closing process has been completed.
% Further information on convenience closing (/ page 87).
If you open the tailgate from outside, it is auto- matically unlocked.
Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting
You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Possible causes: R The function of the key has been deactivated. R The key battery is weak or discharged.
# Activate the function of the key (/ page 76). # Check the battery using the indicator lamp
(/ page 75).
# Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 77).
# Use the replacement key. # Use the emergency key to lock or unlock
(/ page 82). # Have the vehicle and key checked at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
There is interference from a powerful radio signal source Possible causes if the function of KEYLESS-GO is impaired: R high voltage power lines R mobile phones R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R shielding due to metal objects or induction
loops for electrical gate systems or auto- matic barriers
# Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the key and the potential source of interference.
Activating/deactivating the automatic lock- ing feature The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn- ing faster than walking pace.
# To activate: press and hold button 2 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.
82 Opening and closing
# To deactivate: press and hold button 1 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.
The red indicator lamp on button 2 lights up once the vehicle is locked. In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated: R while the vehicle is being tow-started or
pushed R if the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna-
mometer
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the emergency key
Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the emergency key % If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using
the emergency key, first press the button for locking from the inside while the driver's door is open. Then proceed to lock the driv- er's door using the emergency key.
# Remove the emergency key (/ page 77). # Insert the emergency key as far as it will go
into opening 1 in the cover. # Pull and hold the door handle. # Pull the cover on the emergency key as
straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases. # Release the door handle.
# To unlock: turn the emergency key anticlockwise to position 1.
# To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to position 1.
# Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin- der until it engages and is seated firmly.
Locking the front passenger door and rear doors
# Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency key, into opening 1 on the door lock.
# To lock the left-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key anti-clockwise as far as it will go.
Opening and closing 83
# To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key clockwise as far as it will go.
If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer be opened from the outside.
Load compartment Opening the tailgate
* NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused by obstacles above the vehicle
The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards when it is opened. # Make sure that there is sufficient space
behind and above the tailgate.
# Pull the tailgate handle.
& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail- gate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before
opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open.
Closing the tailgate
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
84 Opening and closing
# Before the journey, secure objects, lug- gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.
# To close the tailgate: pull the tailgate down- wards with the handle and let it drop into the lock.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. Notes on closing the tailgate: your vehicle is equipped with automatic key recognition. If a key belonging to the vehicle is detected in the vehi- cle, the tailgate will not be locked. Note that the tailgate will not be locked in the following situation: R You have locked the vehicle and close the
tailgate while a key belonging to the vehicle is inside the vehicle. and R A second key belonging to the vehicle is not detected outside the vehicle.
Automatic key recognition is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # Before locking, ensure that at least one key
belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehi- cle.
Unlocking the tailgate with the emergency key
Requirements: R The rear seat backrest has been folded
forward. R The load compartment cover has been
removed.
# Remove the emergency key (/ page 77). # Insert emergency key 2 into opening 1 in
the trim and push it in. The tailgate will be unlocked.
Side windows Opening and closing the side windows
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when opening a side window
When you open a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window. # If someone is trapped, release the but-
ton immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window
When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
# If someone is trapped, release the but- ton immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows
Children could become trapped if they oper- ate the side windows, particularly when unat- tended. # Activate the child safety lock for the
rear side windows. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Requirements: R The power supply or the ignition is switched
on.
Opening and closing 85
1 Closing 2 Opening The buttons on the driver's door take prece- dence. # To start automatic operation: press the
W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.
86 Opening and closing
# To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the W button again.
When the vehicle is switched off, you can con- tinue to operate the side windows. This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened.
Automatic reversing function of the side win- dows If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window
The reversing function does not react: R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers. R during resetting.
The reversing function cannot prevent some- one from becoming trapped in these situa- tions. # During the closing process, make sure
that no body parts are in the closing area. # If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again.
Automatic function of the side windows In the following cases, the side windows will be closed automatically when the vehicle is switched off: R if it starts to rain
Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen. R in extreme temperatures R after a certain time (depending on the onboard electrical system voltage) R if there is a malfunction in the power supply
The side windows will be closed as far as the ventilation position. Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: the side windows will be closed completely if the sliding sunroof is open. If the side windows are obstructed during auto- matic closing, the side window concerned will open again slightly. The automatic function for the sliding sunroof and the side windows will then be deactivated.
Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey)
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window. # Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.
# Press and hold the Ü button on the key. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is unlocked. R The side windows are opened. R The panoramic sliding roof is opened. R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on.
% If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is opened first.
# To interrupt convenience opening: release the Ü button.
# To continue convenience opening: press and hold the Ü button again.
Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside)
& WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing
When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side win- dow and the sliding sunroof. # When the convenience closing feature
is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
# Press and hold the ß button on the key. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is locked. R The side windows are closed. R The panoramic sliding roof is closed.
# To interrupt convenience closing: release the ß button.
Opening and closing 87
# To continue convenience closing: press and hold the ß button again.
% Convenience closing also functions with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 80).
Resolving problems with the side windows
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped. # Make sure that no parts of the body are
in the closing area. # To stop the closing process, release the
button or press the button again to reopen the side window.
88 Opening and closing
A side window cannot be closed and you can- not see the cause. # Check to see whether any objects are in the
window guide. # Adjust the side windows.
Adjusting the side windows If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull and hold the cor-
responding button again until the side win- dow has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.
If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull and hold the cor-
responding button again until the side win- dow has closed and hold the button for at
least one more second (follow-up adjust- ment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function. The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening fea- ture. Possible causes: R The key battery is weak or discharged. # Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 75). # Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 77).
Sliding sunroof Opening and closing the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panorama sliding sunroof.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed
Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement. # During opening and closing, make sure
that no body parts are in the range of movement. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the slid- ing sunroof is operated by children
Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed
Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof. # When opening or closing, make sure
that no body parts are in the roller sun- blind's range of movement. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped.
* NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction. # Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free
of snow and ice.
* NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects
Objects that protrude from the sliding sun- roof may damage the sealing strips. # Do not allow anything to protrude from
the sliding sunroof.
* NOTE Damage to the panorama sliding sunroof due to non-approved roof lug- gage racks
The panorama sliding sunroof may be dam- aged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # When a roof luggage rack is fitted, open
the panorama sliding sunroof only if this
Opening and closing 89 has been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. The panorama sliding sunroof may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.
1 To raise 2 To open 3 To close/lower
90 Opening and closing
Use the 3 button to operate the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind. The panorama sliding sunroof can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open. # Check whether the sliding sunroof can be
raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is fitted. # To start automatic operation: press the 3 button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it. # To interrupt automatic operation: briefly press the 3 button in any direction. The opening/closing process will be stop- ped.
Automatic reversing function of the sliding sunroof If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof dur- ing the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic revers- ing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite the reversing function being active
In particular, the reversing function does not react: R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers. R towards the end of the closing procedure. R during resetting.
# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or # Briefly press the button in any direction
during automatic operation. The closing process will be stopped.
Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblind If an obstacle obstructs the roller sunblind dur- ing the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic revers-
ing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure
that no body parts are in the range of move- ment.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function
In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin- gers. # When closing the roller sunblind, make
sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Briefly press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped.
Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof
% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama sliding sunroof.
The sliding sunroof will be closed automatically when the vehicle has been switched off in the following situations: R if it starts to rain
Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen. R in extreme temperatures R after a certain time (depending on the onboard electrical system voltage) R if there is a malfunction in the power supply
The sliding sunroof will rise at the rear in order to continue ventilating the vehicle interior. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during an automatic closing procedure, the roof will be opened again slightly. The automatic function for the sliding sunroof and the side windows will then be deactivated.
Rain-closing feature when driving Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion. Automatic lowering function Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof
At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear. # Make sure that nobody reaches into the
sliding sunroof's range of movement while the vehicle is in motion. # If somebody becomes trapped, briefly push the sliding sunroof button for- wards or backwards.
Opening and closing 91
% By pushing or pulling the 3 button, you can interrupt the automatic functions "Rain closing function when driving" and "Auto- matic lowering".
Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again
If the sliding sunroof is closed again immedi- ately after it has been blocked or reset, it will close with increased force. # Make sure that no parts of the body are
in the closing area. # Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped. or # Briefly press the button in any direction
during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped.
92 Opening and closing
The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panorama sliding sunroof. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: # Immediately after automatic reversing, pull
and hold the 3 button down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly: # Repeat the previous step.
The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force. Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: the sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind is not operating smoothly. # Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun- blind.
Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind # Pull and hold the 3 button little by little
until the sliding sunroof is fully closed. # Pull and hold the 3 button little by little
until the roller sunblind is fully closed. # Use automatic operation to fully open and
then close the sliding sunroof.
Anti-theft protection Function of the immobiliser The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. The immobiliser is automatically activated when the ignition is switched off and deactivated when the ignition is switched on.
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Function of the ATA system If the ATA system is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R when a door is opened R when the tailgate is opened R when the bonnet is opened R when interior protection is triggered
(/ page 94) R when tow-away protection is triggered
(/ page 93)
The ATA system is primed automatically after approximately ten seconds in the following situa- tions: R after locking the vehicle with the key R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Indicator lamp 1 flashes when the ATA system is primed. The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations: R after unlocking the vehicle with the key R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
R after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (/ page 154)
% When the MercedesBenz emergency call system is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is auto- matically sent to the Customer Assistance Centre (/ page 288).
Deactivating the ATA # Press the Ü or ß button on the key. or # Press the start/stop button with the key in
the stowage compartment (/ page 154) Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO # Grasp the outside door handle with the key
outside the vehicle.
Function of tow-away protection An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while tow-away protection is primed.
Opening and closing 93
Tow-away protection is automatically primed after approximately 60 seconds: R after locking the vehicle with the key R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Tow-away protection is only primed when the fol- lowing components are closed: R doors R tailgate
Tow-away protection is automatically deactiva- ted: R after pressing the Ü button on the key R after pressing the start/stop button with the
key in the stowage compartment (/ page 154) R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESSGO
Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle (/ page 183).
94 Opening and closing
Priming/deactivating tow-away protection Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access # Prime or deactivate Tow-away protection. Tow-away protection is primed again in the fol- lowing cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again.
% If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle submenu in the Settings main menu to prime or deactivate tow-away protection.
Function of interior protection When interior protection is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detec- ted in the vehicle interior. Interior protection is primed automatically after approximately ten seconds: R after locking the vehicle with the key R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Interior protection is only primed when the fol- lowing components are closed: R doors R tailgate
Interior protection is automatically deactivated: R after pressing the Ü button on the key R after pressing the start/stop button with the
key in the stowage compartment (/ page 154) R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESSGO
The following situations can lead to a false alarm: R moving objects such as mascots in the vehi-
cle interior R when a side window is open R when a panoramic sliding sunroof is open
Priming/deactivating interior protection
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access # Prime or deactivate Interior motion sensor. Interior protection is primed again in the follow- ing cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again.
% If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle menu under Settings to prime or deactivate interior protection.
Notes on the correct driver's seat position
& WARNING Risk of injury if vehicle set- tings are adjusted while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in par- ticular in the following situations: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir- ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion.
# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, head restraints, steering wheel and mirror in particular and fas- ten your seat belt.
Ensure the following when adjusting steering wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3: R You are sitting as far away from the driver's
airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration: R You are sitting in an upright position R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion
Seats and stowing 95
R Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly
R The back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint
R You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent
R You can move your legs freely R You can see all the displays on the instru-
ment cluster clearly R You have a good overview of the traffic con-
ditions R Your seat belt sits snugly against your body
and passes across the centre of your shoul- der and across your hips in the pelvic area
Vehicles with an AMG performance seat: if the front passenger seat is unoccupied, this can lead to noise caused by the seat belt tongue knocking against the seat. You can prevent this by sliding the seat belt tongue upwards with the belt clip. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that the belt clip is pushed down. Only then will the seat belt fit tight to the body.
96 Seats and stowing
Seats Adjusting the front seat mechanically (with- out Seat Comfort Package)
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during seat adjustment
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. # Make sure when adjusting a seat that
no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil- dren in the vehicle".
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged
The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Always make sure that the driver's seat
is engaged before starting the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury if vehicle set- tings are adjusted while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in par- ticular in the following situations: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir- ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion.
# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, head restraints, steering wheel and mirror in particular and fas- ten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being adjus- ted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints
fitted. # Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position
The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself. # Adjust the seat properly before begin-
ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoul- der.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to exces- sive strain on the grab handle
If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or become loose from its anchorage.
Seats and stowing 97
# Use the grab handles only to stabilise the seating position or to assist in get- ting in and out of the seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat
Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the sys- tem. # Do not store any objects under the co-
driver seat. # When the co-driver seat is occupied,
make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.
98 Seats and stowing Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft position
# To adjust the seat backrest inclination: turn handwheel 3 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting the front seat mechanically (with Seat Comfort Package) Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft position
# Lift lever 1 and slide the seat into the desired position.
# Make sure that the seat is engaged. # To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever
2 until the desired position has been reached.
# Lift lever 2 and slide the seat into the desired position.
# Make sure that the seat is engaged. # To adjust the seat cushion length (driv-
er's seat only): lift lever 1 and slide the front section of the seat cushion forwards or backwards. # To adjust the seat cushion inclination: turn handwheel 3 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached.
# To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever 4 until the desired position has been reached.
# To adjust the seat backrest inclination: turn handwheel 5 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached.
% You can expand the load compartment by folding the seat backrest on the front passenger side forwards (/ page 110).
Adjusting the front seat electrically
1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat cushion inclination 4 Seat fore-and-aft position # Save the settings with the memory function
(/ page 106).
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
1 Higher 2 Softer 3 Lower 4 Firmer # Use buttons 1 to 4 to adjust the contour
of the backrest.
Seats and stowing 99
Head restraints Adjusting the front seat head restraints man- ually
& WARNING Risk of injury if vehicle set- tings are adjusted while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in par- ticular in the following situations: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir- ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion. # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, head restraints, steering wheel and mirror in particular and fas- ten your seat belt.
100 Seats and stowing
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being adjus- ted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints
fitted. # Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.
# To raise: pull the head restraint up.
# To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc- tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down.
# To move forwards: press release knob 2 and pull the head restraint forwards.
# To move backwards: press release knob 2 and push the head restraint backwards.
Adjusting the head restraints of the rear seats mechanically
# To raise: pull the head restraint up. # To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc-
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down.
Fitting/removing the rear seat head restraints Removing
# Release the rear seat backrest and fold it for- wards slightly (/ page 110).
# Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it will go.
# Push release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull out the head restraint.
Fitting # Insert the head restraint such that the
notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. # Push the head restraint down until it engages. # Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages.
Configuring the seat settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort
Adjusting the backrest contour in the lumbar region of the seat backrest (lumbar) # Select Lumbar. # Select the settings Z for the desired seat. # Adjust the air cushions.
Seats and stowing 101
Adjusting the backrest side bolsters # Select Side bolsters. # Adjust the air cushion for the desired seat.
Selecting the massage programme for the front seats Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Massage # Select Wave Massage or Pulsating Massage. # Start the program for the desired seat ;. # To set the massage intensity: switch High
intensity on or off .
Resetting seat settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort # Select ß for the desired seat. # Confirm the prompt.
102 Seats and stowing
Switching seat heating on/off
& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat- edly switching on the seat heating
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limi- ted temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affec- ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heating.
To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it is switched on repeatedly.
* NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heater is switched on
When the seat heater is switched on, over- heating may occur due to objects or docu-
ments placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. # Make sure that no objects or docu-
ments are on the seats when the seat heater is switched on.
Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.
# Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off.
% The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating switches off.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.
Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel manually
# Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off.
& WARNING Risk of injury if vehicle set- tings are adjusted while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in par- ticular in the following situations: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir- ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion. # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, head restraints, steering wheel and mirror in particular and fas- ten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil- dren when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.
Seats and stowing 103 # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# To unlock: push release lever 1 down as far as it will go.
# Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the steering wheel.
104 Seats and stowing
Locking # Fold release lever 1 up as far as it will go. # Check and make sure that the steering col-
umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.
Switching the steering wheel heater on/off Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.
# Push the switch into position 1 or 2. If indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering wheel heater is switched on.
When you switch the ignition off, the steering wheel heater will switch off.
Easy entry and exit feature Using the easy entry and exit feature
& WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process of the easy entry and exit feature
You could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment proc-
ess is complete before driving off.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the easy entry and exit feature
You and other vehicle occupants could become trapped.
# Ensure that no-one has any body parts in the range of movement of the seat.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat: # Press the seat adjustment switch.
The adjustment process will be stop- ped.
You can stop the adjustment process by press- ing one of the memory function position switches.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature
Children could become trapped if they acti- vate the easy entry and exit feature, particu- larly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
When the easy entry and exit feature is active, the driver's seat will move backwards and the backrest will be moved to a steeper position when: R you switch the ignition off with the driver's
door open R you open the driver's door with the ignition
switched off
% The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already at the rear of the seat adjustment range. The seat backrest will then move forwards only if it is not already at the front of the backrest adjustment range.
The driver's seat will move back to the last drive position when: R you switch the ignition on with the driver's
door closed. R you close the driver's door with the ignition
switched on
The last drive position will be saved when: R you switch the ignition off.
R you call up the seat settings via the memory function.
R you save the seat settings via the memory function.
Setting the easy entry and exit feature Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Automatic seat adjustment 5 Easy Entry/Exit # Activate or deactivate the function.
Memory function Function of the memory function
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving
If you use the memory function on the driv- er's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made.
Seats and stowing 105
# Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is station- ary.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory func- tion
When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants particu- larly children could become trapped. # During the adjustment process of the
memory function, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. # If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjust- ment switch immediately.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children
Children could become trapped if they acti- vate the memory function, particularly when unattended.
106 Seats and stowing
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
You can use the memory function when the igni- tion is switched off. Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. You can save settings for the following systems: R Seat R Seat contour R Outside mirrors R Head-up display
Operating the memory function Storing
# Set the desired position for all systems. # Briefly press memory button V and then
press preset position 4, T or U within three seconds.
# To call up: press and briefly hold one of pre- set position buttons 4, T or U. After releasing the button, all systems are moved into the stored position.
Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle
& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail- gate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before
opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open.
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,
tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, lug-
gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi- tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of braking manoeuvres or abrupt changes in direction.
# Always stow objects so that they can- not be thrown around in such situa- tions.
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
# Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the load compartment.
& WARNING Risk of accident from objects in the driver's footwell and frontpassenger footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell and frontpassenger footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.
Seats and stowing 107
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell or front-passenger footwell.
# Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient clearance for the pedals.
# Do not use loose floor mats and do not lay multiple floor mats on top of one another.
Vehicles with automatic front passenger air- bag shutoff: objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the system. Please observe the notes on the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 48).
& WARNING Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion
The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in motion.
108 Seats and stowing
If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container may be flung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic condi- tions and you may lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the cup holder when the vehi-
cle is stationary. # Only use the cup holder for containers
of the right size. # Always close the container, particularly
if the liquid is hot.
* NOTE Damage to the cup holder When the rear armrest is folded back the cup holder could become damaged. # Only fold the rear armrest back when
the cup holder is closed.
* NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight
When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight. # Do not sit or support yourself on the
rear seat armrest.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to an open load compartment floor
If you drive with the load compartment floor open, objects could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always close the load compartment
floor before a journey.
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from the hot cigarette lighter
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the ciga- rette lighter.
In addition, flammable materials may ignite if: R you drop the hot cigarette lighter R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
# Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
# Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of burns from the tail- pipe and tailpipe trims
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around
the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area.
Seats and stowing 109
# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.
The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle: R never exceed the permissible gross mass or
the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants). Information can be found on the vehicle iden- tification plate (/ page 360). R The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. R Always use the partition net when transport- ing objects in the load compartment. R Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. R Secure the load using the tie-down eyes and distribute the load evenly.
Notes on driving with a roof load R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place
heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply
with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 106). R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering. R When transporting roof loads and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select drive programs ; and A. These are designed to focus on stability (/ page 162).
% For more information on stowage compart- ments and stowage areas, please refer to the Digital Owner's Manual.
Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior Overview of the front stowage compart- ments
1 Stowage spaces in the doors 2 Stowage compartment in the armrest with a
multimedia and USB connection 3 Stowage compartment in the front centre
console with a USB port 4 Glove compartment
110 Seats and stowing
Expanding the load compartment by folding the seat backrest on the front passenger side forwards
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during seat adjustment
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. # Make sure when adjusting a seat that
no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil- dren in the vehicle".
& WARNING Risk of injury if the seat backrests are folded forwards
Rear passengers may come into contact with parts of the mechanical seat components. # If the front passenger seat backrest is
folded forwards and there is a passenger in the car, the passenger
must sit in the rear seat behind the driver.
To enlarge the load compartment, you can fold the seat backrest on the front passenger side forwards. Requirements: R The following seats are unoccupied:
- the rear seat behind the seat backrest that is folded forwards on the front passenger side
- the rear centre seat
# To fold forwards: pull release handle 1 and fold the seat backrest fully forwards onto the sitting surface until it engages.
# To fold back: pull release handle 1 and pivot the seat backrest backwards until it engages.
Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK Quickfold) Folding the rear seat backrest forwards
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap your- self or a vehicle occupant. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back- rest may fold forwards, even while the vehi- cle is in motion. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be
pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the boot or load com- partment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.
If the seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, the lock verification indicator will be red. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. If you no longer require the folded-down seat backrest as a loading area, fold the backrest back into place.
Requirements: R The area into which the seat backrest is fol-
ded is clear. R To fold the centre seat backrest forwards:
the centre seat backrest has been unlocked. R The armrest on the second row of seats is
folded back and the cup holders are empty.
Folding the left and right seat backrests for- wards You can fold the centre and outer seat backrests forwards.
Seats and stowing 111
# If necessary, fully insert the seat backrest head restraints (/ page 100).
# Pull release lever 1.
112 Seats and stowing Folding the centre seat backrest forwards
# Pull release catch 3 for seat backrest 2 forwards.
# Fold the corresponding seat backrest for- wards.
Folding back the rear seat backrest
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap your- self or a vehicle occupant. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat backrest
The seat belt could become trapped and thus be damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap-
ped when folding back the seat back- rest.
# Move the driver's or front passenger seat for- wards, if necessary.
# Fold the corresponding seat backrest 1 back until it engages. Left and right seat backrests: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator 2 will be visible. Centre seat backrest: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator 3 will be visible.
Locking the release catch of the centre rear seat backrest Requirements: R The left and centre seat backrests are
engaged and joined together. You can lock the centre seat backrest. The centre seat backrest can then be folded for- wards only together with the left seat backrest.
Seats and stowing 113
# Fold the centre and left seat backrests for- wards.
# To lock or unlock: slide catch 1 upwards or downwards.
Adjusting the angle of the rear seat backr- ests (cargo position) To enlarge the load compartment, you can adjust the seat backrests so that they are ten degrees steeper (cargo position).
# Fold the seat backrest forwards (/ page 110).
# Move bracket 1 in the direction of the arrow.
# Push seat backrest 2 back to bracket 1 until the backrest engages.
Load compartment cover Installing and removing the load compart- ment cover
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects
The load compartment cover alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load, par- ticularly in the event of abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident. # Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
114 Seats and stowing
# Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the load compartment cover.
Requirements: R Do not load the load compartment cover with
more than 2.5 kg. % Please note that the load compartment
cover must not be pushed further upwards when the tailgate is open.
# Slide the load compartment cover forwards evenly in the guide rails on the right and left with both hands until it engages.
# Swivel the load compartment cover upwards and hook hanger 3 through eyelet 2.
# Pull hanger 3 downwards into eyelet 1 until it engages.
% Please ensure that the load compartment cover is lying flat on the guide rails on the right and left when the tailgate is closed.
Attaching/removing the partitioning net
# To remove: pull hanger 3 on the tailgate upwards out of eyelet 1 and unhook it.
# Swivel the load compartment cover down- wards and pull it evenly out of the guide rails on the right and left in the direction of arrow 4.
# To install: place the load compartment cover onto the guide rails on the left and right.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects
The partitioning net alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load, par- ticularly in the event of abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident.
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.
# Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the partitioning net.
For safety reasons, always use a partitioning net when transporting a load. Damaged partitioning nets can no longer fulfil their functions and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Attaching
Seats and stowing 115
Partitioning net without load compartment enlarge- ment
Partitioning net with load compartment enlarge- ment
# Hook partition net 1 into holders 2 on the left and right on the roof lining.
# Without load compartment enlargement: attach hooks 3 to tie-down eyes 4 on the left and right in such a way that hooks 3 point backwards.
116 Seats and stowing
# With load compartment enlargement: attach hooks 3 to tie-down eyes 4 on the left and right in such a way that hooks 3 point to the door.
# Pull on the loose ends of the lashing straps at the same time until the partitioning net 1 is tight and the top edge of partitioning net 1 is horizontal.
Removing
# Turn the buckle of the lashing strap in the direction of arrow 6.
# Slide the loose end of the lashing strap into the buckle in the direction of arrow 5 until the lashing straps are loose.
# Remove hooks 3 from tie-down eyes 4 on the left and right.
# Remove partitioning net 1 from brackets 2 on the roof lining on the left and right.
Overview of the tie-down eyes Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 106).
1 Tie-down eyes (vehicles with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat)
Overview of bag hooks
& WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage may be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Only hang light objects on the bag
hooks. # Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 106). Subject the bag hooks to a maximum load of 3 kg and do not attach any goods to them.
1 Bag hook
Overview of clothes hooks on the tailgate Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 106).
Seats and stowing 117
1 Clothes hook The clothes hooks are not suitable for hanging heavy objects as this can cause the tailgate to lower automatically. Use the clothes hooks only for light objects such as jackets.
118 Seats and stowing
Attaching a roof luggage rack
& WARNING Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load
The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. # Never exceed the maximum roof load
and adjust your driving style.
You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section.
* NOTE Vehicle damage from nonapproved roof luggage racks
The vehicle could be damaged by roof lug- gage racks that have not been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # Use only roof luggage racks tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
# Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the sliding sunroof can be fully raised when the roof luggage rack is fitted.
# Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the tailgate can be fully opened when the roof luggage rack is fitted.
# Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion.
* NOTE Damage to the panorama sliding sunroof due to non-approved roof lug- gage racks
The panorama sliding sunroof may be dam- aged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # When a roof luggage rack is fitted, open
the panorama sliding sunroof only if this
has been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. The panorama sliding sunroof may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.
* NOTE Damage to the covers The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened.
# Do not use metallic or hard objects.
# Carefully fold covers 1 upwards in the direction of the arrow.
# Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening points beneath covers 1.
# Comply with the installation instructions of the roof luggage rack manufacturer.
# Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.
Sockets Using the 12 V socket
Requirements: R Only devices up to a maximum of 180 W
(15 A) are permissible. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following 12 V sockets: R In the stowage compartment in the front
centre console R In the load compartment
Example: 12 V socket in the stowage compartment in the front centre console
# Fold up socket cap 1. # Insert the plug of the device.
12 V socket in the stowage compartment with cover: if you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compartment open.
Seats and stowing 119
Using the 115 V socket in the rear passenger compartment
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam- aged connecting cables or sockets
You could receive an electric shock if the connecting cable or the 115 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet. # Use only connecting cables that are dry
and free of damage. # When the ignition is switched off, make
sure that the 115 V power socket is dry. # Immediately have the 115 V power
socket checked or replaced at a quali- fied specialised workshop if it is dam- aged or has been pulled out of the trim. # Never plug the connecting cable into a 115 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.
120 Seats and stowing
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor- rect handling of the socket
You could receive an electric shock in partic- ular: R if you reach into the socket. R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects
into the socket. # Do not reach into the socket. # Only connect suitable devices to the
socket.
Make sure that no liquids get into the 115 V socket. When the 115 V socket is not in use, keep the socket flap closed. Requirements: R The device is equipped with a suitable plug
which conforms to the standards specific to the country you are in. R A device up to a maximum of 150W (1.3 A) is used. R Do not use multiple socket outlets.
USB port in the rear passenger compartment
% Depending on the vehicle equipment, the design of the stowage compartment and the number of USB ports in the rear centre con- sole may vary.
If the ignition is switched on you can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at the USB ports using a suitable charging cable.
# Open socket flap 3. # Insert the plug of the device into 115 V
socket 1. When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp 2 lights up.
Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi- tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can-
not be thrown around in such situa- tions. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment
Placing other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment could constitute a fire hazard.
# Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment, espe- cially those made of metal.
* NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stow- age compartment
If objects are placed in the mobile phone stowage compartment, they may be dam- aged by electromagnetic fields. # Do not place credit cards, data storage
devices, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone stowage compart- ment.
* NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids
If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged.
Seats and stowing 121
# Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment.
The following notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone must be observed: R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior aerial via the charging module. R The charging function and wireless connec- tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior aerial are only available if the ignition is switched on. R Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone stowage compartment. R Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in the mobile phone stowage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior aerial. R The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This may particularly depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background.
122 Seats and stowing
R To ensure more efficient charging and con- nection with the vehicle's exterior aerial, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. Protective covers which are neces- sary for wireless charging are an exception.
Charging a mobile phone wirelessly Requirements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless
charging. A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com/.
# Place the mobile phone as close to the centre of the marked surface on mat 1 as possible with the display facing upwards. When a message is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. Malfunctions during the charging process are shown in the media display.
% The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.
Stowage compartment without cover Make sure the mobile phone is properly stored and secured to prevent it from falling out while you are driving.
# To secure the mobile phone: swing lever 2 out.
Radio equipment approval numbers for Brazil This device operates on a secondary basis, that is to say it has no protection against harmful interference, not even from the same type of stations, and must not cause interference with systems operating on a primary basis. This product is permitted in accordance with the procedure defined in Directive 242/2000 by the Brazilian telecommunications agency ANATEL and meets the applicable technical require- ments. Further information is available on the ANATEL website. www.anatel.gov.br # Further information on the declaration of
conformity for vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves.
Fitting/removing the floor mats
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.
Installing floor mats
Seats and stowing 123 # Remove the floor mat.
# Slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the floor mat in the footwell.
# Press studs 1 onto holders 2. # Adjust the corresponding seat.
Removing floor mats # To remove: pull the floor mat off holders 2.
124 Light and sight
Exterior lighting Notes on changing the lights when driving abroad
It is not necessary to adjust the headlamps. The legal requirements are also met in countries in which traffic drives on the other side of the road.
Light switch Operating the light switch
Information about lighting systems and your responsibility The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation.
5 L Low beam/high beam 6 R Switches the rear fog light on/off When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the standing lights will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp. # Always park your vehicle safely using suffi-
cient lighting, in accordance with the rele- vant legal stipulations.
* NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights
Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery. # Where possible, switch on the
right X or left W parking light.
1 W Left-hand parking lights 2 X Right-hand parking lights 3 T Standing lights and licence plate light-
ing 4 Ã Automatic driving lights (preferred light
switch position)
For vehicles that are wider than two metres or longer than six metres, single-sided parking lighting is not permitted in some countries. In this case, the standing lights are also switched on in the parking lights position.
If the battery is insufficiently charged, the stand- ing lights or parking lights will be switched off automatically to facilitate the next engine start. The exterior lighting (except standing and park- ing lights) will switch off automatically when the driver's door is opened. R Observe the notes on surround lighting
(/ page 132).
Automatic driving lights function The standing lights, low beam and daytime run- ning lights are switched on automatically depending on the ignition status and the light conditions.
& WARNING Risk of accident when the dipped beam is switched off in poor visi- bility
When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped beam may not be switched on auto- matically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting. Switching the rear fog lights on or off Requirements: R The light switch is in the L or à posi-
tion. # Press the R button. Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps. Regulating headlamp range (halogen head- lamps) The headlamp range adjuster allows you to adjust the cone of light from the headlamps in relation to the vehicle's load condition.
Light and sight 125 g Driver's seat and front passenger seat occu-
pied 1 Driver's seat, front passenger seat and rear
seats occupied 2 Driver's seat, front passenger seat and rear
seats occupied, load compartment laden 3 Driver's seat and front passenger seat occu-
pied and maximum permissible rear axle load utilised
126 Light and sight # Turn the headlamp range adjuster to the
position that corresponds to the load condi- tion of your vehicle. Operating the combination switch for the lights
1 High beam 2 Turn signal light, right
3 Headlamp flashing 4 Turn signal light, left
# Use the combination switch to activate the desired function.
Switches on high beam # Turn the light switch to the L or Ã
position. # Push the combination switch in the direction
of arrow 1. When the high beam is activated, the indica- tor lamp for low beam L will be deactiva- ted and replaced by the indicator lamp for high beam K.
Switching off high beam # Push the combination switch in the direction
of arrow 1 or pull it in the direction of arrow 3.
Headlamp flashing # Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow 3.
Turn signal light # To indicate briefly: push the combination
switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times. # To indicate permanently: push the combi- nation switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4.
Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights
When you pull away again, the hazard warning light system will switch off automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning light system using but- ton 1.
Light and sight 127 Active headlamps function
# Press button 1. The hazard warning lights will switch on auto- matically if: R the airbag has been deployed. R the vehicle is heavily braked from a speed of
more than 70 km/h to a standstill.
Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED
Intelligent Light System function The MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation and provide exten- ded functions for improved illumination of the road. The system comprises the following functions: R Active headlamps (/ page 127) R Cornering light (/ page 128) R Motorway mode (/ page 128) R City lighting (/ page 128)
System limits R The system is active only when it is dark.
R The headlamps follow the steering move- ments.
R Relevant areas are better illuminated during a journey.
The functions are active when the high beam is switched on.
128 Light and sight Cornering light function
The cornering light improves the illumination of the carriageway over a wide angle in the turning direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends, for example. It can be activated only when the low beam is switched on. The function is active in the following cases: R At speeds below 40 km/h when the turn sig-
nal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned R At speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h and when the steering wheel is turned
Roundabout and junction function: the cor- nering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current GPS position. It will remain active until after the vehi- cle has left the roundabout or the junction. Motorway mode function Motorway mode increases the range and bright- ness of the cone of light, enabling better visibil- ity.
The function will be active if a motorway journey is detected by means of: R the vehicle's speed R the multifunction camera
R the GPS
The function is not active in the following cases: R at speeds below 80 km/h
The city lighting function City lighting improves the illumination of road- sides in urban areas using a broad distribution of light. The function is active in the following cases: R At low speeds R In illuminated parts of urban areas
Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off
Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Intelligent Light System # Switch the function on or off.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist function
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to: R road users without lights, e.g. pedes-
trians R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R road users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the auto- matic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and traffic
conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi- tions.
Light and sight 129
Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R High beam
At speeds greater than 30 km/h: R If no other road users are detected, the high
beam will switch on automatically.
130 Light and sight
The high beam will switch off automatically in the following cases: R At speeds below 25 km/h R If other road users are detected R If street lighting is sufficient
% The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off
Switching on # Turn the light switch to the à position. # Switch on the high beam using the combina-
tion switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the multifunction display.
Switching off # Switch off the high beam using the combina-
tion switch.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react to: R road users without lights, e.g. pedes-
trians R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R road users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recog- nise them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the auto- matic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users.
# Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traf- fic conditions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R Partial high beam R High beam
Partial high beam uses the high beam to shine past other road users rather than dazzling them.
The vehicle in front will be illuminated by the low beam. At speeds greater than 30 km/h: R If no other road users are detected, the high
beam will switch on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial
high beam will switch on automatically.
At speeds below 25 km/h or when there is suffi- cient street lighting: R The high beam will switch off automatically. R The partial high beam will switch off auto-
matically.
% The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/off
Switching on # Turn the light switch to the à position.
Light and sight 131
# Switch on the high beam using the combina- tion switch. When the high beam is switched on automat- ically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp on the multifunction display will light up.
Switching off # Switch off the high beam using the combina-
tion switch.
Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time Requirements: R The light switch is in the à position. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Ext. light. del. sw. off # Set the switch-off delay time.
When the vehicle engine is switched off, the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time.
132 Light and sight
Switching the surround lighting on/off
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Surround lighting When Surround lighting is active, the exterior lighting lights up for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the sur- round lighting is deactivated and the automatic driving lights are activated. # Activate or deactivate the function.
Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting
Front overhead control panel
1 p Front left reading lamp 2 | Automatic interior lighting control 3 c Front interior lighting 4 u Rear interior lighting 5 p Front right reading lamp # To switch on/off: press button 1 5
accordingly.
Control panel in the grab handle
1 p Rear reading lamp # To switch on/off: press button 1. Adjusting the ambient lighting Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Ambient lighting Setting the colour # Select Colour. # Set the desired colour.
Adjusting the brightness # Select Brightness. # Adjust the brightness.
Activating the brightness for zones # Select Brightness. # Select Brightness zones. # Switch the function on or off. or # Set the brightness for the desired zones.
Activating multi-coloured lighting # Select Colour. # Select Multi-colour. # Select a colour combination.
Activating multi-coloured animation # Select Colour. # Select Multi-colour animat..
The chosen colour combination will change at predefined intervals.
Light and sight 133
Activating welcome lighting # Select Colour. # Select Welcome.
When the vehicle is unlocked, a special ambi- ent lighting sequence will run. Activating dependency on air conditioning settings # Select Colour. # Select Climate. If changes are made to the temperature set- ting in the vehicle, the colour of the ambient lighting will change briefly.
Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Int. light. del. sw. off # Switch the switch-off delay time on or off.
When this function is active, the interior light- ing lights up for a short time after the vehicle is locked.
Changing bulbs (only for vehicles with halo- gen headlamps) Notes on changing bulbs
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts whilst replacing a bulb
Bulbs, lamps and plugs can become very hot during operation. When replacing a bulb, you could burn your- self on these component parts. # Allow the component parts to cool
down before replacing the bulb.
R Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if its glass has been scratched. The bulb may otherwise explode.
R Do not touch the glass bulb with your bare hands.
R Protect bulbs from moisture and do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids.
134 Light and sight
Overview of the bulbs to be changed Halogen headlamps
Tail lamps
Changing the front bulbs (vehicles with halo- gen headlamps) Fitting/removing the cover in the front wheel arch
Requirements: R The lighting system is switched off. R The appropriate front wheel is turned
inwards.
1 High beam: H7 55 W bulb 2 Low beam: H7 55 W bulb
1 Turn signal light: PY 21 W bulb 2 Reversing light: W 16 W bulb
# To remove: turn cover 1 to the left and remove it from the wheel arch liner.
# To fit: insert cover 1 into the wheel arch liner and turn it to the right until it engages.
Replacing light sources in the halogen head- lamp
Requirements: R Low beam: an H7 55 W light source is avail-
able. R High beam: an H7 55 W light source is avail-
able.
1 Low beam housing cover 2 High beam housing cover
# Switch the lighting system off. # Remove the cover in the front wheel arch
(/ page 134). # Turn the relevant housing cover anti-clock-
wise and remove it. # Turn the socket anti-clockwise and remove it. # Pull the light source out of the socket. # Insert the new light source into the socket
such that the entire base of the light source is resting on the bottom of the socket.
Light and sight 135
# Insert the socket and turn it clockwise. # Press on the housing cover and turn it clock-
wise. # Replace the cover in the front wheel arch
(/ page 134).
Changing the rear bulbs (vehicles with halo- gen headlamps) Replacing the tail lamp bulbs # Due to their locations, have the bulbs for the
turn signal light and reversing light changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
136 Light and sight
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system Switching the windscreen wipers on/off
4 ° Continuous wiping, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast
# Turn the combination switch to the corre- sponding position 1 - 5.
# Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. R í Single wipe R î Wiping with washer fluid
% Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash (/ page 306).
Switching the rear window wiper on/off
1 g Windscreen wipers off 2 Ä Automatic wiping, normal 3 Å Automatic wiping, frequent
1 ô Single wipe/washing 2 è Intermittent wiping
# Single wipe: press button 1 to the point of resistance.
# Wiping with washer fluid: press button 1 beyond the point of resistance.
# Switching intermittent wiping on/off: press button 2. The è symbol will appear on the instru- ment cluster when the rear window wiper is switched on.
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windscreen wip-
ers and ignition before changing the wiper blades.
Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position # Switch the ignition on and then off again
immediately. # Within around 15 seconds, press and hold
the î button on the combination switch
for approximately three seconds (/ page 136). The wiper arms will move into the replace- ment position.
Removing the wiper blades # Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-
screen.
Light and sight 137
# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as far as it will go.
# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the removal position.
# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 4.
138 Light and sight Fitting the wiper blades
# Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind- screen.
# Switch on the ignition. # Press the î button on the combination
switch (/ page 136). The wiper arms will return to the original position. # Switch the ignition off. % Check the condition of the wiper blades reg- ularly and replace them if there is visible damage or continual smearing.
Maintenance display
# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1.
# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the locking position.
# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor- rectly.
# Remove protective film 1 from the mainte- nance display on the tip of the newly fitted wiper blades.
When the colour of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced.
% The duration until the colour changes varies depending on the usage conditions.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windscreen wip-
ers and ignition before changing the wiper blades.
Removing the wiper blade # switch the ignition off.
Fitting the wiper blade
Light and sight 139
# Fold wiper arm 2 away from the rear win- dow until it engages in the replacement posi- tion.
# Unclip wiper blade 1 from wiper arm 2 and remove it in the direction of arrow 3.
# Position wiper blade 1 with both lugs 3 on holder 2 on the wiper arm.
# Push wiper blade 1 in the direction of arrow 4 until it engages in holder 2.
# Make sure that wiper blade 1 is seated cor- rectly.
140 Light and sight
# Fold the wiper arm from the replacement position back onto the rear window.
Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors
& WARNING Risk of injury if vehicle set- tings are adjusted while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in par- ticular in the following situations: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir- ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion. # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, head restraints, steering wheel and mirror in particular and fas- ten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to mis- judgement of distance when using the outside mirror
The outside mirrors reflect objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. # Therefore, always look over your shoul-
der in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you.
# To fold in or out: briefly press button 2. # To set: press button 1 or 3 to select the
outside mirror to be adjusted. # Use button 4 to adjust the position of the
mirror glass.
% If the battery has been disconnected or com- pletely discharged, you will have to reset the outside mirrors. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly.
# To reset: briefly press button 2. An outside mirror that has been pushed out of position can be engaged in position again as fol- lows: # Vehicles without electrically folding out-
side mirrors: manually move the outside mirror into the correct position. # Vehicles with electrically folding outside mirrors: press and hold button 2. You will hear a click and the mirror will audi- bly click into place. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position.
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors function
& WARNING Risk of acid burns and poi- soning due to the anti-dazzle mirror elec- trolyte
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into con- tact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. # If you come into contact with electro-
lyte, observe the following: R Immediately rinse the electrolyte
from your skin with water and seek medical attention. R If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. R If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.
Light and sight 141
R Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte.
R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.
The inside rear-view mirror and the outside mir- ror on the driver's side will automatically go into anti-dazzle mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rear-view mirror. System limits The system will not go into anti-dazzle mode if: R The engine is switched off. R Reverse gear is engaged. R The interior lighting is switched on.
Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi- tion function The parking position makes parking easier.
142 Light and sight
The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when: R the parking position is stored (/ page 142). R the front-passenger mirror is selected. R reverse gear is engaged.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when: R you shift the transmission to another trans-
mission position. R you are travelling at a speed greater than
15 km/h. R you press the button for the outside mirror
on the driver's side.
Storing the parking position of the frontpassenger outside mirror using reverse gear Storing
Calling up # Press button 1 to select the front-
passenger outside mirror. # Engage reverse gear.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking position.
Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Switch Automatic fold-in on or off.
# Press button 1 to select the frontpassenger outside mirror.
# Engage reverse gear. # Move the front-passenger outside mirror into
the desired parking position using button 2.
Climate control 143
Overview of climate control systems Notes on climate control In order for the air conditioning system, monitor- ing of the pollution level and air filtration to func- tion correctly, an interior air filter must always be used. Make sure that the filter is installed correctly. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have main- tenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Overview of the air conditioning control panel Plug-in hybrid: be sure to observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec- ognise dangers. The indicator lamps on the buttons indicate that the corresponding function is activated.
THERMATIC air conditioning control panel with sta- tionary heater (example) 1 w Sets the temperature on the driver's
side 2 Vehicles with THERMATIC or
THERMOTRONIC operating unit with station- ary heater: A calls up the air conditioning menu Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC operating unit without stationary heater: _ sets the air distribution 3 H Sets the airflow or switches off climate control
4 Ã Sets climate control to automatic mode (/ page 144)
5 ¬ Demists the windscreen 6 ¤ Switches the rear window heater
on/off 7 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off
(/ page 145) 8 Vehicles with THERMATIC operating unit
(with/without stationary heater): ¿ switches A/C function on/off (/ page 144) Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC operating unit (with/without stationary heater): Á switches A/C function on/off (/ page 144) Switches residual heat on/off (/ page 145) 9 Vehicles with THERMATIC or THERMOTRONIC control panel with station- ary heater: & switches stationary heater on/off (/ page 146) Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC operating unit without stationary heater: 0 switches synchronisation on/off (/ page 145)
144 Climate control
A Vehicles with THERMATIC operating unit (with/without stationary heater): _ sets the air distribution Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC operating unit (with/without stationary heater): w adjusts temperature on front passenger side
Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off # To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or
higher using the H button. # To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using
the H button. If climate control is switched off, the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch climate con- trol off only briefly.
Switching the A/C function on/off using the air conditioning control panel The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air.
# Press the ¿/Á button. Switch off the A/C function only briefly; other- wise, the windows may mist up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a fault.
Calling up the air conditioning menu Calling up the air conditioning menu using the multimedia system # Select one of the temperature displays at the
lower edge of the media display. Calling up the air-conditioning menu using the button on the climate control panel # Press the A button on the climate control
panel.
Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the multimedia system The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air.
# Call up the air-conditioning menu (/ page 144).
# Select First row of seats. # Select A/C.
Setting climate control to automatic mode In automatic mode, the set temperature is con- trolled and maintained at a constant level by the air supply. # Press the à button. # To switch to manual mode: press the _
or à button. In automatic mode, you can choose between five different air quantities using the H button. Automatic mode is retained.
Setting the air distribution # Call up the air conditioning menu
(/ page 144). # Select a row of seats.
# To set the air distribution: select ¯, P or O.
# Set the airflow. % Several air distribution options can be selec-
ted at the same time, for example to set the climate control for the windscreen and the footwells simultaneously. The ¯ climate control for the windscreen can only be selected for the first seat row.
Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronisation function via the air condi- tioning control panel Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronisation function. The temperature and air distribution settings for the driver's side will be adopted automatically for the front passenger side. # Press the 0 button. The synchronisation function will be deactivated if the settings for one of the other climate zones are changed.
Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronisation function via the multimedia system Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronisation function. The driver's settings for temperature, air quantity and air distribution are adopted automatically for all climate zones. # Call up the air conditioning menu
(/ page 144). # Select First row of seats. # Select SYNC.
Demisting the windows
Windows misted up on the inside # Press the à button. # If the windows continue to mist up: press the
¬ button. Windows misted up on the outside # Switch on the windscreen wipers. # Press the à button.
Climate control 145
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off # Press the g button.
The interior air will be recirculated. Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode after some time. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly.
Switching residual heat on/off Requirements: R the vehicle is parked. % Only vehicles with a diesel engine can use
residual heat. It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilat- ing the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes, depending on the temperature set. # To activate: press the Á button. Residual heat will be switched off automatically.
146 Climate control
Stationary heater/ventilation Stationary heater/ventilation function R The air inside the vehicle is heated or ventila-
ted to the set temperature. R The air inside the vehicle cannot be cooled
down to temperatures below the outside temperature. R If the outside temperature changes, ventila- tion mode automatically switches to heating mode or heating mode automatically switches to ventilation mode. The stationary heater and the exhaust gas outlet are situated in front of the right-hand front wheel. Switching the stationary heater/ventilation on/off via the operating unit
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi- sonous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila- tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi-
cle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example. # Always switch the stationary heater off
in enclosed spaces without an air extraction systems, e.g. in garages. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are run- ning. # Open a window on the windward side of the vehicle to ensure an adequate sup- ply of fresh air.
& WARNING Risk of fire due to hot station- ary heater components and exhaust gases
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # When the stationary heater is switched
on, make sure that: R hot vehicle parts do not come into
contact with flammable materials.
R the exhaust gas can flow out of the stationary heater exhaust pipe unhindered.
R the exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials.
* NOTE Battery discharge caused by sta- tionary heater or stationary ventilation operation
Operating the stationary heater or stationary ventilation drains the battery. # After heating or ventilating the vehicle
twice, drive for a longer period of time.
Requirements: R The fuel tank has been filled to at least Õ.
# Set the desired temperature using the w button.
# Press button 1 . The red or blue indicator lamp on button 1 will light up or go out.
The colours of the indicator lamp have the fol- lowing meanings: R Blue: stationary ventilation is switched on.
R Red: the stationary heater is switched on. R Yellow: the departure time is preselected.
The stationary heater/ventilation will switch off automatically after 50 minutes. Operation using the app: the stationary heater/ventilation can also be operated via the Mercedes me connect app. You can find further information in the separate Owner's Manual at https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/ baix/cars/connectme/en_GB/#emotions/ Startseite.html.
Setting the stationary heater/ventilation via the multimedia system # To call up the air conditioning menu
(/ page 144). # Select Auxiliary heating.
Selecting the departure time # Select the time TIME A: XX, TIME B: XX or
TIME C: XX.
Climate control 147
Setting the departure time # Select the time TIME A: XX, TIME B: XX or
TIME C: XX. # Select the pen beside the time. # Set a time. Setting the stationary heater/ventilation via remote control Requirements: R The fuel tank is at least Õ full.
148 Climate control Switching on immediately
# Press and hold the u button. Setting the departure time # Briefly press the u button. # Press the , or . button repeatedly
until the time to be changed appears on the display.
# Press the u and ^ buttons simultane- ously. The Î symbol on the remote control display will flash.
# Use the , and . buttons to set the desired departure time.
# Press the u and ^ buttons simultane- ously. The new departure time will be stored.
Up to three departure times can be stored. # To activate the departure time: select the
desired departure time and press and hold the u button. The Í symbol, the departure time and, depending on the selected departure time, the letter A, B or C will appear on the display. # To deactivate the departure time: select the desired departure time and press and hold the ^ button. OFF will appear on the display. # To check the status of the active station- ary heater: briefly press the u button.
Switching off immediately # Press and hold the ^ button. Overview of the remote control displays (sta- tionary heater/ventilation)
1 Stationary ventilation switched on 2 Stationary heater switched on 3 Selected departure time 4 Remaining time for the stationary heater/
ventilation (in minutes) 5 Stationary heater/ventilation active 6 Departure time activated 7 Signal strength
Further possible displays: R Time: the activated departure time. R Zero minutes: the running time for the sta-
tionary heater is extended because the engine has not yet reached operating tem- perature when it is started. R OFF: the stationary heater/ventilation is switched off.
Replacing the remote control battery (sta- tionary heater)
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries if batteries are swallowed
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub- stances. Swallowing batteries may cause severe internal burns within two hours. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil-
dren. # If the cover and/or lid of the battery
compartment does not close securely,
do not use the key and keep it away from children. # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat- teries
Batteries contain toxic and corro- sive substances.
#
Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Requirements: R One CR2450 lithium battery
Climate control 149
# Push a pointed object into recess 1. # Slide battery cover 2 backwards in the
direction of the arrow and remove the empty battery. # Insert new battery 3 with the lettering facing upwards. # Slide battery cover 2 in the opposite direc- tion to the arrow onto the remote control until the battery cover engages.
150 Climate control
Rectifying problems with the remote control for the stationary heater/ventilation
FAIL ¨ appears on the remote control dis- play Possible cause: R The signal transmission between the trans-
mitter and receiver is malfunctioning.
# Change your position in relation to the vehi- cle, moving closer if necessary.
FAIL appears on the remote control display Possible cause: R The starter battery is not sufficiently
charged.
# Charge the starter battery.
Possible cause: R The fuel tank content is below the reserve
fuel level.
# Refuel at the nearest filling station.
FAIL ¯ appears on the remote control dis- play Possible cause: R There is a malfunction in the stationary
heater.
# Have the stationary heater checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the following: R Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles
in the vehicle interior clear. R Keep the air inlet free of residue build-up
(/ page 306).
Air vents Adjusting the front air vents
& WARNING Risk of burns and frostbite due to being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants
always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents. # If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.
# To open or close: hold air vent 1 in the centre and turn it to the left (open) or right (closed) as far as it will go.
# To set the airflow direction: hold air vent 1 in the centre and move it up or down or to the left or right.
Adjusting the rear air vents
# To open or close: hold air vent 1 in the centre and turn it to the left or right as far as it will go.
# To set the airflow direction: hold air vent 1 in the centre and move it up or down or to the left or right.
Climate control 151
152 Driving and parking
Driving Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Observe the notes on the following additional topics in the Supplement, as you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers: R Emotion Start R AMG exhaust system R RACE START R DRIFT MODE R AMG RIDE CONTROL R AMG steering-wheel buttons
Switching on the power supply or ignition
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
Requirements: R The key is in the vehicle and is recognised. R Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The brake pedal is not depressed. R Vehicles with manual transmission: The
clutch pedal is not depressed.
# To switch on the power supply: Press but- ton 1 once. You can, for example, activate the wind- screen wiper.
The power supply is switched off again if the fol- lowing conditions are met: R You open the driver's door. R You press button 1 twice more.
# To switch on the ignition: Press button 1 twice. Indicator and warning lamps go on in the instrument cluster.
The ignition is switched off again if one of the following conditions is met: R Vehicles with automatic transmission:You
do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in position j or the electric parking brake is applied. R Vehicles with manual transmission: You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the electric parking brake is applied. R You press button 1 once.
Driving and parking 153
Starting the vehicle Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but- ton
& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present,
the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti- lation.
& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable material in the engine compartment or the exhaust system
Flammable materials may ignite. # Therefore, check regularly that there
are no flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system.
154 Driving and parking
Requirements: R The key is in the vehicle and is recognised.
# Vehicles with manual transmission: Depress the clutch pedal.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift the transmission to position j or i.
# Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once.
# If the vehicle does not start: Switch off nonessential consumers and press button 1 once.
# If the vehicle still does not start and the dis- play message Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual appears in the multifunction display: Start the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (/ page 154).
% You can switch off the engine while driving. To do this, press button 1 for about three seconds or by pressing button 1 three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driving tips" (/ page 157).
Observe any information regarding display mes- sages that can be displayed on the multifunction display. Starting the vehicle with the key in the stow- age compartment (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.
Marked space (example with cup holder without cover)
# Open the cover of the marked space 2 if necessary.
# Make sure that the marked space 2 is empty.
# Remove the key 1 from the key ring.
# Place the key 1 in the marked space 2 on the symbol 3. The vehicle will start after a short time. If you remove the key 1 from the marked space 2, the engine continues running. For further engine starts however, the key 1 must be located in the marked space 2 on the symbol 3 during the entire journey.
# Have the key 1 checked at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.
If the vehicle does not start: # Place the key 1 in the marked space 2
and leave it there. # Vehicles with manual transmission:
Depress the clutch pedal. # Depress the brake pedal and start the vehi-
cle using the start/stop button. % You can also switch on the power supply or
the ignition with the start/stop button. Observe any information regarding display mes- sages that can be displayed on the multifunction display.
Starting the vehicle via Remote Online Serv- ices
Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before starting the journey Ensure the following before starting the engine: R the legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R it is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R the fuel tank is sufficiently full. R the starter battery is sufficiently charged.
Charging the starter battery before starting the journey If the vehicle battery is discharged, you can receive a message on your smartphone. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes.
Driving and parking 155
Ensure the following before starting the engine: R the legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R it is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R the fuel tank is sufficiently full. Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)
& WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap- ment due to unintentional starting of the engine
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. # Always secure the engine against unin-
tentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work.
Requirements: R Park position j is selected. R The anti-theft alarm system is not activated. R The panic alarm is not activated.
156 Driving and parking
R The hazard warning light system is switched off.
R The bonnet is closed. R The doors are closed and locked. R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed.
# Start the vehicle using the smartphone. After every engine start, the engine runs for ten minutes.
You can carry out a maximum of two consecu- tive starting attempts. You must start the engine with the key before trying to start the engine again with the smartphone. You can switch off the engine at any time as fol- lows: R Via the Smartphone App R By pressing the Ü or ß button on the
key
% Further information can be found in the smartphone app.
Securing the engine against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work: # Switch on the hazard warning light system. or # Unlock the doors. or # Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.
Running-in notes
To preserve the engine during the first 1,500 km: R Drive at varying road speeds and engine
speeds. R Do not drive at speeds greater than
140 km/h. R Drive the vehicle in drive program A
or ;. R Shift to the next highest gear at the very lat-
est when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the rev counter. R Do not shift down manually in order to brake. R Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at full throttle.
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown).
R Only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1,500 km.
This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced. Please also observe the following running-in notes: R In certain driving and driving safety systems,
the sensors adjust automatically while a cer- tain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full sys- tem effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. R Brakepads, brake disks and tyres that are either new or have been replaced only ach- ieve optimum braking effect and grip after several hundred kilometres of driving. Com- pensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal.
Notes on driving
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect footwear
Incorrect footwear includes, for example: R shoes with platform soles R shoes with high heels R slippers
There is a risk of an accident. # Always wear suitable footwear so that
you can operate the pedals safely.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the ignition is switched off while driving
If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. This may affect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example. # Do not switch off the ignition while driv-
ing.
Driving and parking 157
& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present,
the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti- lation.
& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shift down on slippery road sur-
faces to increase the engine braking effect.
158 Driving and parking
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi- sonous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila- tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi- cle. This is the case when the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, for example. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around
the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are run- ning. # Open a window on the side of the vehi- cle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating
If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may over- heat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even cause the brake sys- tem failure.
# Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not depress the brake pedal and the
accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.
* NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds
The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. # Do not drive with the engine in the over-
revving range.
* NOTE Causing wear to the brake linings by permanently depressing the brake pedal
# Do not permanently depress the brake pedal while driving.
# To use braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time.
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away
# Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi- ately.
# Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.
* NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel
The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata- lytic converter. # Only depress the accelerator pedal
slightly. # Have the cause rectified immediately at
a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE Reduced battery life due to fre- quent short-distance trips
The 12 V battery may not be sufficiently charged when the vehicle is used only for short-distance trips. This reduces the life of the battery. # Drive longer distances regularly to
charge the battery.
Notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occu- pied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering characteristics change. You should bear the following in mind: R Do not exceed the permissible roof load and
towing capacity. Also observe the technical data in the printed Owner's Manual. R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 106).
Driving and parking 159
R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering.
Notes on driving on salt-treated roads The braking effect is limited on salt-treated roads. Therefore, observe the following notes: R due to salt build-up on the brake disks and
brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side R maintain a much greater safe distance to the vehicle in front
To remove salt build-up: R brake occasionally while paying attention to
the traffic conditions R carefully depress the brake pedal at the end
of the journey and when starting the next journey
Notes on aquaplaning Aquaplaning can take place once a certain amount of water has accumulated on the road surface. Observe the following notes during heavy precip- itation or in conditions in which aquaplaning may occur: R reduce speed R avoid tyre ruts R avoid sudden steering movements R brake carefully
% Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tyres (/ page 337).
Notes on driving through water on the road surface Water which has entered into the vehicle can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage.
160 Driving and parking
Observe the following if you must drive through water: R The water, when calm, may only reach the
lower edge of the vehicle body. R Drive at a maximum speed of 10 km/h;
water can otherwise enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment. R Vehicles travelling in front, or oncoming vehi- cles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water. The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored.
ECO start/stop function ECO start/stop function % The ECO start/stop function is not available
in all drive programs, depending on the engine. Observe the status display in the multifunction display for this.
If all vehicle-related conditions for an automatic engine stop are met, the engine is switched off automatically: R Vehicles with manual transmission: You
brake the vehicle, shift into neutral i when travelling at a low speed and then release the clutch pedal. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: You brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans- mission position h or i. R You activate the HOLD function or engage transmission position j.
% If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibitor, for example, a stop sign, the engine will not stop. If you activate the HOLD function or engage the park position j, the engine can be switched off in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor.
% In transmission position k, the engine is not switched off automatically even when the HOLD function is switched on.
The engine is restarted automatically if: R Vehicles with manual transmission: You
depress the clutch pedal. R Vehicles with automatic transmission:
You shift into transmission position h or k. R You depress the accelerator pedal. R An automatic engine start is required by the vehicle.
Status display in the multifunction display: R The symbol è (green) appears when the
vehicle is at a standstill: The engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R The symbol ç (yellow) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: Not all vehicle condi- tions for an engine stop have been met. R Neither the symbol è nor ç appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: An intelli- gent stop inhibitor was detected, e.g. a stop sign. R The symbol s appears: The ECO start/ stop function is deactivated or there is a mal- function.
If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/ stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn- ing tone sounds and the engine is not restarted. In addition, the display message Vehicle is operational Switch off ignition before exitingappears in the multifunction display. If you do not switch off the ignition, the ignition is auto- matically switched off after three minutes.
Deactivating or activating the ECO start/ stop function
Driving and parking 161
ECO display function
The ECO display summarises your driving char- acteristics from the start of the journey to its completion and assists you in achieving the most economical driving style. You can influence consumption by doing the fol- lowing: R driving with particular care R Vehicles with automatic transmission:
driving in drive program ;. R Vehicles with manual transmission: driv-
ing in drive program A. R following the gearshift recommendations
# Press button 1. A display appears in the instrument cluster when switching the ECO start/stop function off/on.
% A continuous s display appears in the instrument cluster while the ECO start/stop function is deactivated.
162 Driving and parking
The lettering in the segment will light up brightly, the outer edge will light up and the segment will fill up when the following driving style is adop- ted: R 1 Steady speed R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling R 3 Moderate acceleration
The lettering in the segment will be grey, the outer edge will be dark and the segment will empty when the following driving style is adop- ted: R 1 Fluctuations in speed R 2 Heavy braking R 3 Sporty acceleration
The ECO display will show you when you have driven economically: R The three segments will fill up completely at
the same time R The edges around all three segments will
light up
The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison with a driver with a very sporty driving style will be shown in the centre of the display 4. The range displayed does not indicate a fixed reduction in consump- tion.
DYNAMIC SELECT switch Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
* NOTE Plug-in hybrid # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers. % Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle has different drive programs.
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change between the following drive programs. The drive program selected appears in the multi- function display of the on-board computer. = Individual R Individual settings
C Sport R Continues to offer stability but with a sporty
setup R Allows the sporty driver a more active driving
style R Only suitable for good road conditions, a dry
road surface and a clear stretch of road
A Comfort R Comfortable and economical driving R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions
; Eco R Only available for vehicles with automatic
transmission
R Particularly economical driving R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions
% Depending on the situation, the cylinder can be briefly deactivated in the drive pro- grams ; and A, depending on the engine.
% The ESP® settings in the drive pro- grams ; and A are designed for sta- bility. Therefore, choose one of these driving programs, especially when transporting roof loads, in trailer operation and when the vehi- cle is fully loaded or fully occupied.
Depending on the drive program, the following systems change their characteristics: R Drive
- Engine and transmission management - Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R ESP® R Vehicles with adaptive damping adjust- ment: suspension R Electric power steering
Selecting the drive program % Depending on the equipment, the vehicle is
fitted with either a switch or a button.
# Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards or backwards. The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display.
Driving and parking 163
# Press DYNAMIC SELECT button 2. The DYNAMIC SELECT menu appears in the multifunction display.
# Press DYNAMIC SELECT button 2 again. The chosen drive program appears.
164 Driving and parking
Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia system) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 DYNAMIC SELECT
Setting drive program I # Select Individual configuration. # Select and set a category.
Switching the restoration display on or off # Switch Ask when starting on or off.
Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an addi- tional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated. % The prompt appears only if the previously
active settings deviate from the standard settings. Function off: the next time the vehicle is star- ted the A drive program is set automatically.
The ECO start/stop function is activated auto- matically. % This function must be activated for each user
profile separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and Eco start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user profile.
Displaying vehicle data Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Vehicle.
The vehicle data is displayed.
Displaying engine data Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Engine.
The engine data is displayed. % The actual (maximum) values that can be
achieved for engine output and engine tor- que may deviate from the certified values
within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines). Factors that can influence this are, for exam- ple: R Sea level R Fuel grade R Outside temperature R Operating temperature of the engine % The values displayed serve only as orienta- tion. The values for engine output and engine torque shown in the media display may deviate from the actual values.
Calling up the fuel consumption indicator
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Consumption.
The current and average fuel consumption is displayed.
Manual transmission Operating the gearshift lever
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
* NOTE Damage to the engine and trans- mission by shifting to a gear that is too low
# When changing between gears 5 and 6 push the gearshift lever to the right.
# Do not shift down at high speeds.
* NOTE Damage to the coupling due to improper use
Holding the vehicle on inclines with a slipping coupling can damage it. # Do not allow the coupling to slip in
order to hold the vehicle on inclines.
Driving and parking 165
* NOTE Damage to the transmission by shifting to reverse gear k while the vehicle is in motion
# Only shift into reverse gear k when the vehicle is stationary.
166 Driving and parking
k Reverse gear 1 - 6 Forward gears i Neutral # Engaging forward gears 1 - 6 or neu-
tral i : R Depress the clutch pedal completely. R Turn the gearshift lever to the desired
position.
# Engaging reverse gear k : R Depress the clutch pedal completely. R Pull the gearshift lever up, push it to the left and then pull it back.
Gearshift recommendation The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style.
Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect gearshifting
If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission posi- tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. # If you engage the transmission position
h or k when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time.
# When gearshift recommendation 1 appears on the multifunction display, shift to the rec- ommended gear.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
Driving and parking 167
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position is displayed in the multifunction display.
j Park position k Reverse gear
i Neutral h Drive position
Engaging reverse gear R # Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance.
Engaging neutral N # Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. % To shift into neutral i with the ignition on, push the selector lever up or down for sev- eral seconds to the first point of resistance. Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.
Proceed as follows if you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral i, even if the ignition is switched off or the driver's door is opened: # Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral
i when the car is stationary.
168 Driving and parking
# Release the brake pedal. # Switch the ignition off. % If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in
the vehicle, the automatic transmission remains in neutral i.
Engaging park position P # Observe the notes on parking the vehicle
(/ page 177). # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle
comes to a standstill. # When the vehicle is at a standstill, press but-
ton j. When the transmission position display shows j, the park position is engaged. If no transmission position display j appears, secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. % Depending on the situation, it may take a short time until j is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display.
Park position j is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met: R You switch off the ignition when the vehicle
is stationary and the transmission position is h or k. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is at a standstill or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission position is h or k.
% To manoeuvre with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while at a standstill and engage transmission position h or k again.
% At very low outside temperatures below approx. -20°C, you may not be able to shift the transmission from j to another trans- mission position when the engine is switched off. If this is the case, only change the transmission position while the engine is running.
Engaging drive position D # Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. When the automatic transmission is in transmis- sion position h, it shifts the gears automati- cally. This depends, among other things, on the following factors: R The selected drive program R The position of the accelerator pedal R The driving speed
Problems with the transmission
The transmission has a faulty gear shift Possible cause: R the transmission is losing oil.
# Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
The acceleration characteristics get worse, and the transmission no longer shifts. Possible cause: R the transmission is in emergency operation
mode.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traf- fic conditions.
# Shift the transmission to position j. # Switch off the engine. # Wait at least ten seconds. # Try to start the engine again. # Shift the transmission to position h. # Have the transmission checked at a qualified
specialist workshop immediately.
Manual gearshifting
* NOTE Plug-in hybrid # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
Driving and parking 169
When the automatic transmission is shifted to position h, you can manually shift it with the steering wheel gearshift paddle. If permitted, the automatic transmission shifts to a higher or lower gear depending on the steering wheel gearshift paddle being pulled. You have two options to manually shift the auto- matic transmission: R Temporary setting R Permanent setting
The gears shift automatically when manual shift- ing is deactivated. Temporary setting:
# Activating: Pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1 or 2. Manual shifting is activated for a short time. The transmission position display shows p and the current gear.
% How long the manual shifting stays activated is dependant on various factors. Manual shifting can be automatically deacti- vated in the following cases: R Changing the drive program R Restarting the vehicle R When the transmission position h is engaged again R Driving style
# Shifting up: Pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2.
# Shifting down: Pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1. If you pull and hold the steering wheel gear- shift paddle 1, the transmission shifts to the lowest possible gear.
170 Driving and parking
# Deactivating: Pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2 and hold it in place. The transmission position display shows h.
Permanent setting: # Change to drive program =(/ page 163). # Select drive setting p (/ page 164).
Gearshift recommendation The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style.
# If the gearshift recommendation 1 appears next to the transmission position display, shift to the recommended gear.
Using kickdown # Maximum acceleration: depress the accel-
erator pedal beyond the pressure point. To protect against engine overrev, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when maximum engine speed has been reached.
Glide mode function
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
* NOTE Plug-in hybrid # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption. Glide mode is characterised by the following: R The combustion engine is disconnected from
the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral. R The transmission position display h is
shown in green.
Glide mode is activated if the following condi- tions are met: R Drive program ; is selected. R The speed is within a suitable range. R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep
uphill or downhill inclines or tight bends. R There is no trailer hitched up to the trailer
hitch, and no bicycle rack Fitted. R You do not depress the accelerator or brake
pedal (except for light brake applications).
% Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the drive program =.
Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met.
Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active, the glide mode function is not available. Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow- ing parameters: R Incline R Downhill gradient R Temperature R Height R Speed R Operating status of the engine R Traffic situation
% Glide mode can be ended by pressing a steering wheel gearshift paddle (/ page 169).
Function of the 4MATIC 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves
the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insufficient traction. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor over- ride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible espe- cially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. % In wintry road conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary.
Refuelling Refuelling the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel
Fuels are highly flammable.
Driving and parking 171
# Fire, naked flames, smoking and crea- tion of sparks must be avoided.
# Switch off the ignition and, if available, the stationary heater, before and while refuelling the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapour. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during
the refuelling process.
If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
172 Driving and parking
oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten- tion immediately. Do not induce vomit- ing. # Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.
& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapour. # Before you open the fuel filler cap or
take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body. # To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process.
& WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture Vehicles with a diesel engine:
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. While the engine is running, component parts in the exhaust system may overheat without warning. # Never refuel using petrol. # Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Vehicles with a petrol engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free
petrol that conforms to European EN 228, or an equivalent specification.
Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.
Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R diesel R regular petrol with an octane number
lower than 91 RON R petrol with more than 10% ethanol by vol-
ume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100 R petrol with more than 3% methanol by
volume, e.g. M15, M30 R petrol with additives containing metal
If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel: # do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Vehicles with a diesel engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel
fuel that conforms to European stand-
ard EN 590, or an equivalent specifica- tion. In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 50 ppm.
Never refuel using any of the following fuels: R petrol R marine diesel R heating oil R pure bio-diesel fuel or vegetable oil R paraffin or kerosene
If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi- cles with a petrol engine
If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel: R do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise
fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
* NOTE Do not use petrol to refuel vehi- cles with a diesel engine
If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel: R do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise,
fuel can enter the fuel system.
Driving and parking 173
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
* NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused by overfilled fuel tanks
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
If you have added too much fuel because of a defective filling pump, for instance: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
174 Driving and parking
* NOTE Plug-in hybrid # For vehicles with petrol engines,
observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
Requirements: R The vehicle is unlocked. % Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. Observe the notes on operating fluids and fuel. The recommended octane number for your vehi- cle can be found on the information label in the fuel filler flap.
1 Fuel filler flap 2 Bracket for fuel filler cap 3 Tyre pressure table 4 Fuel type 5 QR code for rescue card
# Press on the back area of fuel filler flap 1. # Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and
remove it.
# Insert fuel filler cap from above into bracket 2.
# Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel.
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
% Vehicles with a diesel engine: the tank filler neck is designed for refuelling at diesel filling pumps.
% Vehicles with a diesel engine: when the fuel tank is completely empty, top up with at least 5 litres of diesel.
% Vehicles with a diesel engine: use a filler neck with a large diameter for vehicles with a diesel engine when topping up fuel from a fuel can. Otherwise, the filler neck cannot slide into the tank.
# Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.
# Close fuel filler flap 1.
AdBlue® (vehicles with a diesel engine only)
Notes on refilling AdBlue® AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for the NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. In order for the exhaust gas aftertreatment to func- tion properly, only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO 22241. AdBlue® is characterised by the following: R non-toxic R colourless and odourless R non-flammable
If you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may be released. Only fill the AdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas. Do not let AdBlue® come into contact with skin, eyes or clothes. Keep AdBlue® away from chil- dren. Do not ingest AdBlue®. If AdBlue® is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Drink plenty of water. Seek medical attention at once.
Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 362). AdBlue® is available here: R AdBlue® can be topped up by fast service at
a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. R AdBlue® is available at many filling stations from AdBlue® filling pumps. R Alternatively, AdBlue® is available at qualified specialist workshops, e.g. Mercedes-Benz Service Centres, and at many filling stations in AdBlue® refill canisters or AdBlue® refill bottles.
% Ensure the connection between the refill container and vehicle filler neck does not drip.
Driving and parking 175
Topping up AdBlue®
* NOTE Engine damage due to AdBlue® being in the fuel
# AdBlue® must not be used to fill the fuel tank.
# Only use AdBlue® to fill the AdBlue® tank.
# Do not overfill the AdBlue® tank.
* NOTE Contamination of the vehicle inte- rior due to AdBlue® leakage
# After topping up, carefully close the AdBlue® refill container.
# Avoid carrying AdBlue® refill containers permanently in the vehicle.
Requirements: R The vehicle is unlocked.
176 Driving and parking
The following messages appear in order in the multifunction display when the AdBlue® tank requires topping up: R Refill AdBlue See Owner's ManualThe
AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserve range. Top up with at least 5 l of AdBlue®. R Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX miles See Owner's ManualThe low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance after the remaining distance displayed has been driven. Top up with at least 5 l of AdBlue®. R XX,X l Top up AdBlue Emer. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX kmThe low AdBlue® level will lead to limited perform- ance from the speed displayed. After the remaining distance displayed has been cov- ered, it will no longer be possible to start the engine. Top up with at least the amount of AdBlue® displayed. R XX,X l Top up AdBlue Switch on ignition, wait 60 sec. or eng. start not poss.The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the engine. Top up with at least the amount of
AdBlue® displayed. Switch on the ignition and wait for approximately 60 seconds. Start the engine.
You can see the AdBlue® range and level in the Service menu in the multifunction display. % The AdBlue® range shown depends strongly
on the driving style and operating condi- tions. The actual range can therefore deviate from the calculated range.
Opening the AdBlue® filler cap
# Press on the back area of fuel filler flap 1. # Turn AdBlue® filler cap 2 anti-clockwise and
remove it. % You can also store the AdBlue® filler cap in
the fuel filler cap holder in the fuel filler flap hinge arm.
Topping up AdBlue® Mercedes-Benz recommends topping up AdBlue® at a filling pump. If no AdBlue® filling pump is available, you can also top up AdBlue® using a canister. # Screw on the fastener of AdBlue® refill canis-
ter 4.
# Screw disposable hose 3 onto the opening of AdBlue® refill canister 4 until hand-tight.
# Screw disposable hose 3 onto the filler neck of the vehicle until hand-tight.
# Lift up and tip AdBlue® refill canister 4. The filling process stops when the AdBlue® tank is completely full. AdBlue® refill canister 4 can be removed when it has been only partially emptied.
# Unscrew and close disposable hose 3 and AdBlue® refill canister 4 in reverse order.
# Replace AdBlue® filler cap 2 and turn it clockwise until it audibly engages.
# Close fuel filler flap 1. # Switch on the ignition for at least 60 sec-
onds.
% If the engine could not be started due to the AdBlue® tank being empty, it can take up to 60 seconds for the top up to be detected.
# Start the vehicle.
Driving and parking 177
% Avoid storing AdBlue® refill containers per- manently in the vehicle.
Parking Parking the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured vehi- cle rolling away
If the vehicle is not securely parked suffi- ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient. # On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the
front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the kerb if it starts moving. # apply the parking brake. # Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position j. # Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first 1 or reverse gear k.
178 Driving and parking
& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # Park the vehicle so that no flammable
material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. # In particular, do not park on dry grass- land or harvested grain fields.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away
# Always secure the vehicle against roll- ing away.
# Bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing the brake pedal.
# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts moving.
# Apply the electric parking brake. # Vehicles with manual transmission:
Engage first 1 or reverse gear k.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Engage transmission position j in a station- ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied (/ page 168).
# Switch off the engine and the ignition by pressing the 1 button.
# Release the service brake slowly. # Get out of the vehicle and lock it. % When you park the vehicle, you can still
operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed.
Garage door opener Programming buttons for the garage door opener
& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.
# Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti- lation.
& WARNING Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a garage door
When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage door opener, per- sons can become trapped or struck by the garage door if they stand within its range of movement. # Always make sure that nobody is within
the range of the garage door's move- ment.
Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked outside the
garage or outside the range of movement of the door. R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on.
Driving and parking 179 % The garage door opener function is always
available when the ignition is switched on.
# Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow.
% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi- cator lamp flashes yellow.
180 Driving and parking
# Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow.
# Point remote control 5 from a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm towards button 1, 2 or 3.
# Press and hold button 6 of remote control 5 until one of the following signals appears: R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green contin- uously. Programming is complete. R Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Pro- gramming was successful. Additionally, synchronisation of the rolling code with the door system must be carried out.
# If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash green: repeat the procedure.
# Release all of the buttons. % The remote control for the door drive is not
included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener.
Synchronising the rolling code
Requirements: R The door system uses a rolling code.
R The vehicle must be within range of the garage door or door drive.
R The vehicle as well as persons and objects are located outside the range of movement of the door.
# Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds.
# Press previously programmed button 1, 2 or 3 repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is com- pleted.
% Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive.
Troubleshooting when programming the remote control # Check if the transmitter frequency of remote
control 5 is supported. # Replace the batteries in remote control 5.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist work- shop. # Hold remote control 5 at various angles
from a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. # Hold remote control 5 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rear view mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. # On remote controls that transmit only for a limited period, press button 6 on remote control 5 again before transmission ends. # Angle the aerial line of the garage door opener unit towards the remote control. % Support and additional information on pro- gramming:
R On the HomeLink® Hotline on (0) 08000 466 354 65 or +49 (0) 6838 907-277
R On the Internet at https:// www.homelink.com
Opening or closing the garage door
Requirements: R The corresponding button is programmed to
operate the door.
# Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the door opens or closes.
# If indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the previously pressed button again until the door opens or closes.
Clearing the garage door opener memory # Press and hold buttons 1 and 3.
Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow. # If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release
buttons 1 and 3. The entire memory has been deleted.
Electric parking brake
Function of the electric parking brake (apply- ing automatically)
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
Driving and parking 181
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
Vehicles with manual transmission: If you have previously driven at a speed above 3 km/h and the vehicle then comes to a stand- still, the electric parking brake is applied if one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The driver's door is opened.
The electric parking brake is also applied while the vehicle is kept stationary by the HOLD func- tion if one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. R There is a system malfunction.
182 Driving and parking
R The power supply is insufficient. R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
When the electric parking brake is applied, the red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instru- ment cluster. If the electric parking brake is not applied when the driver's door is opened, the Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply parking brake See Owner's Manual message appears. % The electric parking brake is not automati-
cally applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. % To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake (/ page 183). Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The electric parking brake is applied if the transmission is in position j and one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.
% To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake (/ page 183).
In the following situations, the electric park- ing brake is also applied: R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-
tionary. R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle
stationary. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing
the vehicle to a standstill. R In addition, one of the following condi-
tions must be fulfilled: - The engine is switched off. - The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. - There is a system malfunction. - The power supply is insufficient. - The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
When the electric parking brake is applied, the red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instru- ment cluster. % The electric parking brake is not automati-
cally applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
Function of the electric parking brake (releasing automatically)
The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled: R The driver's door is closed. R The engine is running. R Vehicles with manual transmission: a gear
has been selected, you release the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator pedal. R You apply the brakes and shift from neutral i into reverse gear k or a forward gear (1 - 6) when on level ground. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission is in position h or k and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission position j to h or k when on level ground.
R If the transmission is in position k, the tail- gate must be closed.
R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat.
When the electric parking brake is released, the red ! indicator lamp in the instrument clus- ter goes out.
Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually Applying
# Push handle 1. The red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
Driving and parking 183
% The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the red ! indicator lamp is lit continuously.
Releasing # Switch on the ignition. # Pull handle 1.
The red ! indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster goes out. Emergency braking # Press and hold handle 1. As long as the vehicle is driving, the Release parking brake message is displayed and the red ! indicator lamp flashes. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle If a collision is detected when the tow-away pro- tection is primed on a locked vehicle, you will
184 Driving and parking
receive a notification in the multimedia system when you switch on the ignition. You will receive information about the following points: R The area of the vehicle that may have been
damaged. R The force of the impact.
The following situations can lead to inadvertent activation: R The parked vehicle is moved, e.g. in a two-
storey garage.
% Deactivate tow-away protection in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti- vate tow-away protection, collision detection will also be deactivated.
System limits Detection may be restricted in the following sit- uations: R the vehicle is damaged without impact, e.g. if
an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a key R an impact occurs at low speed
R the electric parking brake is not applied
Notes on parking up the vehicle If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse. The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam- aged by heavy discharging. Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not disconnect the 12 V battery even if the vehicle is left idle for a lengthy period. % Further information can be obtained at a
qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE Plug-in hybrid # Observe the notes about the high-volt-
age battery in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dan- gers.
Standby mode (extension of the starter bat- tery's period out of use)
Standby mode function % This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimised during extended periods of non-oper- ation. Standby mode is characterised by the following: R The starter battery is preserved. R The maximum non-operational time appears
in the media display. R The connection to online services is interrup-
ted. R The ATA (anti-theft alarm system) is unavaila-
ble. R The interior protection and tow-away protec-
tion functions are not available. R The function for detecting collisions on a
parked vehicle is not available.
If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system: R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on.
Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-opera- tional time may cause inconvenience, i.e. it can- not be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the engine. The starter battery must be charged first in the following situations: R The vehicle's non-operational time must be
extended. R The Battery charge insufficient for standby
mode message appears in the media display.
% Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on.
Activating/deactivating standby mode (park- ing up the vehicle)
Requirements: R The engine is switched off.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Standby mode. # Select Yes.
Driving and driving safety systems Driving systems and your responsibility Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and manoeu- vring the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems. Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always
Driving and parking 185 take into account road, weather or traffic condi- tions.
Information on vehicle sensors and cameras Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.
186 Driving and parking
1 Multifunction camera 2 Cameras in the outside mirrors 3 Front radar 4 Front camera 5 Corner radars 6 Ultrasonic sensors 7 Reversing camera
& WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehi- cle sensors and cameras
If the area around vehicle sensors or cam- eras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident. # Keep the area around vehicle sensors
or cameras clear of any obstructions and clean. # Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.
Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush (/ page 310). The sensors and cameras must not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional licence plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras. Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range. If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or after an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the front and rear win- dows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.
Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(/ page 187) R BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 187)
R ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (/ page 188)
R ESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 189)
R ESP® trailer stabilisation (/ page 189) R EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)
(/ page 190) R STEER CONTROL (/ page 190) R HOLD function (/ page 190) R Hill Start Assist (/ page 192) R Adaptive Brake Lights (/ page 192) R Start-off assist (/ page 192) R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 193) R Cruise control (/ page 195) R Limiter (/ page 196) R Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 214) R Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent)
(/ page 213) R Suspension with adaptive damping adjust-
ment (/ page 222)
Driving Assistance package The following functions are part of the Driving Assistance Package. Certain functions are only available in some countries. Some functions are also available without the Driving Assistance Package, albeit with restricted functionality. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 198) R Active Speed Limit Assist (country-depend-
ent) (/ page 203) R Route-based speed adaptation (country-
dependent) (/ page 203) R Active Brake Assist (/ page 208) R Active Steering Assist (country-dependent)
(/ page 205) R Active Emergency Stop Assist (country-
dependent) (/ page 207) R Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
with exit warning (/ page 217) R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 219)
Parking Package R Reversing camera (/ page 222)
R 360° Camera (/ page 225) R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 228) R Active Parking Assist (/ page 233)
Functions of ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ABS regulates the brake pressure in critical driv- ing situations: R During braking, e.g. at maximum full-stop
braking or insufficient tyre traction, the wheels are prevented from locking. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving. System limits R ABS is active from speeds of approx.
5 km/h. R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a
malfunction has occurred and the yel- low ! ABS warning lamp lights up contin-
Driving and parking 187
uously in the instrument cluster after the engine is started.
Function of BAS
& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist Sys- tem)
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. # Depress the brake pedal with full force
in emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres-
sure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance.
188 Driving and parking
R ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
Functions of ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- gram)
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. # ESP® should only be deactivated in the
following situations.
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
ESP® can monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations, within physical limits: R When pulling away on wet or slippery carria-
geways. R When braking.
If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP® can stabilise the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: R One or more wheels are braked. R The engine output is adapted according to
the situation.
ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn- ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe the following points when ESP® is deac- tivated: R Driving stability will no longer be improved. R The drive wheels could spin. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
% When ESP® is deactivated, you are still assis- ted by ESP® when braking.
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster, one or several wheels has reached its grip limit: R Adapt the driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions. R Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-
stances. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
is necessary.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow- ing situations: R When using snow chains. R In deep snow. R On sand or gravel.
% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction.
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up continu- ously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.
Observe the following information: R Warning and indicator lamps (/ page 432) R Display messages (/ page 376)
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery carriageway. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways: R The drive wheels are braked individually if
they spin. R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel
or wheels with traction.
Influence of drive programs on ESP® The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to dif- ferent weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP® mode will be activated. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (/ page 163).
Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi- cle in the lane: R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle
speeds between approx. 75 km/h and 200 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R The vehicle is stabilised by means of individ- ual brake application on one side.
Function of ESP® trailer stabilisation
& WARNING Risk of accident in poor road and weather conditions
In poor road and weather conditions, the trailer stabilisation cannot prevent lurching of the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a high centre of gravity may tip over before ESP® detects this.
Driving and parking 189
# Always adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather condi- tions.
When driving with a trailer, ESP® can stabilise your vehicle if the trailer begins to swerve from side to side: R ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above
speeds of 65 km/h. R Slight swerving is reduced by means of a tar-
geted, individual brake application on one side. R In the event of severe swerving, the engine output is also reduced and all wheels are braked. ESP® trailer stabilisation may be impaired or may not function if: R The trailer is not connected correctly or is not detected properly by the vehicle.
190 Driving and parking
Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Sta- bility Program) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access % ESP® can only be activated/deactivated
using quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP® can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu.
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn- ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster.
Function of EBD Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is char- acterised by the following: R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure
on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking,
especially on bends.
This steering recommendation is given in the fol- lowing situations: R both right wheels or both left wheels are on a
wet or slippery road surface when you brake R the vehicle starts to skid
System limits STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R ESP® is deactivated. R ESP® is malfunctioning. R The steering is malfunctioning.
If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering.
* NOTE Plug-in hybrid # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
# Select ESP. # Select On or å Off.
Function of STEER CONTROL STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation.
HOLD function HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand- still without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic.
Driving and parking 191
The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsi- bility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver.
System limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. R The incline must not be greater than 30%.
Activating/deactivating the HOLD function
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle
If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away: R If there is a malfunction in the system or
in the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
# Always secure the vehicle against roll- ing away before you leave it.
Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on
the driver's side is fastened. R The engine is running or has been automati-
cally switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R The electric parking brake is released. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti- vated. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission is in position h, k or i.
Activating the HOLD function # Depress the brake pedal, and after a short
time quickly depress further until the ë display appears in the multifunction display. # Release the brake pedal.
Deactivating the HOLD function # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
or # Depress the brake pedal until the ë dis-
play disappears from the multifunction dis- play. The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow- ing situations: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa- ted. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission is shifted to position j. R The vehicle is secured with the electric park- ing brake.
In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission position j and/or by the electric parking brake: R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's
door is opened. R The vehicle is switched off. R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insufficient.
192 Driving and parking
Vehicles with manual transmission The Brake immediately message may also appear in the multifunction display: # Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly
until the warning message disappears. The HOLD function is deactivated. A horn sounds at regular intervals if, despite the Brake immediately message, you turn off the engine, remove your seat belt and open the driv- er's door. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the horn tone becomes louder. The vehicle cannot be locked until you have deactivated the HOLD function. % Once you have switched off the engine, you cannot restart the engine until you have deactivated the HOLD function.
Function of Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the fol- lowing conditions: R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the
transmission is in position h or k.
R The electric parking brake is released. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away
After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. # Swiftly move your foot from the brake
pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist.
Function of Adaptive Brake Lights Adaptive Brake Lights warn following traffic in an emergency braking situation with the following actions: R By flashing the brake lamps R By activating the hazard warning lights
If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds above 50 km/h, the brake lamps flash rapidly. This provides traffic travelling behind you with an even more noticeable warning. If the vehicle is travelling at speeds of more than 70 km/h at the beginning of the brake applica- tion, the hazard warning lights switch on once the vehicle is stationary. When you pull away again, the hazard warning lights will switch off automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning lights using the hazard warning button.
Start-off assist Function of the start-off assist The start-off assist enables optimal vehicle acceleration from a standstill. For this, a suitably high-grip road surface is required, the tyres and vehicle must also be in good condition. Do not activate the start-off assist on public roads. Be sure to observe the safety notes and informa- tion on ESP® (/ page 188).
Activating the start-off assist
& WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning
When you use start-off assist, individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. If ESP® is deactivated, there is a risk of skid- ding and accident! # Make sure that no persons or obstacles
are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.
# Deactivating ESP® (/ page 190). # Move the steering wheel to the straight-
ahead position. # Depress the brake pedal firmly with your left
foot and keep it depressed. # Engage the h drive position (/ page 168). # Select the sportiest available drive program
B or C(/ page 163). # Rapidly depress the accelerator pedal fully.
Driving and parking 193
# Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum accelera- tion.
# Switch on ESP® once the acceleration proce- dure is complete. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.
Cancelling the start-off assist # Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. # Reactivate the ESP®.
ATTENTION ASSIST Function of ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto- nous journeys, e.g. on motorways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration
in time. The system is not a substitute for a wellrested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation. You can choose between two settings: R Standard: normal system sensitivity. R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The
driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap- ted accordingly.
If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra- tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break! warning appears in the Instrument Dis- play. You can acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes.
194 Driving and parking
You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance menu of the on-board computer: R The length of the journey since the last
break. R The attention level determined by ATTENTION
ASSIST: - the fuller the circle, the higher the atten-
tion level determined - as your attention wanes, the circle in the
centre of the display becomes smaller
If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System suspended message appears. If a warning is given in the Instrument Display, the multimedia system offers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start naviga- tion to this rest area. This function can be activa- ted and deactivated in the multimedia system. If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the Û symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the Instrument Display when the engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically when the engine is restarted. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.
System limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to 200 km/h speed range. Particularly in the following situations, ATTEN- TION ASSIST only functions in a restricted man- ner and warnings may be delayed or not occur: R If you have been driving for less than approx-
imately 30 minutes.
R If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes).
R If there is a strong side wind. R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor-
nering speeds or high rates of acceleration). R If Active Steering Assist is activated and
active (/ page 205). R If the time has been set incorrectly. R If you change lanes and vary your speed fre-
quently In active driving situations.
The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment is reset and restarted when continu- ing the journey in the following situations: R If you switch off the engine. R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the
driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break).
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Attention Assist
Setting options # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.
Suggesting a rest area # Select Suggest rest area. # Activate or deactivate the function.
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or increasing lack of attention, it suggests a rest area in the vicinity. # Select the suggested rest area. You are guided to the selected rest area.
Driving and parking 195
Cruise control and limiter Function of cruise control
* NOTE Plug-in hybrid # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up to the set win- ter tyre limit. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog- nise dangers (/ page 185). MercedesAMG vehicles: cruise control is avail- able up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.
Displays on the multifunction display R h (grey): cruise control is selected but
not yet activated. R h (green): cruise control is active.
A stored speed appears along with the h dis- play. % The segments extending from the current
stored speed to the end of the scale, or to the set winter tyre limit, light up in the speedometer.
System limits Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's brak- ing effect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheat- ing and wearing too quickly.
196 Driving and parking
Do not use cruise control in the following situa- tions: R In traffic situations which require frequent
changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on winding roads. R On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. R If you are driving when visibility is poor. Function of the limiter
* NOTE Plug-in hybrid # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To reduce the speed to the set speed, the limiter applies the brakes automatically. You can limit the speed as follows: R Variable: for a short-term speed restriction,
e.g. in built-up areas
R Permanent: for a longer-term speed restric- tion, e.g. in winter tyre mode
You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up to the set win- ter tyre limit. You can also perform settings while the vehicle is stationary if the vehicle has been started. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog- nise dangers (/ page 185). MercedesAMG vehicles: the limiter is available up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.
Displays on the multifunction display R È (grey): variable limiter is selected but
not yet activated. R È (flashes grey): variable limiter is tempo-
rarily passive. R È (green): variable limiter is activated.
A stored speed appears along with the È dis- play. The segments in the speedometer light up, up to the currently stored speed.
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the variable limiter switches to passive mode. The Limiter passive message appears in the multifunctional display and the È display flashes. The variable limiter is reactivated in the following situations: R If the vehicle speed drops below the stored
speed. R If the stored speed is called up. R If you store a new speed.
Operating cruise control or the variable lim- iter
& WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed
If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates. # Take into account the traffic situation
before calling up the stored speed.
Requirements: Cruise control R Cruise control is selected. R ESP® must be activated, but not intervening. R The vehicle speed is at least 20 km/h. R The transmission is in position h.
Variable limiter R The variable limiter is selected.
# To operate cruise control or the variable limiter: press the rocker switch on the steer- ing wheel control unit up or down to the desired position.
Switching between cruise control and the variable limiter # To select cruise control: select h with
the right rocker switch.
Driving and parking 197
# To select the variable limiter: select È with the right rocker switch.
% Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: the variable limiter is selected by a different button (/ page 201).
Activating cruise control or the variable lim- iter # Press rocker switch 1 up M or down
N. The current vehicle speed is stored and the vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or does not exceed it (variable limiter). or # Select J with the left rocker switch. The last stored speed is called up and the vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or does not exceed it (variable limiter). If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored. % When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted.
198 Driving and parking
When you activate cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is deleted. Increasing/decreasing the stored speed # 1 km/h: press rocker switch 1 up M or down N to the pressure point, or press and hold (increments of 1 km/h). or # 10 km/h: press rocker switch 1 up M or down N beyond the pressure point, or press and hold (increments of 10 km/h). or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed and press rocker switch 1 up M. Adopting a detected speed # Activate cruise control or the variable limiter. # If a traffic sign has been detected and is dis- played in the instrument cluster: select J with the left rocker switch. The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle maintains or does not exceed this speed.
Deactivating cruise control or the variable limiter # Select O with the left rocker switch. % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP®
intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. The variable limiter is not deactivated.
Information on the permanent limiter If the vehicle should never exceed a specific speed (e.g. for driving in winter tyre mode), you can set this speed with the permanent limiter. You do this by limiting the speed between 160 km/h and 240 km/h in the multimedia sys- tem (/ page 198). Shortly before the set speed is reached, it appears in the multifunction display. When you confirm the message, display messages no lon- ger appear until you switch off the vehicle. The speed will only be displayed again once the vehi- cle has been restarted or if the set speed is changed. The permanent limiter does not switch to pas- sive mode even during kickdown and the driven speed remains below the set speed.
Setting the limit speed for winter tyres Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Winter tyres limit # Select a speed or deactivate the function.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles in front are detected, the set distance is main- tained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend- ing on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel. Available speed range: R Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack-
age: 20 km/h - 200 km/h R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack-
age: 20 km/h - 210 km/h
% Plug-in hybrid: the adjustable set speed can be reduced due to the selected drive pro- gram. Observe the relevant notes in the Sup- plement.
Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R Adjusts the driving style depending on the
selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfort- able or dynamic) R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack- age: - Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in
urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles) - Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on motorways or on multilane roads with separate carriageways (country-dependent)
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package and Parking Package: if the vehicle has been
braked to a standstill on multi-lane, separate carriageways by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehi- cle in front when driving off again within 30 sec- onds. If a critical situation is detected when driv- ing off, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog- nise dangers (/ page 185).
Driving and parking 199 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays in the Instrument Display
Assistant display 1 Route-based speed adaptation: type of route
event (/ page 203) 2 Vehicle in front 3 Distance indicator 4 Set specified distance 5 Active Lane Change Assist lane change dis-
play
200 Driving and parking
Permanent status display of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R k (white): Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC selected, specified distance set R k (white vehicle, green speedometer):
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and vehicle detected R k (green): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and vehicle detected R r: Route-based speed adaptation active (/ page 203).
The stored speed is shown along with the per- manent status display and highlighted on the speedometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the speed is greyed out. % On motorways or high-speed major roads,
the green ç vehicle symbol is displayed cyclically when the vehicle is ready to pull away. % If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to pas-
sive mode. The ç suspended message appears in the multifunction display.
Display on the speedometer The stored speed is highlighted on the speedom- eter. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment for the route event ahead is less than the stored speed, the segments in the speedometer light up. The multifunction display shows the deactivation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as alterations to the speed due to manual or automatic adoption of the max- imum permissible speed.
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions. R The windscreen in the area of the camera is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered. R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. R In multi-storey car parks or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients.
R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles.
In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accel- erating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.
& WARNING Risk of accident from acceler- ation or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel- erate or brake in the following cases, for example: R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC. R If the stored speed is called up and is
considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed. R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.
# Always carefully observe the traffic con- ditions and be ready to brake at all times.
# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf- ficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi- cient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. # Adjust your speed and maintain a suita-
ble distance from the vehicle in front. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take
evasive action.
& WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a different lane or when
changing lanes R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta-
tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles R to complex traffic conditions R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. # Always observe the traffic conditions
carefully and react accordingly.
Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Requirements: R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP® is activated and is not intervening.
Driving and parking 201
R The transmission is in position h. R The driver's door is closed. R Check of the radar sensor system has been
successfully completed. R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not being
used to park the vehicle or to exit from a parking space.
202 Driving and parking
# To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the rocker switches on the steering wheel control unit up or down to the desired position.
Switching between Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the limiter # Press the I button.
Activating the variable limiter or Active Dis- tance Assist DISTRONIC # To activate without a stored speed: press
rocker switch 1 up M or down N, or select J with the left rocker switch. or # To activate with a stored speed: select J with the left rocker switch. # Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current vehicle speed is stored and maintained (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) or limited (variable limiter) by the vehicle. Adopting a detected speed limit
# Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. # If a traffic sign has been detected and is dis-
played in the instrument cluster: select J with the left rocker switch. The maximum permissible speed on the traf- fic sign is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed.
Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
and remove your foot from the brake pedal. # Select J with the left rocker switch. or # Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and
firmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out. Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat
If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. # Always deactivate Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi- cle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat.
# Select O with the left rocker switch.
% If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
Increasing/decreasing the stored speed # 1 km/h: press rocker switch 1 up M or
down N to the pressure point, or press and hold (increments of 1 km/h). or
Driving and parking 203
# 10 km/h: press rocker switch 1 up M or down N beyond the pressure point, or press and hold (increments of 10 km/h).
or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed
and press rocker switch 1 up M. Changing the specified distance to the vehi- cle in front # To reduce the specified distance: press
the right rocker switch up (Ñ). # To increase the specified distance: press
the right rocker switch down (Ò).
Function of Active Speed Limit Assist If a change in the speed limit of 20 km/h or more is detected and automatic adoption of speed limits is activated, the new speed limit is automatically adopted as the stored speed (/ page 216). The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit
display in the Instrument Display is always upda- ted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign. If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited stretch of road (e.g. on a motorway), the recom- mended speed is automatically adopted as the stored speed. The system uses the speed stored on an unlimited stretch of road as the recom- mended speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the rec- ommended speed is 130 km/h. If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelera- tor pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog- nise dangers (/ page 185).
System limits The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs (/ page 214). Speed limits below 20 km/h are not automati- cally adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be
properly detected by the system. The maximum permissible speed applying to a vehicle with a trailer is not detected by the system. Adjust the speed in these situations.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed
The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as: R at speed limits below 20 km/h R in wet conditions or in fog R when towing a trailer
# Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations.
# Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions.
Function of route-based speed adaptation When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is acti- vated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accord- ingly to the route events ahead. Depending on
204 Driving and parking
the drive program selected, the vehicle negoti- ates a route event ahead in an economical, com- fortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account. You can activate and deactivate route-based speed adaptation in the multimedia system (/ page 205). The following route events are taken into account: R Bends R T-junctions, roundabouts and toll stations R Turns and exits R Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic
Information )
% When the toll station is reached, Active Dis- tance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as the stored speed.
Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi- cator to change lanes is switched on and one of the following situations is detected: R Turning off at junctions R Driving on slowing-down lanes R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down
lanes
The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to junctions, roundabouts and traffic lights, as route-based speed adapta- tion does not brake the vehicle to a standstill. When route guidance is active, the first speed adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is confirmed and further speed adjustment is activated. Speed adaptation is cancelled in the following cases: R If the turn signal indicator is switched off
before the route event. R If the driver depresses the accelerator or
brake pedal during the process.
System limits Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations and driving at a suitable speed. The speed adaptation made by the system may not always be suitable, particularly in the follow- ing situations: R the road's course not clearly visible R road narrowing R varying maximum permissible speeds in indi-
vidual lanes, for example at toll stations R wet road surfaces, snow or ice R when towing a trailer
In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.
& WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation
Route-based speed adaptation can malfunc- tion or be temporarily unavailable in the fol- lowing situations:
R If the driver does not follow the calcula- ted route
R If map data is not up-to-date or available R In the event of roadworks R In bad weather or road conditions R If the accelerator pedal is depressed R In the event of electronically displayed
speed limitations
# Adapt the speed to the traffic situation.
Setting route-based speed adaptation
Requirements: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted. R ECO Assist is active.
Driving and parking 205
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Route-based speed adapt. # Activate or deactivate the function.
When the function is active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on the route events ahead. % Further information on the route-based speed adaptation (/ page 203).
Active Steering Assist Function of Active Steering Assist Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 210 km/h. The system helps you to stay in the centre of the lane by means of mod- erate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a refer- ence. % Depending on the country, in the lower
speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding traffic as a reference. If nec- essary, Active Steering Assist can then also
provide assistance when driving outside the centre of the lane, for example, to form a rescue lane. If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case.
Status display of Active Steering Assist in the multifunction display R Ø (grey): activated and passive R Ø (green): activated and active R Ø (red): system limits detected R Ø (white, red hands): "hands on the steer-
ing wheel" prompt
% During the transition from active to passive status, the Ø symbol is shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the system is passive, the Ø symbol is shown as grey in the multifunction display.
% Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering Assist may be unavailable.
206 Driving and parking Steering and touch detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to inter- vene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time.
If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steer- ing wheel, display 1 appears. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning mes- sage.
If the driver does not react to the warning for a considerable period, the system can initiate an emergency stop (/ page 207). The warning is not issued or is stopped when the driver gives confirmation to the system: R The driver steers the vehicle. R Depending on the country: the driver
presses a steering wheel button or operates Touch Control
If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog- nise dangers (/ page 185).
System limits Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor- que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane or to drive through exits.
The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances: R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain,
fog, heavy spray, greatly varying light condi- tions or strong shadows on the carriageway. R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R Insufficient road illumination. R The windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker. R No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, for example, in a construction area or junctions. R The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R The road is narrow and winding. R There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, such as object markers.
The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions: R On tight bends and when turning. R When crossing junctions. R At roundabouts or toll stations. R When towing a trailer. R When the tyre pressure is too low.
& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func- tioning
If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane. # Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel and observe the traffic carefully. # Always steer the vehicle paying atten-
tion to traffic conditions.
& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes
The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions. # Steer according to traffic conditions.
Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist
Requirements: R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access # Select a Act. Steer. Asst.
Driving and parking 207 Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist
If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steer- ing wheel, display 1 appears in the multifunc- tion display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. If the driver still does not respond to the warn- ing, the Beginning emergency stop message appears in the multifunction display. If the driver still does not respond, Active Distance Assist
208 Driving and parking
DISTRONIC reduces the speed. The vehicle is decelerated in stages to a standstill. Depending on the country, at speeds below 60 km/h the hazard warning lights switch on automatically. When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park-
ing brake. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended R The vehicle is unlocked. R If possible, an emergency call is placed to
the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre
The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Active Brake Assist
Function of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions: R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack-
age: Evasive Steering Assist and cornering function
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli- sion, a warning tone sounds and the L dis- tance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt.
If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking applica- tion. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa- tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak- ing, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to max- imum full-stop braking if necessary. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog- nise dangers (/ page 185).
If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occurred, display 1 appears in the multifunction display and then automatically goes out after a short time. If the autonomous braking function or the situa- tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE®) may also be initiated.
& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa- tions. In such cases, Active Brake Assist might: R Give a warning or brake without reason R Not give a warning or not brake
Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time. # Always pay careful attention to the traf-
fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec- essary.
Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist.
Driving and parking 209
The individual subfunctions are available in various speed ranges: The distance warning function can issue a warn- ing in the following situations: R From approximately 30 km/h, if over several
seconds the distance maintained to the vehi- cle travelling in front is insufficient for the driven speed, the L distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. R From approximately 7 km/h, if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning tone and the L distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated ten- sioning of the seat belt.
Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi- ded it is safe to do so and the traffic situation allows this.
210 Driving and parking
Distance warning function (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package) The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h
when approaching stationary vehicles, mov- ing pedestrians, and cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching crossing cyclists
Distance warning function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h
when approaching stationary vehicles
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching moving pedestrians and cyclists ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists
Autonomous braking function (vehicles with- out Driving Assistance Package) If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approximately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situa- tions: R at speeds up to approximately 200 km/h
when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h
when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h
when approaching moving pedestrians and crossing cyclists R at speeds up to approximately 50 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles
Autonomous braking function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)
If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approximately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situa- tions: R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h
when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h
when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h
when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists
Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack- age) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 7 km/h in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h
when approaching stationary vehicles and vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching moving pedestrians and crossing cyclists
Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 7 km/h in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h
when approaching stationary vehicles
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles, and station- ary and crossing cyclists
Cancelling a brake application of Active Brake Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by: R sharply depressing the accelerator pedal or
with kickdown R releasing the brake pedal
Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli- cation when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R you manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle R there is no longer a risk of collision R an obstacle is no longer detected in front of
your vehicle
Driving and parking 211
Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac- teristics: R The ability to detect stationary or moving
pedestrians. R Assistance through power-assisted steering if
it detects a swerving manoeuvre. R Activation by an abrupt steering movement
during a swerving manoeuvre. R Assistance during swerving and straightening
of the vehicle. R Reaction from a speed of approximately
20 km/h up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h.
You can prevent the assistance at any time by actively steering.
Cornering function (only vehicles with Driv- ing Assistance Package) If the system detects a risk of a collision with an oncoming vehicle when turning across an oncoming lane, autonomous braking can be initi-
212 Driving and parking
ated at speeds below 15 km/h before you have left the lane in which you are driving.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Eva- sive Steering Assist
Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recog- nise objects or complex traffic situations clearly. Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not sufficient to avoid a collision. # Always pay careful attention to the traf-
fic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec- essary. # End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations. # Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle.
System limits Full system performance is not available for a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after driving off. If Active Brake Assist is impaired or inoperative due to a malfunction, the Ä warning lamp appears in the multifunction display. The system may be impaired or may not func- tion, particularly in the following situations: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions. R If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged or covered. R If the sensors are impaired due to interfer- ence from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflections in multi-storey car parks. R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed. R In complex traffic situations where objects cannot always be clearly identified. R If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection range.
R If pedestrians are hidden by other objects. R If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot
be distinguished from the background. R If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g.
due to special clothing or other objects. R If the driver's seat belt is not fastened. R On bends with a tight radius.
% The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust auto- matically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only partially available during the teach-in proc- ess.
Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist
Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Brake Assist # Select the desired setting.
The setting is retained when the drive system is next started.
Deactivating Active Brake Assist % It is recommended that you always leave
Active Brake Assist activated. # Select Off.
The distance warning function, the autono- mous braking function and the Evasive Steer- ing Assist are deactivated. When the vehicle is next started, the middle setting is automatically selected. % If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the status bar of the multifunction display.
Speed Limit Assist
Function of Speed Limit Assist Speed Limit Assist detects speed limits with multifunction camera and displays them in the instrument cluster and optionally in the head-up display. The camera also detects speed limits with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). The system detects stop signs, thereby preventing the engine from being switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog- nise dangers (/ page 185).
Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well.
Driving and parking 213 Display in the Instrument Display % The illustrations show the Instrument Display
in the widescreen cockpit.
1 Permissible speed 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction If Speed Limit Assist cannot determine the cur- rent maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the Instrument Display:
214 Driving and parking
This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Speed Limit Assist is not sup- ported. Speed Limit Assist is not available in all countries.
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-
cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R If the windscreen in the area of the multi- function camera is dirty, or if the camera is misted up, damaged or covered. R If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are covered.
R If you turn sharply when passing traffic signs outside the camera's field of vision.
Setting Speed Limit Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Speed Limit Assist
Adjusting the type of warning # Select Visual & audible, Visual or None.
Adjusting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. # Select Warning threshold. # Set the desired speed. % If one of the following systems is activated,
the speed detected can be manually adopted as the speed limit: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Cruise control R Variable limiter
Further information (/ page 201).
Traffic Sign Assist
Function of Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with the multifunction camera (/ page 185). It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the instrument cluster. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog- nise dangers (/ page 185). Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data stored in the navigation system, it can update the display in the following situations without detecting traffic signs. If the system detects that you are driving onto a section of road in the wrong direction of travel, it triggers a warning. The camera also detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). These are only displayed if a restric- tion applies or if the system cannot clearly deter- mine whether the restriction applies.
Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well.
Display in the Instrument Display
Instrument Display in the widescreen cockpit 1 Maximum permissible speed 2 Maximum permissible speed when there is a
restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction % Vehicles with a standard Instrument Dis-
play: a + symbol next to a traffic sign in the Instrument Display indicates that additional traffic signs have been detected. These can also be displayed in the media display and optionally in the head-up display.
Driving and parking 215 If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the maxi- mum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the Instrument Display:
This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not sup- ported. Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. % Also observe the information on display mes-
sages in Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 376). Warning when approaching pedestrian cross- ings (vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack- age) The system can warn you if you approach a pedestrian crossing with your vehicle. The ¯ Watch for pedestrians message appears in the instrument cluster. The warning occurs only if appropriate traffic signs or lane markings are detected and pedes- trians are present in the danger zone.
216 Driving and parking
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-
cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R If the windscreen in the area of the multi- function camera is dirty, or if the camera is misted up, damaged or covered. R If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are covered. R If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out-of-date. R If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes. R If you turn sharply when passing traffic signs outside the camera's field of vision.
Setting Traffic Sign Assist
Requirements: R Only vehicles with Driving Assistance
Package: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and ECO Assist must be activated for the automatic adoption of speed limits.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist
Activating or deactivating automatic adop- tion of speed limits (only vehicles with Driv- ing Assistance Package) # Select Adopt limit. # Switch the function on or off.
The speed limits detected by Traffic Sign Assist are automatically adopted by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. % If one of the following systems is activated, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R Cruise control R Variable limiter
Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: (/ page 201).
Displaying detected traffic signs in the media display # Select Display in head unit. # Switch the function on or off.
Setting the type of warning # Select Visual & audible, Visual or Off.
Setting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. # Select Warning threshold. # Set the desired speed.
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning
Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor the area up to 40 m behind and 3 m next to your vehicle. If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx- imately 12 km/h and this vehicle subsequently enters the monitoring range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red. Permanent status display in the instrument clus- ter: R ¸ (grey): system is activated but inopera-
tive R ¸ (green): system is activated and opera-
tional
If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the cor- responding direction, a double warning tone sounds and the red warning lamp in the outside
mirror flashes. If the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of the red warning lamp. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist
Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed. Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation. # Always pay careful attention to the traf-
fic situation and maintain a safe dis- tance at the side of the vehicle.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog- nise dangers (/ page 185). Exit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occu-
Driving and parking 217
pants about approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle when stationary.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning
The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. # Always pay particular attention to the
traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clear- ance.
If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant opens the door on the side with the warning, a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in the outside mirror starts to flash. This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is active. When the exit warn- ing is activated, it can warn vehicle occupants for up to three minutes after switching the igni-
218 Driving and parking
tion off. The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes three times. The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi- tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi- cle occupants.
System limits Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations, in par- ticular: R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured R in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow R if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or
motorbikes R if the road has very wide or narrow lanes R if vehicles are not driving in the middle of
their lane
Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is suffi- cient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. Warnings may be interrupted when driving along- side long vehicles, for example lorries, for a pro- longed time. Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist and the exit warning are not operational when a trailer is coupled to the vehi- cle and the electrical connection has been cor- rectly established. The exit warning may be limited in the following situations: R when the sensors are covered by adjacent
vehicles in narrow parking spaces R when people approach the vehicle R in the event of stationary or slowly moving
objects
Function of brake application (Active Blind Spot Assist) If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor- recting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is availa- ble in the speed range between approximately 30 km/h and 200 km/h.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist
A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. # Always steer, brake or accelerate your-
self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a coursecorrecting brake application. # Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.
If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir- ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a dis- play 1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappro- priate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.
System limits Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist; you may otherwise not recognise the dangers (/ page 217).
Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur in the following situations: R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are
located on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds. R You brake or accelerate significantly. R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®
or Active Brake Assist. R ESP® is deactivated. R A loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is
detected. R You are driving with a trailer and the electri-
cal connection to the trailer hitch has been correctly established.
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
# Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist.
Driving and parking 219
or # Activate or deactivate Act. Blind Spot Assist.
Active Lane Keeping Assist Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunc- tion camera (/ page 185). It serves to protect you against unintentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned by vibration pulses in the steering wheel and guided by a course-correct- ing brake application back into your lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane.
220 Driving and parking
The status of Active Lane Keeping Assist is dis- played in the on-board computer: R Ã (green): Active Lane Keeping Assist is
active and operating. R Ã (grey): Active Lane Keeping Assist is
active but not operating. R ·: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactiva-
ted or there is a malfunction.
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis- play 1 appears in the multifunction display. The system does not apply the brake if you acti- vate the turn signal indicator.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: if the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, it will apply the brake regardless of the turn signal indicator. You are warned by vibrations in the steering wheel in the following circumstances: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane
marking. R A front wheel drives over this lane marking.
Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles without Driving Assis- tance Package) Depending on the setting, a course-correcting brake application occurs in the following situa- tions (/ page 222). % The availability of this setting is dependent
on the country. If the function is activated in countries in which this setting is not availa- ble, a lane-correcting brake application is ini- tiated in the following situations: Lane markings were detected on both sides of the lane. The front wheel drives over a continuous lane marking.
Standard setting R A lane marking and the edge of a firm road
surface were detected. The front wheel drives over a lane marking on the edge of the firm road surface. R A lane marking and an oncoming vehicle were detected. The front wheel drives over the lane marking.
Sensitive setting R All situations described under the Standard
setting. R A continuous lane marking was detected and
driven over with the front wheel.
% A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.
Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) Depending on the setting, a course-correcting brake application occurs in the following situa- tions (/ page 222).
% The availability of this setting is dependent on the country. If the function is activated in countries in which this setting is not availa- ble, a lane-correcting brake application is ini- tiated in all situations described under Sensitive.
Standard setting R A lane marking and an approaching vehicle,
an overtaking vehicle or vehicles driving par- allel to your vehicle were detected in the adjacent lane. The front wheel drives over the lane marking.
Sensitive setting R The situations described under the Standard
setting. R A continuous lane marking was detected and
driven over with the front wheel.
% A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.
System limits No lane-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations: R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-
erate. R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as
ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of accel- eration. R When ESP® is deactivated. R When driving with a trailer, the electrical con- nection to the trailer has been correctly established. R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected and displayed.
If you deactivate the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning and the lane markings cannot be clearly detected, it is possible that no lane-correcting brake application takes place (/ page 222).
Driving and parking 221
The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-
cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections. R If the windscreen in the area of the multi- function camera is dirty, or if the camera is misted up, damaged or covered. R If there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks. R If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov- ered. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge.
222 Driving and parking
R If the carriageway is very narrow and wind- ing.
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack- age: if the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered in snow and an obstacle is detected in your lane, no lane-correcting brake application takes place.
Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist # Activate or deactivate the function. Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist
Setting the sensitivity % The availability of this function is dependent
on the country. # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.
Activating or deactivating the haptic warning # Select Warning.
Activate or deactivate the function.
Function of adaptive damping adjustment Suspension with adaptive damping adjustment continuously adjusts the characteristics of the suspension dampers to the current operating and driving conditions. The damping is set individually for each wheel and is affected by the following factors: R the road surface conditions R vehicle load R the drive program selected R the driving style
The drive program can be adjusted using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
Reversing camera
Function of the reversing camera If you have activated the function in the multime- dia system (/ page 228), the image from the reversing camera is shown in the media display when the reverse gear is engaged. Dynamic guide lines show the path the vehicle will take with the current steering angle. This helps you to orient yourself and to avoid obstacles when reversing. The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and park- ing. % You can open the cover of the reversing
camera manually (/ page 228). The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances dis- played only apply to road level.
Driving and parking 223
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select from the following views: R Normal view R Wide-angle view R Trailer view
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.
Vehicles without Parking Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:
Normal view 1 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur-
face) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic) 2 Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 1.0 m from the rear area 3 Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle (dynamic) 4 Bumper 5 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
Wide-angle view Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch)
1 Yellow guide line, locating aid
224 Driving and parking
2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
3 Ball head of the trailer hitch Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:
Normal view 1 Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres
will take with the current steering angle (dynamic) 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur- face) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
4 Yellow warning indicator of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance between approximately 0.6 m and 1.0 m
5 Red warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close (approximately 0.3 m or less)
6 Orange warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis- tance away (between approximately 0.3 m and 0.6 m)
Wide-angle view
Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch System failure If the reversing camera is not operational, the following display appears in the multimedia sys- tem.
System limits The reversing camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R The tailgate is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. R Cameras, or vehicle components in which
the cameras are fitted, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 185).
% Do not use the reversing camera in these types of situations. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.
% The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.
% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.
360° Camera
Function of the 360° Camera The 360° Camera is a system that consists of four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate vehicle surroundings. The system assists you when you are parking or at exits with reduced visibility, for example. The views of the 360° Camera are always availa- ble when driving forwards up to a speed of approx. 16 km/h and when reversing. The 360° Camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incor- rectly or not show them at all. It is not a substi- tute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeu- vring area while manoeuvring and parking. The system evaluates images from the following cameras: R Reversing camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors
Driving and parking 225 % You can open the cover of the reversing
camera manually (/ page 228). Views of the 360° Camera You can select from different views:
1 Wide-angle view, front 2 Top view with image from the front camera 3 Top view with images from the side cameras
in the outside mirrors 4 Wide-angle view, rear 5 Top view with image from the reversing cam-
era 6 Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a
trailer hitch)
226 Driving and parking Top view
1 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering wheel angle
2 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
3 Your vehicle from above The colour of the individual segments of warning display 2 is based on the distance to the detec- ted obstacle: R Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance
between approx. 0.6 m and 1.0 m R Orange segments: obstacles at a distance
between approx. 0.3 m and 0.6 m
R Red segments: obstacles at a very short distance of approx. 0.3 m or less
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the segments of the warning display are shown in grey. Guide lines
1 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur- face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
4 Mark at a distance of approx. 1.0 m % When Active Parking Assist is active, lane
markings 1 are displayed in green. The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances apply to road level. In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer hitch. Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) If you select trailer view and no trailer is coupled to the vehicle, the following display appears:
Driving and parking 227
1 Yellow guide line, locating aid 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch
When the electrical connection is established between the vehicle and the trailer, the display changes to the side camera view. This view supports manoeuvring procedures with a trailer. Side view of the mirror cameras The sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view.
1 Guide line of external vehicle dimensions with outside mirrors folded out
2 Marker of the wheel contact points System failure If the system is not ready for operation, the fol- lowing message appears in the media display:
System limits The 360° Camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R The doors are open. R the outside mirrors are folded in. R The tailgate is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. R Cameras, or vehicle components in which
the cameras are fitted, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 185).
% Do not use the 360° Camera under such cir- cumstances. You could otherwise injure oth- ers or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.
For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a
228 Driving and parking
heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images. % The contrast of the display may be impaired
by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera (/ page 310).
Calling up the view of the 360° Camera using reverse gear
Requirements: R The Auto reversing camera function is activa-
ted in the multimedia system (/ page 228).
# Engage reverse gear. # Select the desired view in the multimedia
system (/ page 225). # If, after shifting to reverse gear, the image of
the reversing camera is not shown: switch off
the ignition, press and hold the c button, switch on the ignition and engage reverse gear again.
Switching reversing camera automatic mode on/off The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. Pay attention to your sur- roundings and be ready to brake at all times. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & parking # Switch Auto reversing camera on or off.
Opening the camera cover of the reversing camera Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & parking # Select Open camera cover.
% The camera cover closes automatically after some time or after an ignition cycle.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using mul- tiple sensors on the front bumper and on the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC shows you the distance between your vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur- roundings. The responsibility for safe manoeu- vring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking in/exiting parking spaces. In the standard setting, an intermittent warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.3 m to an obstacle in front and approximately 1.0 m to an obstacle behind. A continuous warn- ing tone sounds from a distance of approx-
imately 0.2 m. Using the Warn early all-round setting in the multimedia system, the warning tones for front and side impact protection can be set to sound at a greater distance of approx- imately 1.0 m in front and 0.6 m on the sides (/ page 233). % The Warn early all-round setting is always
active in the rear of the vehicle. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the multimedia system
Vehicles without 360° Camera
Driving and parking 229
R Red segments: obstacles at a very short distance of approx. 0.3 m or less
Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC in the head-up display
Vehicles with 360° Camera
If you have not selected the Camera & parking menu and an obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a pop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 1 appears in the multimedia sys- tem at speeds below 10 km/h. The colour of the individual segments of the warning display is based on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance
between approx. 0.6 m and 1.0 m R Orange segments: obstacles at a distance
between approx. 0.3 m and 0.6 m
Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 1.0 m in front 2 and 0.6 m on the sides 3 can also be displayed in the head-up display.
System limits Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa- rily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g.
persons, animals or objects.
230 Driving and parking R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g.
overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of lorries. The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (/ page 185). Vehicles with trailer hitch: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Example: vehicles with 360° Camera
When rear segments 1 or all-round segments 2 light up red and the é symbol appears in the multifunction display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location. If a warning tone also sounds for approximately two seconds every time the vehicle is started, it may be due to one of the following causes: R The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors
and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 310). R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Function of the passive side impact protec- tion Passive side impact protection is an additional Parking Assist PARKTRONIC function which warns the driver about obstacles at the side of the vehicle. A warning is issued when obstacles are detected between the front and rear detec-
tion range. In order for an object on the side to be detected, the sensors in the front and rear bumper must first detect the object while you are driving past it. During the parking procedure or manoeuvring, objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of a detected obsta- cle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued and the segments light up in colour in the display. The segment colour changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Yellow: approximately 30 - 60 cm R Red: less than approximately 30 cm
In order for lateral front or rear segments to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance of at least half of the vehicle length. Once the vehicle has travelled the length of the vehicle, all of the lateral front and rear segments can be dis- played.
Driving and parking 231
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles without a 360° Camera 1 Operational front and rear 2 Operational front, rear and sides 3 Obstacle detected at the front right (yellow) and rear (red)
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles with a 360° Camera 1 Operational front and rear 2 Operational front, rear and sides 3 Obstacles detected at the front right (red)
Saved obstacles on the sides are deleted in the following situations, for example: R You park the vehicle and switch off the igni-
tion. R You open the doors.
After the engine is restarted, obstacles on the sides must be detected again before a new warning can be issued.
System limits The system limits for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC apply to passive side impact pro- tection. The following objects are not detected, for exam- ple: R Pedestrians who approach the vehicle from
the side R Objects placed next to the vehicle
Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or manoeuvring the vehi-
cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flowerpots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could oth- erwise be damaged.
232 Driving and parking
# Vehicles without AIR BODY CONTROL: press the é button in the centre console.
% Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: you can activate or deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC in the multimedia system (/ page 232).
If the indicator lamp in the é button is not lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indi- cator lamp is lit or the é symbol appears in the instrument cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically
activated when the vehicle is started. Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC using the multimedia system
* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or manoeuvring the vehi-
cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the
sensors, e.g. flowerpots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could oth- erwise be damaged.
Requirements: R The camera menu is open. R Or: Active Parking Assist is active. R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window
appears.
# Tap = in the media display.
If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is not lit or the é symbol appears in the instru- ment cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically
activated when the engine is started.
Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC using the multimedia system
* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or manoeuvring the vehi-
cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flowerpots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could oth- erwise be damaged.
Requirements: R The camera menu is open. R Or: Active Parking Assist is active. R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window
appears. # Tap = in the media display. If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is not lit or the é symbol appears in the instru-
Driving and parking 233
ment cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically
activated when the engine is started. Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu.
Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & parking
Adjusting the volume of the warning tones # Select Warning tone volume. # Set a value.
Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones # Select Warning tone pitch. # Set a value.
Specifying the starting point for the warning tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obsta- cle. # Select Warn early all-round. # Switch the function on or off. Activating/deactivating audio fadeout You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system is to be reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds a warning tone. # Select Audio fadeout during warning tones. # Switch the function on or off.
Active Parking Assist Function of Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses ultrasound with the assistance of the reversing camera and 360° Camera. When you are driving forwards up to approximately 35 km/h, the system automati-
cally measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist offers the following func- tions: R Country-dependent: parking in parking
spaces parallel to the road R Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to
the road (optionally either forwards or reverse) R Exiting parking spaces if you have parked using Active Parking Assist
As soon as all requirements are met for search- ing for parking spaces, the Ç display appears in the multifunction display. When Active Parking Assist has detected parking spaces, the È display appears in the multi- function display. The arrows show on which side of the road detected parking spaces are located. They are then shown in the media display. The parking space can be selected as desired. Depending on the location of the parking space, the parking direction (rearwards or forwards) can also be selected as desired.
234 Driving and parking
When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the cal- culated path of your vehicle. When you are entering or exiting a parking space, the procedure is assisted by acceleration, braking, steering and gear changes. Vehicles with manual transmission: the active brake application and automatic gear change are only available on vehicles with automatic trans- mission. You must therefore brake the vehicle and change gear yourself when parking or exit- ing a parking space. Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. Active Parking Assist will be cancelled in the fol- lowing situations: R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. R You begin steering. R You apply the parking brake.
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: you engage transmission position j.
R ESP® intervenes. R You open the doors or the tailgate while driv-
ing.
System limits If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist is not available. Objects located above or below the detection range of the sensors, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of goods vehicles, or the borders of parking spaces, are not detected during measurement of the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calcu- lating the parking procedure. In some circum- stances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space incorrectly.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist
If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise: R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects.
This could cause a collision. # In these situations, do not use Active
Parking Assist.
Extreme weather conditions, such as snow or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground.
Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations: R In extreme weather conditions such as ice,
packed snow or in heavy rain. R When transporting a load that protrudes
beyond the vehicle. R On steep uphill or downhill gradients of more
than approximately 15%. R When snow chains are fitted. R When a trailer or bicycle rack is attached. R Directly after a tyre change or when spare
tyres are fitted. R If the tyre pressure is too low or too high. R If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g.
after bottoming out on a kerb.
Active Parking Assist may also display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, such as: R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited. R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.
Parking with Active Parking Assist % Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
button may also be located at a different position in the centre console.
# Press button 1.
Driving and parking 235
The media display shows the view of Active Park- ing Assist. Area 2 displays detected parking spaces 4 and vehicle path 3. % Vehicle path 3 shown on the media display
may differ from the actual vehicle path. # If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehi-
cle. # Select desired parking space 4 and con-
firm. # If necessary, select the parking direction (for-
wards or reverse), and confirm. Vehicle path 3 is shown, depending on selected parking space 4 and the parking direction.
236 Driving and parking
% The turn signal indicator is switched on auto- matically when the parking procedure begins.
You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic condi- tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica- tor accordingly.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi- cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road
users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.
# If, for example, the Please engage reverse gear message appears in the media display:
select the corresponding transmission posi- tion. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the vehicle drives into the selected parking space.
% During the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist, the lane markings are dis- played in green in the camera image.
# Vehicles with manual transmission: stop as soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. Depending on the message or as required, engage forward or reverse gear.
On completion of the parking procedure, the Ø Parking Assist finished, take control of vehicle display message appears. Further manoeuvring may still be necessary. # After completion of the parking procedure,
safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb. % You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking pro-
cedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is availa- ble, the system can change the transmission position again or cancel the parking proce- dure.
Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist
Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked with Active
Parking Assist.
% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the button may also be located at a different position in the centre console.
Please note that you are responsible for the vehi- cle and surroundings during the entire parking procedure. # Start the vehicle.
# Press button 1. The media display shows the view of Active Parking Assist.
Driving and parking 237
# If the vehicle has been parked perpendicular to the direction of travel: in area 2, select direction of travel 3 Left or Right.
% The vehicle path shown on the media display may differ from the actual vehicle path.
# Confirm direction of exit 3 to drive out of the parking space.
% The turn signal indicator is switched on auto- matically when the exiting procedure begins.
You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic condi- tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica- tor accordingly.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi- cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road
users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.
# If, for example, the Please engage forward gear message appears in the media display: select the corresponding transmission posi- tion. The vehicle moves out of the parking space. The turn signal indicator is switched off auto- matically.
After the parking space has been exited, a warn- ing tone and the Ø Parking Assist finished,
238 Driving and parking
take control of vehicle message prompt you to take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not automatically braked and can roll away. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself again.
Manoeuvring assistant Function of Drive Away Assist % Drive Away Assist is only available for vehi-
cles with automatic transmission. Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approx. 2 km/h. If a critical situation is detected, the É symbol appears in the media display. Drive Away Assist can be deactivated or activa- ted in the Manoeuvring assistance menu (/ page 239). % You can cancel an intervention by Drive
Away Assist at any time by deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 232).
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist
Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden- tify objects and traffic situations. # Always pay careful attention to the traf-
fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec- essary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take eva- sive action.
Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub- stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. A risk of collision may occur in the following sit- uations, for example: R If the accelerator and brake pedals are inter-
changed.
R If an incorrect transmission position is engaged.
Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions: R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated. R If you shift the transmission position to k or
h when the vehicle is stationary. R If the detected obstacle is less than approx.
1.0 m away. R If the manoeuvring assistance function is
activated in the multimedia system.
System limits The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited on inclines. When driving with a trailer, Drive Away Assist is not available. % Also observe the system limits of Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 228).
Function of Cross Traffic Alert % Cross Traffic Alert is only available for vehi-
cles with Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist.
Cross Traffic Alert can warn drivers of any cross- ing traffic when reversing and manoeuvring out of a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation is detected, the L symbol appears in the media display and the vehicle can be braked automatically. If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible. Cross Traffic Alert is active under the following conditions: R if the vehicle is reversing at a walking pace. R manoeuvring assistance is activated
(/ page 239).
% Also observe the instructions on Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 217).
System limits Cross Traffic Alert is not available on inclines. Cross Traffic Alert is not available when driving with a trailer.
Activating/deactivating manoeuvring assis- tant Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & parking # Activate/deactivate Manoeuvring assistance. % Manoeuvring assistant must be active for the
function of Drive Away Assist (/ page 238) and Cross Traffic Alert (/ page 238).
Trailer hitch Notes on trailer operation
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
* NOTE Plug-in hybrid # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
Driving and parking 239
Observe the following notes on the tongue weight: R Do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or
falls below the permissible tongue weight R Use a tongue weight as close as possible to
the maximum tongue weight
Do not exceed the following values: R Permissible towing capacity R Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehi-
cle R Permissible gross weight of the towing vehi-
cle R Permissible gross weight of the trailer R Maximum permissible speed of the trailer
Ensure the following before starting a journey: R The tyre pressure on the rear axle of the tow-
ing vehicle is set for a maximum load R The lighting of the connected trailer is opera-
tional
240 Driving and parking
R Vehicles without LED headlamps or MUL- TIBEAM LED headlamps: the headlamps have been set correctly
In the event of increased rear axle load, the car/ trailer combination must not exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for car/trailer combinations is above 100 km/h.
Folding the ball neck out and in
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged
If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose. # Always engage the ball neck as descri-
bed.
& WARNING Risk of injury from ball neck swinging outwards
The ball neck may swing outwards when unlocking or when it has not been properly engaged. There is a risk of injury within the ball neck's range of movement! # Unlock the ball neck only when its
range of movement is unobstructed. # Always be sure the ball neck is engaged
when folding inwards.
* NOTE Increased risk of damage to prop- erty due to folded-out ball neck
# When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the trailer hitch
When a trailer hitch is used to recover a vehi- cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc- ess. # Use the trailer hitch only for pulling a
trailer or attaching approved carrier systems (e.g. a bicycle rack).
Requirements: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R The swivel range is clear. R The trailer cables or adapter plugs have been
removed.
Folding the ball neck out
# Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks. The ball neck will fold out from under the rear bumper. Indicator lamp 1 will flash.
# Pull the ball neck in the direction of the arrow until it engages audibly in a vertical position. Indicator lamp 1 on the ball neck release switch will go out. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the Trailer coupling Check lockmes- sage will appear on the multifunction display.
Driving and parking 241
# Remove the cover cap from the ball head and store it in a safe place.
Make sure that the ball on the ball neck is clean. Check that it is either greased or dry (greasefree), depending on the instructions for the trailer.
Folding the ball neck in # Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks.
The ball neck will fold up under the rear bumper. Indicator lamp 1 will flash. # Push the ball neck in the direction of the arrow until it engages audibly behind the bumper. Indicator lamp 1 will go out and the mes- sage on the multifunction display will disap- pear. Observe the information about the displays on the instrument cluster: R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 432) R Display messages (/ page 376)
242 Driving and parking
Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer
Requirements: R The ball neck is extended and engaged in a
securely locked position.
Trailers with a 7-pin plug can be connected to the vehicle with the following adapters: R Adapter plug R Adapter cable
The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehi- cle only if the following conditions are met: R The trailer is connected correctly. R The trailer lighting system is in working
order.
The functions of the following systems will be affected by a correctly connected trailer: R ESP® trailer stabilisation R Active Lane Keeping Assist R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC R Active Parking Assist R Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist
R Drive Away Assist R Cross Traffic Alert R Reversing camera R 360° Camera Coupling up a trailer
* NOTE Damage to the starter battery due to full discharge
Charging the trailer battery using the power supply of the trailer can damage the starter battery. # Do not use the vehicle's power supply
to charge the trailer battery.
# Remove the cover cap from the ball head and store it in a safe place.
# Position the trailer on a level surface behind the vehicle and couple it up to the vehicle.
# Open the socket cap. # Insert the plug with lug 1 in groove 3 on
the socket. # Turn bayonet coupling 2 to the right as far
as it will go. # Let the cap engage. # Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties
(only if you are using an adapter cable). # Make sure that the cable is always slack for
ease of movement during cornering.
Under the following conditions, a message may appear on the multifunction display even if the trailer has been connected correctly: R LEDs have been installed in the trailer light-
ing system. R The current has fallen below the trailer light-
ing system's minimum current (50 mA).
% Accessories can be connected to the perma- nent power supply up to 180 W and to the power supply that is switched on via the igni- tion lock.
Uncoupling a trailer
& WARNING Risk of being crushed and becoming trapped when uncoupling a trailer
When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged inertia-activated brake, your hand may become trapped between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. # Do not uncouple trailers with an
engaged overrun brake.
* NOTE Damage when uncoupling in a state of overrun
Uncoupling in a state of overrun can damage the vehicle. # Do not uncouple trailers with an
engaged overrun brake.
# Secure the trailer against rolling away. # Disconnect the electrical connection
between the vehicle and the trailer. # Uncouple the trailer. # Place the cover cap on the ball head.
Bicycle rack function
& WARNING Risk of an accident when using the bicycle rack incorrectly
The bicycle rack may become detached from the vehicle in the following cases: R the permissible load capacity of the
trailer hitch is exceeded.
Driving and parking 243
R the bicycle rack is used incorrectly. R the bicycle rack is secured to the ball
neck beneath the ball head. Observe the following for your own safety and that of other road users: # always adhere to the permissible load
capacity of the trailer hitch. # only use the bicycle rack to transport
bicycles. # always properly secure the bicycle rack
by attaching it to the ball head. # only use bicycle racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz. # always observe the bicycle rack operat-
ing instructions.
* NOTE Damage to, or cracks on, the trailer hitch due to unsuitable bicycle racks or bicycle racks being used incor- rectly
# use only bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz.
244 Driving and parking
* NOTE Increased risk of damage to prop- erty due to folded-out ball neck
# When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.
Depending on the bicycle rack's design, up to three bicycles can be transported on the bicycle rack. When mounted by attaching to ball head 1, the maximum load capacity is 75 kg. The maximum load capacity is calculated from the weight of the bicycle rack and the bicycle rack load. Observe the notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle (/ page 157). When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure for increased load on the rear axle of the vehicle. Further information on the tyre pressure can be found in the tyre pressure table (/ page 339).
Notes on loading The larger the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the ball head, the greater the load on the trailer hitch. Therefore, observe the following notes: R mount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle
as possible
R always distribute the load on the bicycle rack as evenly as possible across the vehicle's longitudinal axis
Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all detachable parts from bicycles (e.g. baskets, child seats, rechargeable batteries) before load- ing them onto the bicycle rack. This will improve the aerodynamic resistance and centre of gravity of the bicycle rack. Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from moving around and check them at regular inter- vals to ensure that they are secure. Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The driv- ing characteristics and rear view may be impaired. In addition, aerodynamic resistance and the load on the trailer hitch will increase.
Loading the bicycle rack
Total weight of bicycle rack and load
Max. dis- tance 1
Up to 75 kg 420 mm
Max. dis- tance 2 300 mm
Load distribution on the bicycle rack 1 Vertical distance between centre of gravity
and ball head 2 Horizontal distance between centre of grav-
ity and ball head 3 The centre of gravity is on the vehicle's
centre axis Observe the following information when you are loading the bicycle rack with up to three bicy- cles:
Vehicle towing instructions The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can lead to damage on the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys- tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side. Comply with the per- mitted towing methods (/ page 327) and the instructions for towing with both axles on the ground (/ page 329).
Driving and parking 245
246 Instrument display and on-board computer
Notes on the instrument display and onboard computer
& WARNING Risk of accident due to an instrument display malfunction
If the instrument display has failed or mal- functioned, the function restrictions applying to safety relevant systems are not visible. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately
at a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor- mation systems and communications equipment
If you operate information and communica- tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
* NOTE Plug-in hybrid # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. The on-board computer shows only display mes- sages and warnings from specific systems on
the multifunction display. You must therefore ensure that your vehicle is always reliable. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and in accordance with the traffic conditions. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Instrument display overview
Instrument display and on-board computer 247
1 Display content on left (example: speedome- ter): speedometer / time / date / trip com- puter From start and From reset/ range / audio The segments on the speedometer indicate the status of the following systems: cruise control/limiter/Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
2 Outside temperature 3 Digital speedometer 4 Time 5 Display content on right (example: tachome-
ter): tachometer / average fuel consump- tion / ECO display / navigation / G-meter / assistant display
The fuel supply will be interrupted to protect the engine when the red mark on the rev counter (overrevving range) is reached. 6 Index points These show the selected display or menu content. 7 Coolant temperature display
248 Instrument display and on-board computer During normal operation, the coolant tem- perature display is permitted to rise to 120°C. Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical sys- tem: POWER and CHARGE display (electrical drive support and recuperation power of the electric motor)
8 Selected drive program 9 Selected transmission position A Multifunction display (example: standard dis-
play for trip): Assistance / Telephone / Navi- gation / Trip / Media / Radio / Styles and displays / Service B Fuel level, fuel filler flap location indicator, range
Overview of buttons on the steering wheel
£ LINGUATRONIC 5 ò To call up the home screen of the mul-
timedia system 6 Touch Control multimedia system 7 % Back button (multimedia system) 8 Brightness control to adjust the lighting in
the Instrument Display and in the control elements of the vehicle interior
Operating the on-board computer Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operat- ing the on-board computer.
1 P Back/Home button (press and hold), on-board computer
2 Touch Control, on-board computer 3 Control panel for cruise control/limiter or
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 4 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys-
tem (/ page 253)
The on-board computer is operated using the left-hand Touch Control and the left-hand back/ home button. When the on-board computer is being operated, different acoustic signals will sound as operating feedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reached or when you are scrolling through a list. The following menus are available: R Assistance R Telephone R Navigation R Trip R Radio R Media R Styles & display R Service
% You can find information about the possible settings and selections on the menus in the Digital Owner's Manual.
# To call up the menu bar: press the left-hand back button until the menu bar is displayed.
% Vehicles without Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the ò button to call up the menu bar of the on-board computer.
# To scroll on the menu bar: swipe left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.
# To call up a menu, submenu or possible settings on the menu, or confirm a selec- tion or setting: press the left-hand Touch Control.
# To scroll through displays or lists on the menu, or select display content, a func- tion, an entry or a display: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Con- trol.
# To exit a submenu: press the left-hand back button.
Selecting the head-up display # To switch on the head-up display: switch
on the head-up display via the multimedia system or activate it on the menu bar by
Instrument display and on-board computer 249
swiping upwards on the left-hand Touch Con- trol. The head-up display menu will be selected on the head-up display. # To switch to the head-up display: press the left-hand Touch Control or swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # To set the three display ranges of the head-up display: swipe upwards or down- wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Full-screen menus Vehicles with an instrument display in the widescreen cockpit: the following menus can be shown full-screen on the instrument display: R Assistance R Trip R Navigation
# On the corresponding menu, use the lefthand Touch Control to scroll to the end of the list.
# Press the left-hand Touch Control. The selected menu will be displayed fullscreen.
250 Instrument display and on-board computer
Overview of what is shown on the multi- function display Displays on the multifunction display u Active Parking Assist (/ page 235) é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated
(/ page 232, 231) h Cruise control (/ page 195) È Limiter (/ page 196) ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 198) ê Active Brake Assist (/ page 208) à Active Steering Assist (/ page 205) Ã Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 219) è ECO start/stop function (/ page 160) ë HOLD function (/ page 190) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 129)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (/ page 130) ð Maximum permissible speed exceeded (for certain countries only)
Vehicles with Speed Limit Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs (/ page 213). Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs (/ page 214).
Head-up display Function of the head-up display
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
The head-up display projects the following infor- mation into the driver's field of vision above the cockpit, for example: R The vehicle speed R Information from the navigation system R Information from the driving systems and
driving safety systems R Some warning messages
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, different content can be shown in the three areas of the head-up display (/ page 251). Display content
1 Navigation instructions 2 Current speed 3 Detected instructions and traffic signs 4 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise
control)
System limits The visibility of the displays will be affected by the following conditions: R Seat position R Image position setting R Light conditions R Wet road surface R Objects on the display cover R Polarisation in sunglasses
% In extreme sunlight, sections of the display may appear washed out. You can correct this by deactivating and reactivating the head-up display.
Setting the head-up display using the onboard computer
On-board computer: 4 HEAD-UP DISPLAY The following head-up display settings or dis- plays can be selected or shown: R Position
R Brightness R Messages R Assistance status R Telephone R Audio R LINGUATRONIC
# To select the Settings menu: swipe to the right on the left-hand Touch Control. The Settings menu 5 will be selected.
# To call up the Settings menu: press the left-hand Touch Control.
# To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
# To adjust the brightness: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.
Setting messages, assistance status, tele- phone, audio and LINGUATRONIC # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
The list of setting options will be displayed.
Instrument display and on-board computer 251 # Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
hand Touch Control and select a setting by pressing the left-hand Touch Control. Selecting what the head-up display shows
(Example) 1 Switching the head-up display on/off 2 Left display area
Navigation system Average consumption G-meter 3 Central display area Speedometer
252 Instrument display and on-board computer
Set speed in the driver assistance system, e.g. cruise control Warnings from driver assistance systems, e.g. distance warning 4 Right display area Traffic Sign Assist Assistant display 5 Configuring settings 6 Index points
Display areas 2 to 4 that are not required can be hidden. % In audio mode, the station name or track will
be shown temporarily when the audio source is being actively operated. In addition, the latest calls will be displayed when the tele- phone list on the instrument display is actively operated. # Swipe upwards or downwards on the lefthand Touch Control.
Switching the head-up display on/off via the multimedia system
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access # Select HUD.
The head-up-display is activated.
Overview and operation Notes on the MBUX multimedia system
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor- mation systems and communications equipment
If you operate information and communica- tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.
Overview of the MBUX multimedia system 1 Touch Control and control panel for the
MBUX multimedia system 2 Media display with touch functionality 3 Touchpad 4 Controller
Turn: adjusts the volume
MBUX multimedia system 253
Press briefly: switches the mute function on/off Press and hold: switches the MBUX multime- dia system or media display on or off 5 Buttons for navigation, radio/media and telephone 6 Buttons for vehicle functions/system set- tings and favourites/themes Further operating options: R Conducting a voice dialogue with LINGUA- TRONIC. R Operating functions contact-free with the MBUX Interior Assistant. % You can find further information about oper- ation as well as about applications and serv- ices in the Digital Owner's Manual. Anti-theft protection This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. More detailed informa- tion about anti-theft protection can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
254 MBUX multimedia system Home screen overview
1 Depending on the display, calls up the first three applications or the home screen
2 Calls up the profile 3 Calls up the global search 4 SOS NOT READY (only when the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call system is not available) 5 Mercedes me connect active
6 Transmission of vehicle position active 7 Signal strength of the mobile phone network,
network display, battery status of the mobile phone connected, time 8 Calls up the Notifications Center 9 Calls up an application using the symbol A Application and current information
B Quick-access, e.g. enter home address C Index points and selected display area D Calling up the air conditioning menu E Calls up SUGGESTIONS, THEMES and
FAVOURITES
% If Mercedes me connect 5 is active , the vehicle is linked with Mercedes me connect. Vehicle data is then transmitted to the backend system. What data is transmitted depends on which services are activated. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection information. The function is coun- try-dependent. If transmission of vehicle position 6 is active , Mercedes me connect services have been activated for this vehicle which access the vehicle's geoposition. In which instances the geoposition is transmitted depends on the particular services. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection informa- tion. The function is country-dependent.
Operating the MBUX multimedia system Using Touch Control
1 © Calls up the home screen 2 Touch Control 3 G Pressing briefly: returns to the previ-
ous display 4 ß Pressing the rocker switch down
briefly: shows favourites
MBUX multimedia system 255
ß Pressing the rocker switch down and holding: adds favourites and themes VOL: control adjusts the volume or switches the sound off 8 (press) 6 Pressing the rocker switch up: makes or accepts a call ~ Pressing the rocker switch down: rejects or ends a call
Navigation through the menus is carried out with Touch Control 2 with single-finger swipes. # To select a menu option: swipe and press. # To move the digital map: swipe in any
direction.
Using the touchscreen # Select menu options, symbols or characters
by pressing briefly. # To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left
or right. # To use handwriting to enter characters:
write the character with one finger on the touchscreen.
256 MBUX multimedia system
# To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.
# To call up the global menu: press and hold on the touchscreen until the OPTIONS menu appears.
% For more information on operation, please refer to the Digital Owner's Manual.
Using the touchpad
# To select a menu option: swipe and press. # To use handwriting recognition: write a
character on the touchpad. # To open or close the Notifications
Centre: swipe down or up with two fingers. # To zoom in and out of the map: move two
fingers together or apart.
Calling up applications using buttons
1 G Returns to the previous display 2 ~ Calls up the audio control menu
Swiping to the left of right: selects the previ- ous or next radio station/music track 3 © Calls up the home screen 4 Touchpad
1 y Calls up vehicle functions 2 z Calls up navigation 3 | Calls up radio or media 4 % Calls up the telephone
5 ß Press briefly: calls up favourites Press and hold: adds a favourite or theme
# Alternatively, tap © on the touchscreen. # Call up the application (/ page 254).
Functions of LINGUATRONIC
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor- mation systems and communications equipment
If you operate information and communica- tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
For your own safety, always observe the follow- ing points when operating mobile communica- tions equipment and especially your voice con- trol system: R Observe the legal requirements for the coun-
try in which you are driving. R If you use the voice control system in an
emergency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be unnecessarily delayed. R Familiarise yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey. With LINGUATRONIC, various applications in the MBUX multimedia system are operable using voice input. LINGUATRONIC is operational approximately thirty seconds after the ignition is switched on and is available for the driver's seat and front passenger seat. The following multimedia system applications can be operated: R Telephone R Text message and e-mail R Navigation
MBUX multimedia system 257 R Address book R Radio R Media R Vehicle functions Starting LINGUATRONIC
# Press rocker switch 1 up.
258 MBUX multimedia system
or # Say "Hello Mercedes".
Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant
& WARNING Risk of injury from the cam- era's laser radiation
This product uses a classification 1 laser sys- tem. If the housing is opened or damaged, laser radiation may damage your retina. # Do not open the housing. # Always have maintenance work and
repairs carried out by a qualified spe- cialist workshop.
This device is a class 1 laser product in accord- ance with DIN EN 60825-1:2014 The camera is located in the overhead control panel.
If the vehicle is fitted with the MBUX Interior Assistant, selected functions of the multimedia system can be operated contact-free. The MBUX Interior Assistant can differentiate between driver and front passenger interactions and detects specific hand positions (poses).
System limits, display messages and notes for rectification The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The camera in the overhead control panel
may heat up due to operating conditions. As a result the camera may switch off tempora- rily, particularly during longer periods of operation and at high outside temperatures. Do not touch or cover the camera and wait until the camera has cooled down and is available again.
R The camera is covered, dirty, misted up or scratched. Wait until the camera has cooled down before cleaning the camera lens. Clean the outside of the camera lens with a dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use microfi- bre cloths. Do not remove the cover when cleaning.
R Recognition can be impaired by reflective clothing, an adverse colour of clothing or by accessories, for example.
R Clothing being worn (hat, shawl, scarf) may be limiting the detection area of the camera. Keep the camera's field of vision clear.
R The camera is not operational. Consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
The MBUX Interior Assistant supports the following interactions:
Interaction area
Interaction
In front of the media display or Proximity to the control element above the touchpad
Above the centre console
Defined pose
Below the inside rearview mirror Brief up and down movements
Above the front passenger seat Stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat
MBUX multimedia system 259
Description The Interior Assistant recognises the approach of the hand towards a con- trol element. Depending on the active application, the display will be adjusted in the media display. Some functions differentiate between driver and front passenger. No specific hand position is required. A favourite is called up with a defined pose. With brief vertical up and down movements below the inside rearview mir- ror the reading light for the driver or the front passenger is switched on and off. By stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat the search light is switched on. If you withdraw a hand from this area, the search light is switched off again.
260 MBUX multimedia system
Switching the reading light and search light and on or off
Requirements: R For the reading light: the function is availa-
ble when it is dark. R The hand movement takes place in the inter-
action area below the inside rearview mirror. R For the search light: the function is availa-
ble when it is dark. R The hand movement takes place in the inter-
action area above the front passenger seat. R The seat belt on the front passenger seat
must not be inserted in the seat belt buckle.
Switching the reading light on and off # Briefly move a hand up or down beneath the
inside rearview mirror. The reading light is switched on or off for the driver or the front passenger.
Switching the search light on and off
# To switch on: reach across the front passenger seat with a hand. The search light is switched on for the driver.
# To switch off: take a hand back away from the front passenger seat. The search light is switched off again.
Information on profiles, themes, suggestions and favourites For electrically adjustable seats observe the fol- lowing notes.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile
Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the posi- tion saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of
driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of move- ment.
If there is a risk of someone becoming trap- ped, stop the adjustment process immedi- ately: # a) Tap the warning message on the
media display. or
MBUX multimedia system 261
# b) Press a memory position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stop- ped.
The driver's seat is equipped with an access pre- venter. If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the driver's profile. Profiles store your vehicle settings and settings for the multimedia system. If the vehicle is used by several drivers, the driver can select their own profile without changing the stored profile settings of other drivers. % Information on profiles from Mercedes me
connect can be found in the Digital Opera- tor's Manual. Vehicle settings are, for example, driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings, climate con- trol and ambient lighting. For the settings of the multimedia system, you can select, for example, radio stations, previous destinations as well as themes, suggestions and favourites.
For recurring driving situations, such as long drives on the motorway, you can save your pre- ferred settings in a theme in the vehicle. In a theme you can save the display of the digital map, your preferred radio station and preferred drive program, for example. The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then offers suggestions for the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations or contacts. The pre-requirements for that are the selection of a profile, your consent to the recording of data and sufficient collected data. Favourites provide quick access to applications that are used often. You can select favourites from categories or add them directly to an appli- cation.
262 MBUX multimedia system
Configuring profiles, themes and sugges- tions
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 f Profiles
Creating a new profile # Select W Create profile . # Select an avatar. # Enter the name and confirm with a. # Select Continue r . # Select Current settings. # Select Save. # Activate Bluetooth® and select Connect
phone, to connect a mobile phone with the user profile . # Select Finished.
Selecting profile options # Select Ä for a profile.
The following functions are available: R Editing, resetting or deleting a profile R Resetting themes or favourites
R Configuring suggestions
Configuring suggestions # Select Ä for a profile. # Select Suggestions settings. # Switch Allow destination suggestions, Allow
music suggestions and Allow contact suggestions on or off. # To deactivate the learning function for one day: activate Deact. learn. for 24h. For 24 hours no new actions will be trained and no data recorded for the active profile. Suggestions will continue to be shown. Example: if the option is switched on and a route to a new destination has been calcula- ted, this destination would not be taken into account for the learning function.
Creating new themes # Select ©. # Select THEMES. # Select W Set theme.
The settings which are saved in the theme are shown.
# Select Continue r. # Select Audio and Navigation (Navigation) and
store the active settings in the theme. # Select Continue r. # Select an entry screen. # Select Continue r. # Select an image. # Enter the names into the entry field and con-
firm with a. # Select Save.
System settings Overview of the system settings menu
In the system settings menu, you can make set- tings in the following menus and control ele- ments: R Display
- Styles - Instrument lighting - Display brightness
- Edge lighting - Day/night design R Control elements - Keyboard language and handwriting rec-
ognition - Sensitivity of the touchpad - Sensitivity of the Touch Controls R LINGUATRONIC R Sound - Entertainment - Navigation and traffic announcements - Telephone - Voice amplification to the rear R Connectivity
- Wi-Fi, Bluetooth®, NFC R Time & date R Language R Units for distance R Software updates R Data import/export
MBUX multimedia system 263
R PIN protection R System Reset
Information on important system updates
Important system updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. A system update consists of three steps: R Downloading or copying of the data required
for installation R Installation of the downloaded system update R Activation of the downloaded system update
by restarting the system
% If automatic software updates are activated, the system updates will be downloaded auto- matically.
The multimedia system provides a message when a system update is available. You have the following selection options: R Accept and install
The system update will be downloaded in the background. R Information Information about the pending system update is displayed. R Later The system update can be downloaded man- ually at a later time.
Deep system updates Deep system updates access vehicle or system settings and can therefore only be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off. If the download of a deep system update is com- pleted and the downloaded system update is ready for installation, you will be informed of this after the next ignition cycle, for example. % Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location
before starting the installation. Requirements for the installation: R The ignition is switched off.
264 MBUX multimedia system
R Notes and warnings have been read and accepted.
R The electric parking brake is applied. If all requirements have been fulfilled, the down- loaded system update is installed. The multime- dia system cannot be operated while the down- loaded system update is being installed and vehicle functions are restricted. If errors should occur during the installation, the multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If restoration of the previous version is not possible, a symbol appears on the media display. Consult a quali- fied specialist workshop to resolve the problem.
Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot Requirements: R To set up the Wi-Fi connection of the mul-
timedia system with external hotspots: there is no communication module installed. R The device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connection described.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth
Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi # Select Wi-Fi.
Connecting the multimedia system with an external hotspot using Wi-Fi The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. % The connection procedure may differ
depending on the device. Follow the instruc- tions that are shown in the display. Further information can be found in the manufactur- er's operating instructions. # Select Internet settings. # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select Add hotspot.
Connecting using a QR code # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network.
# Select Connect using a QR code. # Scan the displayed QR code with the device
to be connected. The Wi-Fi connection is established.
Connecting using a security key # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network. # Select Connect using security key. # Have the security key displayed on the device
to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Enter this security key on the multimedia sys- tem. # Confirm the entry with ¡.
Connecting using a WPS PIN # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network. # Select Connect using WPS PIN input.
The multimedia system generates an eightdigit PIN. # Enter this PIN on the device to be connected.
# Confirm the entry.
Connecting using a button # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network. # Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options
on the device to be connected (see the man- ufacturer's operating instructions). # Press the WPS button on the device to be connected. # Select Continue in the multimedia system.
Activating automatic connection # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network. # Activate Permanent Internet connection.
Connecting with a known Wi-Fi # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select a Wi-Fi network.
The connection is established again.
Configuring the multimedia system as a WiFi hotspot for external devices The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connec- tion established must be selected on the multi- media system and on the device to be connec- ted. # Select Vehicle hotspot. # Select Connect device to vehicle hotspot.
Connecting using WPS PIN generation # Select Connect using WPS PIN generation. # Enter the PIN shown in the media display on
the device to be connected and confirm.
Connecting using WPS PIN entry # Select Connect using WPS PIN input. # Enter the PIN that is shown on the external
device's display on the multimedia system.
Connecting using a button # Select Connect via WPS PBC.
MBUX multimedia system 265
# Press the push button on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
# Select Continue.
Connecting using a security key # Select Connect device to vehicle hotspot.
A security key is displayed. # Select the vehicle from the device to be con-
nected. The vehicle is displayed with the DIRECT-MBUX XXXXX network name. # Enter the security key which is shown in the media display on the device to be connected. # Confirm the entry.
Connecting using NFC # Select Connect via NFC. # Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions). # Hold the device to be connected at the vehi-
cle's NFC interface. # Select Finished.
The mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC.
266 MBUX multimedia system
Generating a new security key # Select Vehicle hotspot. # Select Generate security key.
A connection will be established with the newly created security key. # To save a security key: select Save. When a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab- lished, the new security key must be entered.
System language Notes on the system language This function allows you to determine the lan- guage for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language affects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all lan- guages. If a language is not available, the naviga- tion announcements will be in English.
Setting the system language Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 ® Language
# Set the language.
% If you are using Arabic map data, the text
information can also be shown in Arabic on
the navigation map. To do so, select
as
the language from the language list. Naviga-
tion announcements are then also made in
Arabic.
Resetting the multimedia system (reset func- tion)
& WARNING Risk of accidents due to fail- ure of multimedia display functions
While the multimedia system is being reset, its functions such as the reversing camera are not available. # Only reset the multimedia system when
the vehicle is stationary.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Reset Personal data is deleted, for example: R Station presets R Connected mobile phones R Individual user profiles
% The guest profile is reset when the settings are restored to the factory settings.
A prompt appears again asking whether you really wish to reset. # Select Yes.
The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. If you have set a PIN for your sys- tem, this will also be reset.
Navigation Notes on navigation Route guidance with augmented reality
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depic- tion or wrong interpretation of the dis- play
The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving. # Always keep an eye on the actual traffic
situation. # Avoid extended observation of the cam-
era image.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of addi- tional information
The additional information from the augmen- ted reality display is not a substitute for observing the actual driving situation.
# Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation when carrying out all driving manoeuvres.
Switching navigation on Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation (Navigation) # Alternatively: press the z button.
The map displays the current vehicle posi- tion. The navigation menu is shown. The navigation menu is hidden if route guid- ance is active. # To show: tap on the touchscreen. The menu is hidden automatically.
MBUX multimedia system 267
268 MBUX multimedia system Navigation overview
Example: digital map with navigation menu 1 Enters a POI or address and additional desti-
nation entry options 2 Cancels active route guidance 3 Repeats a navigation announcement and
switch navigation announcements on or off
4 ON ROUTE menu with Route overview, Alternative routes and Report traffic incident (Car-to-X) TRAFFIC menu with Traffic announcements, Area announcements and Live Traffic Subscription Info Display Route list
POSITION menu with Store position, Compass and Qibla 5 Quick access for Traffic, Parking and Motorway information as well as options for View, Announcements and Route via Advanced
Entering a destination Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to?
MBUX multimedia system 269
1 Country in which the vehicle is located 2 Entering a POI or address 3 List with additional destination entry options 4 Deletes an entry 5 a Confirms an entry
6 Switches to handwriting recognition 7 Enters a space 8 Switches to voice input 9 Sets the written language
A Switches to digits, special characters and symbols
B Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters # Enter the destination in 2. The entries can
be made in any order.
270 MBUX multimedia system
The following entries can be made, for example: R Town, street, house number R Street, town R Postcode R POI name or POI category, e.g. Parking R Contact name
# Select a search result in list 3. # Calculate the route (/ page 270). % You can find further information about desti-
nation entry, e.g. 3 word addresses, in the Digital Owner's Manual.
Changing country # Select the country indicator in 1. # Enter the country indicator. # Select the country in 3.
Using online search Destination entry uses online map services. If the on-board search finds no suitable destina- tions or if you change countries, the online search is available.
For the destination you can enter an address, a POI or a 3 word address. # Enter the destination in input line 2.
The search results are displayed. # Select the destination in the list.
The detailed view for the route is displayed. or # Select country indicator 1. # Select the provider for the online service
from the countries list. # Enter the destination in input line 2. # Select the destination in the list.
Calculating a route and using settings for route guidance
Requirements: R The destination has been entered. R The destination address is shown.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation
1 ¥ No route yet. ¦ A route has been mapped.
# Select ¥. The route to the destination is calculated. Route guidance begins.
or # Select ¦. # Select Set as intermediate dest..
The destination address is set as the next intermediate destination.
or # Select Start new route guidance.
The destination address is set as the new destination. The previous destination and the intermediate destinations are deleted. Route guidance to the new destination begins.
Selecting route settings # Select Z. # Select Advanced. # Select Route. # Select the route type. # Take traffic information into consideration
with Dynamic route guidance r. # Select route options with Avoid options. # Activate Suggest alternative route.
Alternative routes are calculated for every route. # Activate Activate commuter route. If the requirements are met, the multimedia system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. Route guidance begins without voice output.
Activating route guidance with augmented reality # During route guidance, tap on the camera
symbol on the media display. The camera image will be shown instead of the navigation map before a turning manoeu- vre and will show additional information. # To return to the navigation map: tap on the camera symbol again.
Displaying additional information in the cam- era image # Select Z. # Select Advanced. # Select Augmented Reality. # Activate Street names and House numbers.
During route guidance, street names and house numbers are shown in the camera image.
MBUX multimedia system 271
Using map functions
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation
Setting the map scale # To zoom in: tap twice quickly with one finger
on the media display. # To zoom out: tap with two fingers on the
media display.
Moving the map # Move one finger in any direction on the
touchscreen. # To reset the map to the current vehicle
position: press \ briefly.
Selecting map orientation # Tap repeatedly on the Ä compass symbol
on the map. The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D heading up to 2D north up.
Switching motorway information on/off # Select Z.
272 MBUX multimedia system
# Switch Motorway information on or off.
Using services
Requirements: R There is an Internet connection. R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have set up a user account in the
Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle is connected to a user account
and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service. Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me R The service is available and has been activa- ted. R The following requirements apply to the Park- ing service: - The navigation services option is availa-
ble, subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. - The parking service is within the scope of the navigation service.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation
Displaying the traffic situation with Live Traf- fic Information # Select Z. # Activate Traffic. # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map elements. # Switch on Traffic incidents, Free-flowing traf-
fic and Delay. If traffic information has been received, then traffic incidents such as roadworks, road blocks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warn- ing messages are displayed. The traffic delay is displayed for the current route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or longer are taken into consideration.
Displaying hazard warnings with Car-to-XCommunication If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display
depends on the settings for the Traffic and Traffic incidents options. # Set the options.
If Traffic is switched off and Traffic incidents is switched on, the symbols are shown on the prospective route.
Displaying weather information and other map contents # Select Z. # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map elements. # Scroll up and show the ONLINE MAP CON-
TENTS category. # Switch on a service, e.g. Weather.
Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover.
Parking service
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to not observing the maximum per- mitted access height
If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi- mum permitted access height for multistorey and underground car parks, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be dam- aged. Vehicle occupants may be injured. # Before entering a multi-storey car park
or underground car park, observe the signposted entrance height. # If the vehicle height is greater than the access height, do not enter.
* NOTE Before selecting the parking option
The data is based on information provided by the respective service provider. Mercedes Benz accepts no liability for the accuracy of the information provided relating to the multi-storey car park/parking area.
# Always observe the local Information and conditions.
% This service is not available in all countries. # Select Z and activate Parking. # Tap on j in the map. # Select a parking option.
The map shows the parking options in the vicinity. The following information is displayed (if available): R Destination address, distance from cur-
rent vehicle position and arrival time R Information on the multi-storey car
park/car park, for example: - Opening times - Parking charges - Current occupancy - Maximum parking time - Maximum access height
The maximum access height shown by the parking service does not
MBUX multimedia system 273
replace the need for observation of the actual circumstances. R Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, cards) R Details on parking tariffs R Number of available parking spaces R Payment method (e.g. at the parking machine) R Services/facilities at the parking option R Telephone number # Calculate the route (/ page 270).
Notes on the dashcam
* NOTE Before using the dashcam You are legally responsible for operation and use of the dashcam functions. The legal requirements relating to operation and use of the dashcam can vary depending on the country in which the dashcam is operated. Therefore, observe the legal requirements, in
274 MBUX multimedia system
particular the data protection regulations, in your country. For this reason, before using the dashcam inform yourself about the regulation details for the respective country. This function is not permitted in all countries. # Observe the country-specific regula-
tions.
Selecting a USB device for a video recording with the dashcam
Requirements: R At least one USB device is connected with
the multimedia system . Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam # Select the USB device. % When USB devices contain multiple parti-
tions, recorded video files are not always dis- played in the recording list.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use USB devices with one partition.
Starting or stopping video recording with the dashcam
Requirements: R A USB device is connected with the multime-
dia system . R The ignition is switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam # If several USB devices are connected with
the multimedia system, select a USB device (/ page 274). # Select the Individual recording or Loop recording recording mode. If Individual recording is selected and the memory is full the recording stops. If Loop recording has been selected, several short video files are recorded. When the memory limit is reached, the oldest video file
is deleted and recording is continued auto- matically. # To start: select Start recording. The length of the recording is shown. The Please do not remove the storage medium. message appears. The video file is stored on the USB device. # To end: select End recording .
A report may appear in the following cases: R For the Individual recording recording mode:
the memory is full or there are only a few minutes recording time available. The video recording stops or will be stopped immi- nently. Change the USB device or delete a video file. R If a video recording has started and a national border is detected, the National border crossed. Please observe the countryspecific regulations regarding video recording. message appears This function is not available in all countries. R The camera is not functional, the Camera unavailable message appears.
Have the camera checked in a MercedesBenz service centre.
Telephone Telephony Notes on telephony
& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper- ating integrated communication equip- ment while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equip- ment while the vehicle is in motion
Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As the driver, only operate mobile com-
munications devices when the vehicle is stationary. # As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.
MBUX multimedia system 275
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi- tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can-
not be thrown around in such situa- tions. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.
276 MBUX multimedia system
Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly: R Loading the vehicle (/ page 106) R Stowing and securing the mobile phone
(/ page 122) Bluetooth® connection: The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth® profile of the connected mobile phone. Full functionality is only available if the mobile phone supports both of the following Bluetooth® profiles: R PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)
- The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system.
R MAP (Message Access Profile) - The mobile phone message functions can be used on the multimedia system.
Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio functional- ity can by used with any mobile radio unit.
For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the man- ufacturer's operating instructions. Network connection: The following cases can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion: R You switch into a transmission/reception
station, in which no communication channel is free. R The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time
The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice® for improved speech quality. A require- ment for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice® . Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate.
Further information can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: https:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Telephone menu overview
MBUX multimedia system 277
1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
2 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode)
3 Battery status of the connected mobile phone
4 Signal strength of the mobile phone network 5 Options 6 Device manager 7 Messages 8 Numerical pad 9 Contact search
Telephony operating modes overview Depending on your equipment, the following tel- ephony operating modes are available: R A mobile phone is connected to the multime-
dia system via Bluetooth®.
278 MBUX multimedia system
R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone mode). - You can use all the functions of the multi- media system with the mobile phone in the foreground. - You can receive incoming calls and mes- sages with the mobile phone in the back- ground. You can interchange the mobile phone in the foreground and background.
Connecting a mobile phone
Requirements: R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc- tions). R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone
Searching for a mobile phone # Select í. # Select Connect new device.
Connecting a mobile phone Authorisation follows using secure simple pair- ing. # Select a mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If both codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone.
Functions in the telephony menu In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example: R Making calls, e.g.:
- R Accept a call - k End call - i Create conferen. call
- Accepting or rejecting a waiting call R Managing contacts, e.g.:
- Downloading mobile phone contacts - Managing the format of a contact's name - Saving a contact as a favourite R Receiving and sending messages, e.g.: - Using the read-aloud function - Dictating a new message
Mercedes me and apps Mercedes me connect
Information on Mercedes me connect % Mercedes me connect or individual
Mercedes me connect services are not avail- able in every country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these func- tions are available in your country. Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv- ices.
You can use the following services via the multi- media system and the overhead control panel, for example: R Accident and Breakdown Management (me
button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system) R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto- matic emergency call and SOS button)
The Mercedes me connect Accident and Break- down Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre are available to you around the clock. The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel (/ page 280). You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system (/ page 281). Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, first call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 288). Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me connect and other services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Further information about Mercedes me con- nect, the provided service scope and operation: https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/ baix/cars/connectme/en_GB/#emotions/ Startseite.html
Information on Mercedes me connect Acci- dent and Breakdown Management The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions: R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emer-
gency call system (/ page 288) If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre for- wards the call to Mercedes me connect Acci- dent and Breakdown Management. Forward- ing the call is however not possible in all countries.
MBUX multimedia system 279
R Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing away of the vehi- cle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre You may be charged for these services.
R Addition to the emergency guide after auto- matic accident or breakdown detection (/ page 281) In the event of a breakdown or accident, fur- ther vehicle data is sent which enables opti- mal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and the authorised service partner or breakdown assistance.
R Addition to the Mercedes me connect service Telediagnostics With the Telediagnostics function, specific wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are sub- ject to diagnostics. If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the
280 MBUX multimedia system
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary.
% These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone cover- age, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia sys- tem.
More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Data transferred during Mercedes me con- nect call services The data transferred during a Mercedes me con- nect call depends on: R The reason for initiation of the call R The service that is selected in the voice con-
trol system R The activated Mercedes me connect services
You can find out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me con- nect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account.
Mercedes me calls Making a call via the overhead control panel % Mercedes me calls are not possible in every
country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are availa- ble in your country.
1 me button for service or information calls 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button (emergency call system)
Making a Mercedes me call # Press me button 1.
Making an emergency call # To open the cover of SOS button 2 , press it
briefly. # Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least
one second.
If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls.
Information about the Mercedes me call using the me button A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre has been initiated via the me button in the over- head control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 280). Using the voice dialogue system you access the desired service: R Accident and Breakdown Management R Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for general
information about the vehicle
You can find information on the following topics: R Activation of Mercedes me connect R Operating the vehicle
R Nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre R Other products and services from Mercedes-
Benz
Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre (/ page 283).
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system
Requirements: R Access to a mobile phone network is availa-
ble. R The contract partner's mobile network cover-
age is available in the respective region. R The ignition must be switched on so that
vehicle data can be transferred automati- cally.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 g # Call Mercedes me connect.
After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the media display.
MBUX multimedia system 281
Then, you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre after automatic accident or breakdown detection
Requirements: R The vehicle has detected an accident or
breakdown situation. R The vehicle is stationary. R The hazard warning lights are switched on.
% This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances. In the event an accident or breakdown is detec- ted, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
282 MBUX multimedia system
# Select Call. R After your agreement, or if the Mercedes me connect service "Accident and Break- down Management" is active, the vehicle data is transferred automatically (/ page 279). R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre takes your call and organises the break- down and accident assistance.
You may be charged for these services. % Depending on the severity of the accident,
an automatic emergency call can be initi- ated. This has priority over all other active calls. % In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined. % If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre with
Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later. The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be confirmed or declined. After being declined, this will not be shown again.
Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call If you have activated the maintenance manage- ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. You will then receive individual recom- mendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multi- media system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment. # To arrange a service appointment: select
Call. After your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer
centre takes your preferred appointment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. This will contact you to confirm the appoint- ment and if necessary consult about the details. % If you select Later after the service message appears, the message is hidden and reap- pears at a later time.
Giving consent to data transfer during a Mercedes me call
Requirements: R There is an active Mercedes me call via the
multimedia system or the me button in the overhead control panel (/ page 280).
% The prompt to confirm data transfer does not appear in all countries.
If the Accident and Breakdown Management services are not activated on Mercedes me, the Do you want to transmit vehicle data and the vehicle's position to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre in order to improve the processing of your request? message is shown.
# Select Yes. Relevant identification data is transmitted automatically.
More information on Mercedes me: https:// www.mercedes.me
Transferred data during a Mercedes me call When you make a service call via Mercedes me, data is transmitted. This enables targeted advice and a smooth service. The following requirements must be fulfilled for the transfer of the data: R The ignition is switched on. R The required data transfer technology is sup-
ported by the mobile phone network pro- vider. R The quality of the mobile connection is suffi- cient.
Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors: R Reason for the initiation of the call R The available mobile phone transmission
technology.
R The activated Mercedes me connect serv- ices.
R The service selected in the voice control sys- tem.
% A prompt for consent to the data transmis- sion only occurs if the corresponding Mercedes me connect service is not activa- ted.
Data transfer if Mercedes me connect serv- ices are not activated If no Mercedes me connect services are activa- ted and the data protection prompt has been confirmed the following data is transmitted: R Vehicle identification number R Time of the call R Reason for the initiation of the call R Confirmation of the data protection prompt R Country indicator of the vehicle R Set language for the multimedia system R Telephone number of the communication
platform installed in the vehicle
MBUX multimedia system 283
If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data
If a call is made after automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia sys- tem, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data R Current vehicle location
If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system and no service has been activated, but the data protec- tion query has been confirmed, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre: R Current vehicle location
If the data protection prompt has been rejected, the following data is transmitted to enable targe- ted advice and an efficient service: R Reason for the initiation of the call R Rejection of the data protection prompt R Country indicator of the vehicle
284 MBUX multimedia system
R Set language for the multimedia system R Telephone number of the communication
platform installed in the vehicle Data transfer if Mercedes me connect serv- ices are activated Only if the respective service is activated will additional incident-specific data be transmitted in the second stage to enable an optimal service. An overview of the data transmitted can be found in the respective terms of use for Mercedes me connect services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Data processing The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services. The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and, if required to process the incident, forwar- ded to the service partner authorised by the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. Please take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https:// www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. % The recorded message is not available in
every country.
Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you. For more information consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre or visit the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com % Make sure you always keep the Mercedes
me apps updated. You can call up the menu using Mercedes me & Apps in the multimedia system.
In the Mercedes me & Apps menu, the following options can be available: R Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes
me user account R Deleting a connection between a Mercedes
me user account and the vehicle R Calling up the Mercedes me services R Calling up apps such as, In-Car Office or the
web browser depending on availability
Overview of In-Car Office
Using In-Car Office, you can connect your online services with the multimedia system. Requirements for In-Car Office: R Your mobile phone is connected with the
multimedia system. R You have a user account for the Mercedes
me Portal. R The In-Car Office service is activated in the
Mercedes me Portal. R You have a user account with an online
service, e.g. Office 365, and have connected
the online service with your user account in the Mercedes me Portal.
In-Car Office functions: R Display pending appointments in the calen-
dar - Reading out calendar entries - Calling stored telephone numbers - Navigating to appointments with naviga-
ble destinations - Deleting a calendar entry R Display and selection of tasks and calls to complete
- Reading aloud - Calling stored telephone numbers - Deleting R Noting calls - Declining incoming calls and saving as a
task in the Tasks & calls menu R Marking entry in Tasks & calls as completed
O R Managing e-mails
- Showing/reading e-mails - Writing and forwarding e-mails
% You can start the In-Car Office function using the Mercedes me & Apps menu.
MBUX multimedia system 285 Please note that certain functions are only available when the vehicle is stationary.
Web browser overview The web browser is started using the Mercedes me & Apps menu.
286 MBUX multimedia system
1 URL entry 2 Bookmarks 3 Web page, back 4 Web page, forwards 5 To refresh/stop 6 Options % Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle
is in motion.
Overview of smartphone integration
With Smartphone Integration, you can use cer- tain functions on your mobile phone via the mul- timedia system display. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec- ted via Smartphone Integration to the multime- dia system. Also for use with two phone mode with smartphone integration, only one additional
mobile phone can be connected using Blue- tooth® with the multimedia system. The full range of functions for Smartphone Inte- gration is only possible with an Internet connec- tion. The appropriate application must be down- loaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to a USB port with the ç symbol on the multimedia system using a suita- ble cable.
Apps for Smartphone Integration R Apple CarPlay® R Android Auto
% For safety reasons, the first activation of Smartphone Integration on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the parking brake is applied.
You can start Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto from the device manager. % Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary.
Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted: R Software release of the multimedia system R System ID (anonymised)
The transfer of this data is used to optimise communication between the vehicle and the mobile phone. To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly generated. This has no connection to the vehicle identifica- tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi- media system is reset (/ page 266). The following driving status data is transmitted: R Transmission position engaged R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling
and driving R Day/night mode of the instrument cluster R Drive type
The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation. The following position data is transmitted: R Coordinates R Speed R Compass direction
MBUX multimedia system 287
R Acceleration direction This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continuation in a tunnel).
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on the Mercedes-Benz emer- gency call system The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the relevant contract partner. Insufficient network coverage from the relevant contract partner may result in an emergency call not being transmitted. The ignition must be switched on before an auto- matic emergency call can be made. % The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
is activated at the factory. Using the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is free of charge.
288 MBUX multimedia system
Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system can help to decisively reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. The emergency call can be made automatically (/ page 288) or manually (/ page 289). Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situa- tion. You can find more information on the regional availability of eCall at: https://www.mercedesbenz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/
Messages on the display The following messages appear in the display: R SOS NOT READY: the ignition is not on or
eCall is not available . This does not necessa- rily indicate complete failure of the emer-
gency call system. Emergency calls call still be transmitted. The display only refers to the vehicle and does not take account of the availability of mobile phone networks and the MercedesBenz emergency call centre. The functional readiness of the emergency call system on the vehicle can be seen when the SOS NOT READY display disappears once the ignition is switched on. R G: The icon appears in the display during an active emergency call. % If there is a malfunction in the MercedesBenz emergency call system (e.g. a fault with the speaker, microphone, airbag, SOS but- ton), a corresponding message appears in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster.
Triggering an automatic MercedesBenz emergency call Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.
R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
The MercedesBenz emergency call system trig- gers an emergency call automatically in the fol- lowing cases: R After activation of the restraint systems such
as airbags or seat belt tensioners after an accident
The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the
MercedesBenz emergency call centre. R A message with accident data is transmitted
to the MercedesBenz emergency call centre. The MercedesBenz emergency call centre can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the public emergency services call cen- tres. R Under certain circumstances data is also transmitted in the voice channel to the MercedesBenz emergency call centre. This allows measures for rescue, recovery or towing to a MercedesBenz Service Centre to be initiated quickly.
MBUX multimedia system 289
The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. It is not possible to immediately end an auto- matic emergency call. If the MercedesBenz emergency call system cannot connect to the MercedesBenz emer- gency call centre, the emergency call is automat- ically sent to the public emergency services call centre. If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the display. # Dial the emergency number 112 on your
mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated: R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic
conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer- gency call centre operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.
R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu- lance is sent to the vehicle immediately.
Triggering a manual Mercedes-Benz emer- gency call # To use the SOS button in the overhead
control panel: press and hold the SOS but- ton for at least one second (/ page 280). # To use voice control: use the LINGUA- TRONIC voice commands . The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the MercedesBenz emergency call centre. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the public emergency services call cen- tres. R Under certain circumstances data is also transmitted in the voice channel to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
This allows measures for rescue, recovery or towing to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to be initiated quickly. R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer- gency call centre operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.
If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system cannot connect to the Mercedes-Benz emer- gency call centre, the emergency call is automat- ically sent to the public emergency services call centre. If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the emergency number 112 on your
mobile phone.
290 MBUX multimedia system
Ending an unintentionally triggered manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call # On the multifunction steering wheel:
select ~.
Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emer- gency call system In the event of an automatic or manual emer- gency call the following data is transmitted, for example: R Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route
(a few hundred metres before the incident) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identification number R Vehicle drive type R Number of people determined to be in the
vehicle R Whether Mercedes me connect is available
or not R Whether the emergency call was initiated
manually or automatically
R Time of the accident R Language setting on the multimedia system For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated: R The current vehicle position can be deter-
mined. R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants
can be established. % For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving
traffic information, cannot be performed for up to two hours after sending an emergency call.
Self diagnosis function of the emergency call system Your car verifies the operability of the emer- gency call system each time the ignition is ON. In case of system failure, you will be informed with text message on the instrument cluster and with red indicator SOS NOT READY on the dis- play.
Please, make sure, that during 30 seconds after switching ignition ON the red indicator SOS NOT READY in the upper right corner of display is switched OFF, this means the emergency call system passed diagnostics successfully.
Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode
Requirements: R The starter battery is sufficiently charged. R The ignition is switched on. R The vehicle has been stationary for at least
one minute.
% The test mode is currently available in the following countries, for example: R Russia R Belarus R Kazakhstan R Armenia R Kyrgyzstan
# To start the test mode: press and hold the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel for at least five seconds. The test mode is started and automatically ends after the language test has been per- formed.
# To end the test mode manually: switch off the ignition. The test mode is ended.
MBUX multimedia system 291
Radio & media Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu
Symbol 6
Designation Play
8
Rest
:
Repeat a track
Function
Select to start or continue playback.
Select to pause the playback.
Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist. R Select once: the active playlist is repeated. R Select twice: the current track is repeated. R Select three times: the function is deactivated.
292 MBUX multimedia system
Symbol 9 û/ü ß 5
ª
Z © j 2
Designation Random playback Skip forwards/back Options Categories
Search
Settings Home Messaging Full screen
Function Select to play back the tracks in random order. Select to skip to the next or to the previous track. Select to show additional options. Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.). Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example. Select to make settings. Select to return to the home screen. Select to call up messaging. Select to switch to full screen mode.
The following functions and settings are availa- ble in the media menu: R Connecting external data storage media with
the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth®) R Playing back audio or video files R Streaming online music
Authorising a Bluetooth® audio device for media playback
Requirements: R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia
system and audio equipment. R The audio equipment supports the Blue-
tooth® audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP. R The audio equipment is "visible" for other
devices.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Bluetooth 5 ª With Bluetooth® audio, you can play back music files from an external data storage medium, e.g.
your smartphone, using the MBUX multimedia system. # To play back audio files using the multimedia
system, authorise the external data storage medium on the MBUX multimedia system.
Authorising a new Bluetooth® audio device # Select Connect new device. # Select an audio device.
Authorisation starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio equipment. # Select Only as Bluetooth audio device. The Bluetooth® audio equipment is connec- ted with the multimedia system.
Connecting previously authorised Bluetooth® audio equipment # Select a Bluetooth® audio device from the
list. The connection is being established.
MBUX multimedia system 293
294 MBUX multimedia system
Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu
Symbol ©
Designation Home
j
Messaging
û/ü
Skip forwards/back
Z
Settings
2
8 f
Full screen
Silent function Store radio stations
Function
Select to return to the home screen.
Select to call up messaging.
Select to skip to the next or to the previous station.
Select to have further options shown. Settings can be made to the following addi- tional functions, for example: R Navigation and traffic announcements R Frequency fix function R Radio additional text R Emergency warnings The setting options are country-dependent. Select to switch to the DAB slide show. This function is not available in all countries. Select to switch off the sound.
Select to save a station in the presets.
MBUX multimedia system 295
Symbol 4 ª
Designation Station list Search
Additional functions of TuneIn radio % A relatively large volume of data can be
transmitted when using TuneIn Radio.
Function Select to have the station list shown. Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.
Symbol Z
ß
Designation Settings
Favourites
Function
The following additional settings are available in the TuneIn Radio menu: R Selecting stream R Logging on to or out of the TuneIn account
Select during playback to save the station cur- rently set as a favourite.
296 MBUX multimedia system
Symbol 6/8 5
Designation Play/Pause Browse
Function Select to start, stop or continue playback. Select to choose a category and then a radio station.
Depending on the frequency band selected, dif- ferent functions are available to you. Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner.
Calling up TuneIn Radio
Requirements: R A Mercedes me account is available. R The vehicle is connected with the Mercedes
me account. R The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the
Mercedes me Portal. R The data volume is available.
Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased.
R A fast Internet connection for data transmis- sion free of interference.
% Data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal.
% The functions and services are countrydependent. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio # Select TuneIn Radio.
The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set starts playing. % The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception.
Sound settings Overview of functions in the sound menu
The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system fitted. You can find out which sound system is fitted in your vehicle in the Digital Owner's Manual.
Standard sound system and Advanced sound system The following functions are available: R Equaliser
- Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Volume
- Automatic adjustment
Burmester® surround sound system and Burmester® high-end 3D surround sound system
The following functions are available: R Equaliser:
- Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Sound focus
R VIP seat (Burmester® high-end 3D surround sound system only)
R Sound profiles R Volume:
- Automatic adjustment
MBUX multimedia system 297
298 Maintenance and care
ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the instrument display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date. You can hide this service display using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases: R mainly short-distance driving R when the engine is often left idling for long
periods R in the event of frequent cold start phases R vehicles with a diesel particulate filter: in
the event of frequently interrupted regenera- tion of the diesel particulate filter
Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions. You can obtain information concerning the serv- icing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Displaying the service due date On-board computer: 4 Service 5 ASSYST PLUS The next service due date is displayed. # To exit the display: press the back button
on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the on-board computer
(/ page 248).
Information on regular maintenance work
* NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates
Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle. # Adhere to the prescribed service inter-
vals. # Always have the prescribed mainte-
nance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Notes on special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on nor- mal operation of the vehicle. Have the mainte- nance work carried out more often than prescri- bed if operating conditions are difficult or the vehicle is subject to increased stress. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsi- bility as regards to whether maintenance work needs to be performed more often than speci-
Maintenance and care 299
fied based on the actual operating conditions and/or loads. Examples of arduous operating conditions: R Regular city driving with frequent intermedi-
ate stops R Mainly short-distance driving R Frequent operation in mountainous terrain or
on poor road surfaces R When the engine is often left idling for long
periods R Operation in particularly dusty conditions
and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used
In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for example, changed more frequently. The tyres must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Further infor- mation can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Battery disconnection periods The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date only when the battery is connected. # Note down the service due date displayed on
the instrument display before disconnecting the battery (/ page 298).
Engine compartment Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Operation of the active bonnet (pedestrian protection) In certain accident situations, the actuation of the active bonnet reduces the risk of injury to pedestrians. The rear area of the bonnet is raised by approximately 70 mm. For the drive to the workshop, reset the actuated active bonnet yourself (/ page 299). After the active bonnet has been actuated, pedestrian protection may be limited. Have the full functionality of the active bonnet restored in a qualified specialist workshop.
Resetting the active bonnet
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the following.
300 Maintenance and care
# With your hand flat, push down active bonnet 1 in the area around the hinges on both sides (arrows). In doing so, the actuator is depressurised and you may hear a hissing sound. The engine bonnet must engage in position.
# If the active bonnet can be raised slightly at the rear in the area of the hinges, repeat the step until it engages correctly.
Opening and closing the bonnet
& WARNING Risk of accident due to driv- ing with the bonnet unlocked
The bonnet may open and block your view. # Never release the bonnet when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the
engine bonnet is locked.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the bonnet
The bonnet may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the engine bonnet's range of movement. # Do not open or close the bonnet if there
is a person in the bonnet's range of movement.
& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet
If you open the bonnet when the engine has overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You could come into contact with hot
gases. R You could come into contact with other
hot, escaping operating fluids.
# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.
# In the event of a fire in the engine com- partment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts
Components in the engine compartment may continue running or start up suddenly, even if the ignition is switched off. Make sure of the following before performing tasks in the engine compartment: # Switch the ignition off. # Never reach into the danger zone sur-
rounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan. # Remove jewellery and watches. # Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.
& WARNING Risk of injury from touching components under voltage
The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. You could receive an electric shock. # Never touch components of the ignition
system or the fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on.
The live components include the following, for example: R Ignition coils R Spark plug connectors R Injectors
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers while the engine bon- net is open
When the engine bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windscreen wip-
ers and ignition before opening the engine bonnet.
* NOTE Plug-in hybrid # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
Maintenance and care 301 Opening the bonnet
# To release the bonnet, pull on handle 1.
302 Maintenance and care
# Push yellow handle 1 on the bonnet catch to the left as far as it will go (palm down- wards). Lift the bonnet until it is automati- cally raised by the pneumatic spring.
Closing the bonnet # Lower the bonnet and let it drop from a
height of approximately 20 cm.
# If the bonnet can still be lifted slightly, open the bonnet again and close it with a little force until it engages correctly.
Engine oil Checking the engine oil level using the onboard computer Requirements: R The engine has been warmed up. R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. R The engine is running at idle speed. R The bonnet is closed. The engine oil level is determined during driving. Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style.
On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Engine oil level One of the following messages will appear on the multifunction display: R Engine oil level Measuring now: measure-
ment of the oil level is not yet possible.
# Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving.
R Engine oil level OK and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the multifunction display is green and is between "min" and "max": the oil level is correct.
R Engine oil level Add 1,0 l and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the multifunc- tion display is orange and is below "min":
# Add 1 l of engine oil. R Reduce engine oil level and the bar display
for indicating the oil level on the multifunc- tion display is orange and is above "max":
# Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
R For engine oil level turn on ignition
# Switch on the ignition to check the engine oil level.
R Engine oil level System inoperative: The oil level sensor is defective or not connected.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. R Engine oil level System currently unavail.
# Close the bonnet. Topping up engine oil
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the following.
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil
If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart- ment, it may ignite. # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled
next to the filler opening. # Allow the engine to cool off and thor-
oughly clean the engine oil from compo- nent parts before starting the vehicle.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi- tives
# Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifi- cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.
# Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil and observe the prescribed change intervals.
Maintenance and care 303
# Do not use additives.
* NOTE Damage caused by topping up too much engine oil
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. # Have excess engine oil removed at a
qualified specialist workshop. % Depending on driving style, the vehicle con-
sumes up to 0.8 litre of oil per 1000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
304 Maintenance and care
# Turn cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it. # Top up the engine oil. # Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it
engages. # Check the oil level again (/ page 302).
Checking the coolant level
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the following.
& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant
If you open the cap, you could be scalded. # Let the motor cool down before opening
the cap. # When opening the cap, wear protective
gloves and safety glasses. # Open the cap slowly to release pres-
sure.
# Park the vehicle on a level surface. # Check the coolant temperature display in the
instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 70°C. # Slowly turn cap 1 anti-clockwise to release overpressure.
# Continue turning cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it.
The coolant level is correct in the following cases: R If the engine is cold, the coolant is up to
marker bar 2. R If the engine is warm, the coolant is up to
1.5 cm over the marker bar 2. # If necessary, top up with coolant that has
been approved for Mercedes-Benz. % Further information on coolant
(/ page 369)
Topping up the windscreen washer system
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windscreen washer
concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.
Maintenance and care 305
# Remove cap 1 by the tab. # Top up the washer fluid. % Further information about the windscreen
washer fluid (/ page 370)
306 Maintenance and care
Keeping the air-water duct free # Keep the area between the bonnet and the
windscreen free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow and leaves.
Cleaning and care Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to reduced braking power after washing the vehicle
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. # After the vehicle has been washed,
brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored.
* NOTE Damage from automatic braking If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer- tain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit- uations: # during towing # in a car wash
* NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash
# Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions.
# Ensure there is sufficient ground clear- ance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.
# Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.
To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti-
vated. R The HOLD function is switched off. R The 360° Camera or the reversing camera is
switched off. R The side windows and sliding sunroof are
completely closed. R The blower for the ventilation/heating is
switched off. R The windscreen wiper switch is in position
g. R The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m
away from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate could open unintentionally.
R In automatic car washes with conveyor sys- tems: - Neutral i is engaged. - Vehicles with automatic transmis- sion: If you would like to leave the vehicle while it is being washed, make sure the key is located in the vehicle. The park position j is otherwise automatically engaged.
% If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windscreen and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.
Automatic car wash mode In car wash mode, the vehicle is prepared for driving into the automatic car wash. Car wash mode can be activated at a speed of up to 20 km/h Activate (/ page 307). The following settings are made when car wash mode is activated: R The outside mirrors are folded in.
R To prevent the windscreen washer system from starting up automatically, the rain sen- sor is deactivated.
R The rear window wiper is deactivated. R The windows and the sliding sunroof are
closed. R The air conditioning system is set to air-recir-
culation mode. R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. R Vehicles with 360° Camera: the front
image is activated after approx. eight sec- onds.
If one of the settings cannot be selected, this is displayed by a % behind the respective set- ting. Above a speed of 20 km/h Car wash mode is automatically deactivated. The following settings are reset when car wash mode is deactivated: R The outside mirrors are folded out. R The rain sensor is activated. R The rear window wiper is activated.
Maintenance and care 307
R The air conditioning system is set to fresh air mode.
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is reset to the previously selected setting.
R The windows and the sliding sunroof remain closed.
R Vehicles with 360° Camera: the front image is deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h.
Activating/deactivating automatic car wash mode
Requirements: R the vehicle is stationary. R the engine is running. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access Activating automatic car wash mode # Select Car wash mode. # Select Start.
308 Maintenance and care
If one of the settings cannot be selected, this is displayed by a % behind the respective set- ting. % For an overview of the settings made when
activating automatic car wash mode (/ page 306). Deactivating automatic car wash mode # Select Stop. The automatic car wash settings are reset. % The automatic car wash mode is automati- cally deactivated as soon as a speed of 20 km/h is exceeded.
Information on using a high-pressure cleaner
& WARNING Risk of an accident when using high-pressure cleaners with roundspray nozzles
The water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unex- pectedly fail.
# Do not use a high-pressure cleaner with round-spray nozzles.
# Have damaged tyres or chassis parts replaced immediately.
To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol- lowing when using a high-pressure cleaner: R The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m
away from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate could open unintentionally. R Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the vehicle. R Vehicles with decorative foil: Parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water tempera- ture of the high-pressure cleaner must not exceed 60°C. R Observe the information on the correct dis- tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper- ating instructions.
R Do not direct the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner directly at sensitive parts, such as tyres, gaps, electrical components, batteries, light sources and ventilation slits.
Washing the vehicle by hand
* NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress
# Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the bonnet.
observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays. # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using
a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight. # Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois.
% Observe the notes on the care of car parts (/ page 310).
Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driving assistance systems, please observe the following notes: Paint R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and
rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off
afterwards. R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by
rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro- leum ether or lighter fluid. R Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water. R Tar stains: use tar remover. R Wax: use silicone remover.
R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate- rials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop.
R Remove dirt immediately, where possible.
Matt finish R Only use care products approved for
Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate-
rials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop. R Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy wheels. R Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engineering standards. R Do not use car wash programmes with a final hot wax treatment. R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polish- ing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax.
In the event of paintwork damage: R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop.
Maintenance and care 309
R Make sure the radar sensors function (/ page 185).
Notes on cleaning decorative foils Observe the notes on matt finish care in the chapter "Notes on paintwork/matt finish paint- work care" (/ page 309). They also apply to matt decorative foils. Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to avoid vehicle damage. Cleaning R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild
cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil irreparably. R If there is dirt on the finish or if the decora- tive foil is dull: use the Paint Cleaner recom- mended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
310 Maintenance and care
R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash.
Avoiding damage to the decorative foil R The service life and colouring of decorative
foils are impaired by: - sunlight - temperature, e.g. hot air blower - weather conditions - stone chippings and dirt - chemical cleaning agents - oily products R Do not use polish on matt decorative foil. Polishing will have the effect of shining the foil-wrapped surface. R Do not treat matt or structured decorative foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. You can obtain more information on care and cleaning products from the manufacturer. In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical dif- ferences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative foil after removing a decorative foil. % Have work or repairs to decorative foils car-
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. in a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Notes on care of car parts
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windscreen wipers are switched on while the windscreen is being cleaned
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.
# Always switch off the windscreen wip- ers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades.
& WARNING Risk of burns from the tail- pipe and tailpipe trims
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around
the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area. # Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following vehi- cle parts: Wheels and rims R Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners.
R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
R To avoid corrosion of the brake disks and brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake disks and brakepads warm up and dry out.
Windows R Clean the windows inside and outside with a
damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recom- mended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solventbased cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows.
% After changing the wiper blades or treating the vehicle with wax, clean the windscreen thoroughly with cleaning agents recommen- ded for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the application instructions may result in damage, smear marks or dazzling spots.
% Remove external fogging or dirt on the wind- screen in front of the multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving
safety systems may be impaired or not avail- able (/ page 185).
Wiper blades R Move the wiper arms into the replacement
position (/ page 137). R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the
wiper blades with a damp cloth.
% Make sure that the wiper blades are coated. The coating can leave residues on a cloth. Do not rub the wiper blades excessively or clean them too often.
Exterior lighting R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild
cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. R Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Sensors R Clean the sensors in the front and rear
bumpers with a soft cloth and car shampoo (/ page 185). R When using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain a minimum distance of 30 cm.
Maintenance and care 311
Reversing camera and 360° Camera R Open the camera cover with the multimedia
system (/ page 228). R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the
camera lens. R Do not use a high-pressure cleaner.
Tailpipes R Clean with a cleaning agent recommended
for Mercedes-Benz, especially in the winter and after washing the vehicle. R Do not use acidic cleaning agents.
Trailer hitch R Observe the notes on care in the trailer hitch
manufacturer's operating instructions. R Do not clean the ball neck with a high-pres-
sure cleaner or solvent. R Remove traces of rust on the ball, for exam-
ple, with a wire brush. R Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth. R After cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball
head.
312 Maintenance and care
% Before using trailers with anti-torsional cou- pling, observe the manufacturer's operating instructions.
Notes on care of the interior
& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of sol- vent-based care products
Care and cleaning products containing sol- vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away. # Do not use any care or cleaning prod-
ucts containing solvents to clean the cockpit.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from bleached seat belts
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident.
# Never bleach or dye seat belts.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the fol- lowing notes on cleaning and care:
Seat belts R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry by heating them to over 80°C or
exposing them to direct sunlight.
Display R Switch off the display and let it cool down. R Clean the surface carefully with a microfibre
cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT-LCD). R Do not use any other agents.
Head-up display R Clean with a soft, non-static, lint-free cloth. R Do not use cleaning agents.
Plastic trim R Clean with a damp microfibre cloth.
R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen- ded for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate- rials.
R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come in contact with the plas- tic trim.
Real wood and trim elements R Clean with a microfibre cloth. R Black piano-lacquer look: Clean with a damp
cloth and soapy water. R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen-
ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents,
polishes or waxes.
Roof lining R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.
Carpet R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent rec-
ommended for Mercedes-Benz.
Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINAMICA
* NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners # Do not use solvent-based cleaning
agents such as tar remover or wheel cleaner; neither should you use pol- ishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the finish.
R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth.
R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen- ded for Mercedes-Benz.
R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
R Do not use a microfibre cloth. % Leather is a natural product. It has natural
surface properties, such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle colour differences.
Genuine leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a
dry cloth. R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that
has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not allow the leather to become too
damp. R Do not use a microfibre cloth.
DINAMICA seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use a microfibre cloth.
Imitation leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. R Do not use a microfibre cloth.
Fabric seat covers R Clean with a damp microfibre cloth and 1%
soapy water and allow to dry.
Maintenance and care 313
314 Breakdown assistance
Emergency Removing the safety vest The safety vests are located in the stowage com- partments in the driver's and front passenger door. # Pull out the safety vest bag by the loop. # Open the safety vest bag and pull out the
safety vest. % There are also safety vest compartments in
the rear door stowage compartments in which safety vests can be stored.
3 Do not bleach 4 Do not iron 5 Do not tumble dry 6 Do not dry clean 7 Class 2 safety vest
The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed. Replace the safety vest in the following cases: R the reflective strips are damaged or dirty R the maximum permissible number of washes
is exceeded R the fluorescence has faded
Warning triangle Removing the warning triangle
# Remove warning triangle 1.
1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature
Setting up the warning triangle
# Fold side reflectors 1 upwards to form a tri- angle and attach at the top using upper press-stud 2.
# Fold legs 3 down and out to the side.
First-aid kit (soft-sided) overview
First-aid kit (soft sided) 1 is in the load com- partment in the left-hand stowage net. % Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
first-aid kit (soft-sided) is in the recess in the side trim.
Breakdown assistance 315
Removing the fire extinguisher
& WARNING Risk of accident due to an incorrectly secured fire extinguisher in the driver's footwell
A fire extinguisher may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. The fire extinguisher can be flung around and injure the driver or other vehicle occupants. # Always store and secure the fire extin-
guisher in the bracket. # Do not remove the fire extinguisher
while driving.
316 Breakdown assistance
# Left-hand drive vehicle: pull tab 1 upwards.
# Right-hand drive vehicle: pull tab 1 down- wards.
# Remove fire extinguisher 2.
Flat tyre Notes on flat tyres
& WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tyre
A flat tyre severely affects the driving charac- teristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle. Tyres without run-flat characteristics: # Do not drive with a flat tyre. # Change the flat tyre immediately with
an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tyres with run-flat characteristics: # Observe the information and warning
notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres).
In the event of a flat tyre, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equip- ment: R Vehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is pos-
sible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres) (/ page 317). R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair the tyre so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 318). R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown (/ page 280). R All vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 347).
Notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres)
& WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode
Driving in emergency mode impairs the han- dling characteristics of the vehicle. # Do not exceed the permissible maxi-
mum speed of the MOExtended tyres. # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving
manoeuvres as well as driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle. # Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice: R banging noise R vehicle vibration R smoke which smells like rubber R continuous ESP® intervention R cracks in the tyre sidewalls
# After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a qualified special-
Breakdown assistance 317
ist workshop with regard to their further use. # The defective tyre must be replaced in every case.
With MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. How- ever, the tyre affected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tyre. Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warning sys- tem: MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system. Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem: MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure mon- itoring system.
If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display, proceed as follows: R Check the tyre for damage. R If driving on, observe the following notes.
Driving distance possible in emergency mode after the pressure loss warning:
Load condition
Driving distance pos- sible in emergency
mode
Partially laden
80 km
Fully laden
30 km
The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h. If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, you can use a stand- ard tyre as a temporary measure.
318 Breakdown assistance TIREFIT kit storage location The TIREFIT kit is located under the load com- partment floor.
1 Tyre sealant bottle 2 Tyre inflation compressor
Depending on the model, the TIREFIT kit may also be located in other places under the load compartment floor. % You can find information on the power cate-
gory (LK) and/or electrical data on the back of the tyre inflation compressor: R LK2 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.8 kg At a distance of approximately 1 m to the tyre inflation compressor and approximately 1.6 m above the ground, the following sound pressure levels apply: R Emission sound pressure level LPA 83 dB
(A) R Sound power level LWA 91 dB (A) The tyre inflation compressor is mainte- nance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Using the TIREFIT kit
Requirements: R Tyre sealant bottle and tyre inflation com-
pressor (/ page 318)
R TIREFIT sticker R Gloves
You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal perfora- tion damage of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -20°C.
& WARNING Risk of accident when using tyre sealant
The tyre sealant may be unable to seal the tyre properly, especially in the following cases: R there are large cuts or punctures in the
tyre (larger than damage previously men- tioned) R the wheel rims have been damaged R after journeys with very low tyre pressure or with flat tyres
# Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tyre sealant
Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and cau- ses irritation. Do not allow it to come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours. Keep the tyre sealant away from children. Observe the following if you come into con- tact with the tyre sealant: # Rinse off the tyre sealant from your skin
using water immediately. # If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thor-
oughly rinse them using clean water immediately. # If tyre sealant has been swallowed, thoroughly rinse out your mouth imme- diately and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately. # Change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant immedi- ately.
Breakdown assistance 319
# If an allergic reaction occurs, seek med- ical attention immediately.
* NOTE Overheating due to the tyre infla- tion compressor running too long
# Do not run the tyre inflation compres- sor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tyre inflation compressor. Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced in a quali- fied specialist workshop every five years. # Do not remove any foreign objects which
have entered the tyre.
# Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.
# Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre.
320 Breakdown assistance
# Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out of the tyre inflation compressor housing.
# Push the plug of hose 5 into flange 6 of tyre sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages.
# Place tyre sealant bottle 1 head downwards into recess 2 of the tyre inflation compres- sor.
# Remove the valve cap from valve 7 on the faulty tyre.
# Screw filling hose 8 onto valve 7. # Insert plug 4 into a 12 V socket in your
vehicle. # Switch on the ignition. # Switch on the tyre inflation compressor using
On/Off switch 3. The tyre is inflated. First, tyre sealant is pum- ped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tyre inflation compres- sor during this phase!
# Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tyre should then have attained a tyre pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).
If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera- ble to use clean water. If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy- lene.
If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained: # Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the
defective tyre.
Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose. # Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for
approximately 10 m.
# Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of ten minutes the tyre pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being attained
If the specified tyre pressure is not attained after the specified time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained: # Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the
defective tyre.
& WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tyres
A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. # Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully. # Do not exceed the maximum speed
limit with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant.
# Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant 80 km/h.
* NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant After use, excess tyre sealant may leak out from the filling hose. # Therefore, place the filling hose in the
plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.
Breakdown assistance 321
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre- sponsible disposal
Tyre sealant contains pollutants. # Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
# Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre inflation compressor.
# Pull away immediately. # Stop driving after approximately ten minutes
and check the tyre pressure using the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being attained
If the specified tyre pressure is not reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre seal- ant cannot repair the tyre in this instance.
322 Breakdown assistance
The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Countries that have Mercedes-Benz Service24h: you will find a sticker with the tele- phone number, e.g. on the Bpillar on the driver's side. # Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pres- sure table on the fuel filler flap for values. # To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor.
# To reduce the tyre pressure: press pres- sure release button 1 next to manometer 2.
# When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tyre.
# Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tyre.
# Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. The filling hose stays on the tyre sealant bot- tle.
# Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work- shop and have the tyre, tyre sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there.
Battery (vehicle) Notes on the 12 V battery
* NOTE Plug-in hybrid # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the bat- tery
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety sys- tems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle.
Breakdown assistance 323
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R when braking R in the event of abrupt steering manoeu-
vres and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions
# In the event of a short circuit or a simi- lar incident, contact a qualified special- ist workshop immediately.
# Do not drive on. # Always have work on the battery carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
R Further information on ABS (/ page 187) R Further information on ESP®(/ page 188) For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tes- ted and approved for your vehicle by MercedesBenz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be dam- aged in the event of an accident.
& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec- trostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery. # To discharge any electrostatic charge
that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the bat- tery.
The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance.
& WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid
Battery acid is caustic. # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing. # Do not lean over the battery. # Do not inhale battery gases. # Keep children away from the battery.
# Immediately rinse battery acid off thor- oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat- teries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. If you must disconnect the 12 V battery, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
324 Breakdown assistance
Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Keep children away. Observe this Owner's Manual.
Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corro- sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear safety glasses.
If you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time: R activate standby mode, or R connect the battery to a battery charger
approved by Mercedes-Benz, or R consult a qualified specialist workshop to
disconnect the battery
Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec- tion point in the engine compartment.
* NOTE Damage to the battery from over- voltage
When charging using a battery charger with- out a restriction of the maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electron- ics can be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi-
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
& WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro- gen gas igniting
There is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting when charging the battery if there is a short circuit or sparks start to form. # Make sure that the positive terminal of
the connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. # Never place metal objects or tools on a battery. # The described order of the battery clamps must be observed when con- necting and disconnecting the battery.
# When giving starting assistance, always make sure that you only connect bat- tery terminals with identical polarity.
# During starting assistance, you must observe the described order for con- necting and disconnecting the jump lead.
# Do not connect or disconnect the bat- tery clamps while the engine is running.
& WARNING Risk of explosion during charging process and starting assistance
During the charging process and starting assistance, the battery may release an explo- sive gas mixture. # Avoid fire, naked flames, creating
sparks and smoking. # Make sure there is sufficient ventila-
tion. # Do not lean over a battery.
& WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro- zen battery
A discharged battery may freeze at tempera- tures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charg- ing, battery gas can be released. # Always allow a battery to thaw before
charging it or performing starting assis- tance.
If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has fro- zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting characteristics may be impaired, espe- cially at low temperatures. It is recommended that you have a thawed bat- tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Breakdown assistance 325
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes in the Supple- ment. You could otherwise fail to recognise dan- gers.
* NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine
Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel. # Avoid numerous and extended attempts
to start the engine.
Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery: R Only use undamaged jump lead/charging
cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jump lead/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start connec- tion point.
326 Breakdown assistance
R The jump lead/charging cable must not come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running.
R Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged.
R Keep away from fire and naked flames. R Do not lean over the battery.
Observe the additional following points when charging the battery: R Only use battery chargers tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Read the battery charger's operating instruc-
tions before charging the battery.
Observe the additional following points during starting assistance: R For starting assistance, only use batteries
with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch. R Petrol engine: only accept starting assis-
tance if the engine and exhaust system are cold.
Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery
Requirements: Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes in the Supple- ment. You could otherwise fail to recognise dan- gers. R The vehicle is secured with the electric park-
ing brake. R Automatic transmission: the transmission
is in position j. R Manual transmission: the transmission is in
neutral. R The ignition and all electrical consumers are
switched off. R The bonnet is open.
# Slide cover 1 of positive clamp 2 on the jump-starting connection point in the direc- tion of the arrow.
# Connect positive clamp 2 on your vehicle to the positive pole of the donor battery using the jump lead/charging cable. Always begin with positive clamp 2 on your own vehicle first.
# During starting assistance: start the engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle speed.
# Connect the negative pole of the donor bat- tery and earth point 3 of your own vehicle by using the jump lead/charging cable. Begin with the donor battery first.
# During starting assistance: start the engine of your own vehicle.
# During the charging process: start the charging process.
# During starting assistance: let the engines run for several minutes.
# During starting assistance: before discon- necting the jump lead, switch on an electrical consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting.
When the starting assistance/charging process is complete: # First, remove the jump lead/charging cable
from earth point 3 and the negative pole of the donor battery, then from positive clamp 2 and the positive pole of the donor bat-
tery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle first. # After removing the jump lead/charging cable, close cover 1 of positive clamp 2. Further information can be obtained at a quali- fied specialist workshop.
Replacing the 12 V battery # Observe the notes on the 12 V battery
(/ page 322). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself: R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery
which meets the specific vehicle require- ments. The vehicle is equipped with a fleece battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed with a fleece battery. For safety reasons,
Breakdown assistance 327
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Use detachable parts such as vent hoses, elbow fittings or terminal covers from the battery which is to be replaced. R Make sure that the vent hose is always con- nected to the original opening on the side of the battery. Fit any existing or supplied cell caps. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. R Make sure that detachable parts are recon- nected in the same way.
Tow-starting or towing away Permitted towing methods Plug-in hybrid: be sure to observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec- ognise dangers.
328 Breakdown assistance Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar sys- tems.
Permitted towing methods Vehicle equipment/towing method
& WARNING Risk of accident when towing with steering wheel lock
You will no longer be able to steer the vehicle if the steering wheel lock is engaged. # Always switch on the ignition when tow-
ing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow- ing away incorrectly
# Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.
Vehicles with manual transmission Vehicles with automatic transmis- sion 4MATIC vehicles
Both axles on the ground Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h
Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h
Front axle raised Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h
No
Rear axle raised Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h
No
Towing with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company.
Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground # Observe the notes on the permitted towing
methods (/ page 327). # Make sure that the battery is connected and
charged. Observe the following points when the battery is discharged: R the engine cannot be started R the electric parking brake cannot be released
or applied R vehicles with automatic transmission: the
automatic transmission cannot be shifted to position i or j % Vehicles with automatic transmission: if the automatic transmission cannot be shif- ted to position i, or the multifunction dis- play in the instrument cluster does not show anything, have the vehicle transported
(/ page 330). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transporta- tion.
* NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long dis- tances
The drivetrain could be damaged when tow- ing at excessively high speeds or over long distances. # A towing speed of 50 km/h must not
be exceeded. # A towing distance of 50 km must not be
exceeded.
& WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy
If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur: R the towing eye may become detached.
Breakdown assistance 329
R the vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or overturn.
# Before tow-starting or towing away, check if the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away exceeds the permissible gross mass.
If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross mass must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle. # Information on the permissible gross mass of
the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden- tification plate (/ page 360). # Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not open the driver's door or front passenger door; the automatic transmission otherwise automatically shifts to position j. # Fit the towing eye (/ page 332). # Fasten the towing device.
330 Breakdown assistance
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec- tion of the tow bar
# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.
# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism (/ page 81).
# Do not activate the HOLD function. # Deactivate tow-away protection
(/ page 94). # Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 212). # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the automatic transmission to position i. # Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to neutral i. # Release the electric parking brake. # Switch on the ignition; the steering wheel locking may otherwise engage.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to limi- ted safety-related functions during the towing process
Safety-related functions are limited or no lon- ger available in the following situations: R The ignition is switched off. R The brake system or power steering sys-
tem is malfunctioning. R The energy supply or the on-board electri-
cal system is malfunctioning.
When your vehicle is towed away, signifi- cantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required. # Use a tow bar. # Make sure that the steering wheel can
move freely before towing the vehicle away.
* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly.
Loading the vehicle for transport # Observe the notes on towing away
(/ page 329). # Connect the towing device to the towing eye
in order to load the vehicle. % You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer
hitch. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the automatic transmission to position i.
% Vehicles with automatic transmission: the automatic transmission may be locked in position j in the event of damage to the electrical system. To shift to i, provide the on-board electrical system with power (/ page 326).
# Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to neutral.
# Load the vehicle onto the transporter. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the automatic transmission to position j. # Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first or reverse gear. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. # Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.
Vehicles with adaptive damping adjustment
& WARNING Risk of an accident when transporting vehicles with adaptive damping adjustment
When transporting vehicles with adaptive damping adjustment, the vehicle/trailer combination may begin to rock and start to skid. # Load the vehicle correctly onto the
transporter. # Secure the vehicle on all four wheels
with suitable tensioning straps. # Do not exceed the maximum permissi-
ble speed of 60 km/h when transport- ing.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur- ing it incorrectly
# After loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
Breakdown assistance 331 # A minimum distance of 20 cm upwards
and 10 cm downwards must be kept to the transport platform. # Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after loading. 4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission
# Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle.
332 Breakdown assistance
* NOTE Damage to the drive train due to incorrect positioning of the vehicle
# Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehi- cle.
Installing the towing eye
Towing eye storage location Towing eye is under the load compartment floor.
towing eye. Fasten the tow bar to the trailer hitch. # Make sure that cover 1 engages in the
bumper when you remove the towing eye.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye or trailer hitch
When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be dam- aged in the process. # Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch
to tow away or tow start the vehicle. # Do not use the towing eye or trailer
hitch to tow the vehicle during recovery.
# Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and remove.
# Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten.
Vehicles with a trailer hitch: vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a rear bracket for the
Tow starting the vehicle (emergency engine start)
Vehicles with automatic transmission
* NOTE Damage to the automatic trans- mission due to tow-starting
The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow-starting vehicles with automatic transmission. # Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be tow-started.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started.
Vehicles with manual transmission # Observe the notes on towing away
(/ page 329). # If necessary, allow the engine and exhaust
system to cool down. # Switch the ignition on. # Engage second gear. # Release the electric parking brake.
# Tow-start the vehicle while the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
# Slowly release the clutch pedal. # Immediately shift to neutral if the engine
starts. # Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions. # Remove the tow bar. # Remove the towing eye. # Have the vehicle checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloa- ded. This could result in a fire.
Breakdown assistance 333
# Always replace faulty fuses with speci- fied new fuses containing the correct amperage.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses Electrical components or systems may be damaged by incorrect fuses, or their func- tionality may be significantly impaired. # Only use fuses that have been approved
by Mercedes-Benz and which have the correct fuse rating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the col- our and the label. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the engine compartment (/ page 334).
334 Breakdown assistance
* NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction. # When the fuse box is open, make sure
that no moisture can enter the fuse box. # When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned cor- rectly on the fuse box.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified special- ist workshop. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R All electrical consumers are switched off. R The ignition is switched off.
The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes: R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 334) R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (/ page 335) R Fuse box in the centre of the load compart- ment (/ page 336)
Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment Requirements: R A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available. Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 333).
Opening
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers while the engine bon- net is open
When the engine bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windscreen wip-
ers and ignition before opening the engine bonnet.
# Open the bonnet.
# Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.
# Loosen screws 1. # Press clamps 2 and lift the fuse box lid up
and out.
The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on the side of the fuse box.
Closing
# Check whether the seal is positioned cor- rectly in the lid.
# Place the lid on the fuse box. # Make sure that clamps 2 engage. # Tighten screws 1. # Close the bonnet.
Opening
Breakdown assistance 335
Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 333).
# Lift carpet 1 in the direction of the arrow.
336 Breakdown assistance
Opening and closing the fuse box in the load compartment
Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 333). # Open the load compartment floor.
# Loosen screws 2 and remove the fuse box lid from the top.
Closing # Place the lid on the fuse box. # Tighten screws 2. # Fold back the carpet.
Fuse box 1 is located underneath the load compartment floor.
Notes on noise or unusual handling charac- teristics Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehi- cle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. Hidden tyre dam- age could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately and have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist work- shop.
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres
& WARNING Risk of injury due to damaged tyres
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss. # Check the tyres regularly for signs of
damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately.
& WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread
Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip. The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet roads, especially when the speed of the vehi- cle is not adapted to suit the conditions. # Thus, you should regularly check the
tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres.
Minimum tread depth for: R Summer tyres: 3 mm R M+S tyres: 4 mm
# For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.
Wheels and tyres 337
Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg- ularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving offroad: R Check the tyre pressure (/ page 338). R Visually inspect wheels and tyres for dam-
age. R Check the valve caps. R Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the
tyre contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.
Notes on snow chains
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect snow chain fitting
If you fit snow chains to the rear wheels, the snow chains may grind against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres.
338 Wheels and tyres
# Never fit snow chains to the rear wheels.
# Always fit snow chains to the front wheels in pairs.
* NOTE Damage to vehicle body or sus- pension components caused by fitted snow chains
On 4MATIC vehicles, if you fit snow chains on the rear wheels, you can damage vehicle body or suspension components. # On 4MATIC vehicles, only fit snow
chains on the front wheels.
* NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from fit- ted snow chains
If snow chains are fitted to steel wheels, the wheel trims can be damaged. # Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels
before fitting snow chains.
Observe the following notes when using snow chains: R Snow chains are only permissible for certain
wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain information about this from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. R If snow chains are fitted, the maximum per- missible speed is 50 km/h. R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are fitted.
% You can permanently limit the maximum speed for driving with winter tyres (/ page 198).
% You can deactivate ESP® to pull away (/ page 190). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.
Tyre pressure Notes on tyre pressure
& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf- ficient or excessive tyre pressure
Tyres with either too low or too high a pres- sure present the following hazards: R the tyres could burst R the tyres could wear excessively and/or
unevenly R the driving characteristics as well as
steering and braking characteristics may be severely impaired
# Observe the recommended tyre pres- sures and check the tyre pressures of all tyres including the spare wheel:
R monthly R if altering the load on the vehicle R prior to long journeys R if the operating conditions change, for
example when driving off-road
Wheels and tyres 339
# Adjust the tyre pressure where neces- sary.
Tyre pressure which is too high or too low can: R Shorten the service life of the tyres. R Cause increased tyre damage. R Adversely affect driving characteristics and
thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to repea- ted pressure drop in the tyres
The wheels, valves or tyres could be dam- aged. Too low a tyre pressure can lead to the tyres bursting. # Examine the tyres for foreign objects. # Check whether the tyre has a puncture
or the valve has a leak. # If you are unable to rectify the damage,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Information on the recommended tyre pressure for the vehicle's factory-fitted tyres can be found
on the tyre pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap (/ page 339). Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure. Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. Conditions for cold tyres: R The vehicle has been parked with the tyres
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km.
The vehicle's tyres heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tyres increases, so too does the tyre pressure. Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem: you can also check the tyre pressure using the on-board computer.
Notes on trailer operation Always inflate the rear axle tyres to the recom- mended tyre pressures on the tyre pressure table for increased load.
Tyre pressure table The tyre pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pres- sure, the following tyre pressure information is only valid for those tyre sizes and their respec- tive load condition.
340 Wheels and tyres
If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by the + symbol, the tyre pressure information following shows alternative tyre pressures. Fuel consumption may then increase slightly. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different num- bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this.
Tyre pressure monitoring system Function of the tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem The system checks the tyre pressure and the tyre temperature of the tyres fitted to the vehicle by means of a tyre pressure sensor. The tyre pressure and the tyre temperature appear in the on-board computer (/ page 340). If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tyre temperature is excessive, you will be warned with display messages (/ page 423) or the h warning lamp in the instrument cluster (/ page 445).
The tyre pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation. In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. You can, however, also update the reference val- ues by restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system manually (/ page 341).
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R incorrect reference values were taught in R sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign
object penetrating the tyre, for example R there is a malfunction caused by another
radio signal source
Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre pressure monitoring system
Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.
On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tyres One of the following displays appears: R Current tyre pressure and tyre temperature
of the individual wheels:
R Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving
R Tyre pressure monitor active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tyre pressures are already being moni- tored.
# Compare the tyre pressure with the recom- mended tyre pressure for the current operat-
ing condition (/ page 339). Additionally, observe the notes on cold tyres (/ page 338). % The values displayed in the on-board com- puter may deviate from those of the tyre pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high elevations, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressure.
Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem
Requirements: R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating status on all of the wheels (/ page 338).
Restart the tyre pressure monitoring system in the following situations: R The tyre pressure has changed. R The wheels or tyres have been changed or
newly fitted.
On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tyres
# Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Use current pressures as new reference values? message is shown in the multifunc- tion display.
# To restart, press Touch Control on the lefthand side of the steering wheel. The Tyre press. monitor restarted message is shown in the multifunction display. Current warning messages are deleted and the yellow h warning lamp goes out. After you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the cur- rent tyre pressures are within the specified range. The current tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.
Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic: R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 338)
Wheels and tyres 341
Tyre pressure loss warning system
Function of the tyre pressure loss warning system The tyre pressure loss warning system warns the driver by means of display messages when there is a severe tyre pressure loss.
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R incorrect reference values were taught in R sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign
object penetrating the tyre, for example R an even pressure loss on more than one tyre
occurs
The system has a restricted or delayed function particularly in the following situations: R poor ground conditions, e.g. snow or gravel R driving with snow chains R when adopting a very sporty driving style
with high cornering speeds or sudden accel- eration R driving with a very heavy or large trailer
342 Wheels and tyres
R driving with a high load
The tyre pressure loss warning system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation and to check it. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 338) R Display messages about the tyres
(/ page 423)
Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system
Requirements: R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating status on all wheels.
Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system in the following situations: R The tyre pressure has changed. R The wheels or tyres have been changed or
newly fitted.
On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tyres
# Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Run Flat Indicator active Restart mes- sage is shown in the multifunction display.
# To begin restart, press Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Tyre pressure now OK? message is shown in the multifunction display.
# Select Yes. # To confirm restart, press Touch Control on
the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Run Flat Indicator restarted message is shown in the multifunction display. After you have driven for a few minutes, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressures of all the tyres. Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic: R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 338)
Wheel change Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing tyres
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
& WARNING Risk of injury through incor- rect sizes of wheels and tyres
If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are fit- ted, the wheel brakes or components in the brake system and in the wheel suspension may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tyres with
those that fulfil the specifications of the original part. For wheels, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Type
For tyres, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Manufacturer R Type
& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed- ing the specified tyre load-bearing capa- city or the permissible speed rating
Exceeding the load-bearing capacity of the tyres can lead to tyre damage and could cause the tyres to explode. # Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity
rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.
* NOTE Vehicle and tyre damage through tyre types and sizes that have not been approved
For safety reasons, only use tyres, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. These tyres are specially adapted to the active safety systems, such as ABS, ESP® and 4MATIC, and marked as follows: R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(run-flat tyres only for certain wheels) R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tyres)
Otherwise, certain properties, such as han- dling characteristics, vehicle noise emis- sions, consumption, etc. could be adversely affected. Furthermore, other tyre sizes could result in the tyres rubbing against the body and axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to the tyre or the vehicle.
Wheels and tyres 343
Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea- ded tyres
Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor rec- ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ- ous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. For this reason driving safety cannot be guar- anteed. # Do not use used tyres if you have no
information about their previous usage.
* NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage when driving over obstacles
Large wheels have a smaller section width. As the section width decreases, the risk of wheels and tyres being damaged when driv- ing over obstacles increases.
344 Wheels and tyres
# Avoid obstacles or drive especially care- fully.
# Reduce your speed when driving over kerbs, speed bumps, manhole covers and potholes.
# Avoid particularly high kerbs.
* NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage when parking on kerbs or in potholes
Parking on kerbs or in potholes may damage the wheels and tyres. # If possible, park only on flat surfaces. # Avoid kerbs and potholes when parking.
* NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tyre-fitting tools
Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve. The tools could damage the electronic com- ponent parts.
# Have the tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop only.
* NOTE Damage to summer tyres at low ambient temperatures
At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tyres, caus- ing permanent damage to the tyre. # At temperatures below 7 °C use i
M+S tyres.
Accessory parts which are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which are not used correctly, can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and enquire about: R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations
& WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tyres
The special tyre tread in combination with the optimised tyre compound means that the risk of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is increased. In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tyre running temperature. # Switch on the ESP® and adapt your
driving style accordingly. # Use i M+S tyres at outside temper-
atures of less than 10 °C. # Only use the tyres for their intended
purpose.
Observe the following when selecting, fitting and replacing tyres: R Country-specific requirements for tyre
approval that define a specific tyre type for your vehicle.
R Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial.
R Only use tyres and wheels of the same type (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) and the same make.
R Only fit wheels of the same size on one axle (left and right). It is only permissible to fit a different wheel size in the event of a flat tyre in order to drive to the specialist workshop.
R Do not make any modifications to the brake system, the wheels or the tyres. The use of shims or brake dust shields is not permitted and may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit.
R Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tyre pres- sure monitoring system.
R At temperatures below 7 °C use winter tyres or all-season tyres marked i M+S for all wheels.
Winter tyres provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. R For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same tread. R Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres fitted. If the tyre's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision. R Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km. R Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. R When replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteris- tics, e.g. winter tyres.
Wheels and tyres 345
% You can permanently limit the maximum speed for driving with winter tyres (/ page 198).
For more information on wheels and tyres, con- tact a qualified specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 338) R Tyre pressure table (/ page 339) R Notes on the emergency spare wheel
(/ page 353)
Notes on interchanging wheels
& WARNING Risk of injury through differ- ent wheel sizes
Interchanging the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics. The disk brakes or wheel suspension compo- nents may also be damaged.
346 Wheels and tyres
# Only interchange the front and rear wheels if the wheels and tyres have the same dimensions.
Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid. The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ: R front wheels wear more on the tyre shoulder R rear wheels wear more in the centre of the
tyre Do not drive with tyres that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel size, you can interchange the wheels every 5000 to 10,000 km, depending on the wear. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained for the wheels. Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing so (/ page 347).
Notes on storing wheels When storing wheels, observe the following notes: R After removing wheels, store them in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tyres from contact with oil,
grease or fuel.
Overview of the tyre-change tool kit
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
* NOTE Plug-in hybrid # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi- cles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit.
For more information on which tyre-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. You require the following tools, for example, to change a wheel: R Jack R Chock R Wheel wrench R Centring pin
% The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg. The maximum load capacity of the jack can be found on the sticker affixed to the jack. The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified spe- cialist workshop.
The tyre-change tool kit is located in tool bag 1 in the load compartment. % Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
tool bag may be located in other positions in the load compartment.
The tool bag contains: R Jack R Gloves R Wheel wrench R Centring pin R Folding chock R Ratchet for jack
Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change
Requirements: R The vehicle is not on a slope.
R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground.
R The required tyre-change tool kit is available.
% If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyrechange tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools.
# Apply the electric parking brake manually. # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead
position. # Vehicles with manual transmission:
engage first or reverse gear. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift to position j. # Switch off the engine. # Make sure that the engine cannot be started. # Place chocks or other suitable items under
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago- nally opposite the wheel you wish to change. # If necessary, remove the wheel trim/hub caps (/ page 347). # Raise the vehicle (/ page 348).
Wheels and tyres 347 Removing and fitting the wheel trim/hub caps Requirements: R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change
(/ page 347). Wheel trim The wheel trim covers the wheel bolts on vehi- cles with steel wheels. Before unscrewing the wheel bolts, remove the wheel trim.
# To remove: using both hands, carefully reach into two wheel trim openings and remove the wheel trim.
348 Wheels and tyres
Plastic hub cap # To remove: turn the centre cover of the hub
cap anti-clockwise and remove the hub cap. # To fit: make sure that the centre cover of the
hub cap is turned anti-clockwise. # Position the hub cap and turn the centre
cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly. Aluminium hub cap
# To remove: position socket 2 from the tyrechange tool kit on hub cap 1.
# Position wheel spanner 3 on socket 2.
# Using wheel spanner 3, turn hub cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it.
# To fit: follow the instructions above in reverse order.
% Specified tightening torque: 25 Nm.
Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel
Requirements: R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel
change (/ page 347). R The wheel trims and hub caps have been
removed (/ page 347).
Important notes on using the jack: R Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has
been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. R The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for mainte- nance work under the vehicle.
R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay.
R The foot of the jack must be positioned verti- cally under the jack support point.
Wheels and tyres 349
Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised: R Never place your hands or feet under the
vehicle. R Never lie under the vehicle. R Do not start the engine and do not release
the electric parking brake. R Do not open or close any doors or the tail-
gate.
# Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.
Position of jack support points
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.
350 Wheels and tyres
# Only position the jack at the appropri- ate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle.
* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi- cle raised. # The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup- port points. # Take the ratchet out of the tyre-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.
the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. # Turn ratchet 3 until the tyre is raised a max- imum of 3 cm from the ground. # Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 350).
# Position support 2 of jack 4 on jack sup- port point 1.
% If there is a total loss of pressure in a tyre, it may be possible that the jack cannot be positioned at jack support point 1. In this case, unload the vehicle.
# Turn ratchet 3 clockwise until support 2 sits completely on jack support point 1 and
Removing a wheel Requirements: R The vehicle is raised (/ page 348).
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake disks, as this could impair the level of comfort when braking.
* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts
# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.
# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com- pletely.
# Screw centring pin 1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.
# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com- pletely.
# Remove the wheel and, if necessary, store it in the load compartment.
# Notes on removing an emergency spare wheel (/ page 353).
Fitting a new wheel Requirements: R The wheel is removed (/ page 350).
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel
Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/ wheel nuts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driv- ing.
Wheels and tyres 351
# Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads,
contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. # Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam- aged hub threads replaced. # Do not continue driving.
# Observe the information on the choice of tyres (/ page 342).
For tyres with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tyre indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direction of rotation when fitting. # Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the cen-
tring pin and push it on. # Observe the notes on fitting an emergency
spare wheel (/ page 353).
352 Wheels and tyres
& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
# Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 342).
# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by MercedesBenz and for the wheel in question.
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight.
# Unscrew and remove the centring pin. # Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
tight. # Lower the vehicle (/ page 352).
Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change Requirements: R The new wheel has been fitted
(/ page 351).
* NOTE Damage to the emergency spare wheel when lowering the vehicle
Lowering the vehicle without previously inflating the emergency collapsible spare wheel can damage its rim. # Inflate the emergency collapsible spare
wheel using the tyre inflation compres- sor before lowering the vehicle.
# To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the let- ters "AB" are visible and turn anti-clockwise.
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with an initial maximum force of 80 Nm.
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with the specified tightening torque of 130 Nm.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect tightening torque
The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque.
# Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.
# If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening tor- que checked immediately.
# Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
% The following does not apply if the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.
# Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warning system: restart the tyre pressure loss warn- ing system (/ page 342).
# Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: restart the tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 341).
Emergency spare wheel Notes on the emergency spare wheel
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions
The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle. To prevent hazardous situations: # Drive carefully. # Never fit more than one emergency
spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size. # Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel briefly. # Do not deactivate ESP®. # Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist work-
Wheels and tyres 353
shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions.
% The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the load com- partment.
Observe the following notes on removing an emergency spare wheel: R Before stowing the emergency spare wheel,
make sure there is no air left in the tyre. If necessary, allow the air to escape. R To release air from the tyre: remove the valve cap of the tyre. R Press down the metal insert in the valve using a pointed object, e.g. a pen. R Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
Observe the following notes on fitting an emer- gency spare wheel: R Check the tyre pressure of the emergency
spare wheel fitted. Correct the pressure as necessary.
354 Wheels and tyres
R The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel fitted is 80 km/h.
R Do not fit the emergency spare wheel with snow chains.
R Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
% Vehicles with a tyre pressure loss warn- ing system: if an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system cannot function reliably. Only restart the sys- tem again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: if an emergency spare wheel is fit- ted, the tyre pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.
Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 338)
R Tyre pressure table (/ page 339) R Notes on fitting tyres (/ page 342)
Inflating the emergency spare wheel
* NOTE Overheating due to the tyre infla- tion compressor running too long
# Do not run the tyre inflation compres- sor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.
Requirements: Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker of the emergency spare wheel and on the tyre inflation compressor. # Remove the sticker with the label 80 km/h
from the tyre inflation compressor housing and affix it to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. # Remove the tyre inflation compressor from the stowage space under the luggage com- partment floor (/ page 318).
# Pull filler hose 1 and plug 3 out of the tyre inflation compressor housing.
# Insert plug 7 of filler hose 1 in the socket on the tyre inflation compressor and then turn it until plug 7 engages.
# Unscrew the cap from the valve on the emer- gency spare wheel.
# Screw union nut 2 of filler hose 1 onto valve.
# Make sure on and off switch 4 of the tyre inflation compressor is set to 0.
# Insert plug 3 in a socket in your vehicle. R Cigarette lighter socket
R 12 V socket: (/ page 119)
R Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter in the Digital Owner's Manual
R Observe the notes on sockets: (/ page 119)
# Press the start/stop button once to switch on the power supply (/ page 152).
# Press on and off switch 4 on the tyre infla- tion compressor to I. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. The tyre pressure appears on manometer 5.
# Pump the tyre to the specified tyre pressure.
% The specified tyre pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel.
# When the specified tyre pressure has been reached, press on and off switch 4 on the tyre inflation compressor to 0. The tyre inflation compressor is switched off.
# Press the start/stop button to switch off the power supply.
# If the tyre pressure is higher than the speci- fied pressure, press pressure release valve
button 6 until the correct tyre pressure has been reached. # Unscrew union nut 2 of filler hose 1 from the valve. # Screw the valve cap of the emergency spare wheel onto the valve again. # Stow filler hose 1 and plug 3 in the lower section of the tyre inflation compressor housing. # Stow the tyre inflation compressor in the vehicle.
Collapsible spare wheel Notes on the collapsible spare wheel
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions
The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle.
Wheels and tyres 355
To prevent hazardous situations: # Drive carefully. # Never fit more than one emergency
spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size. # Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel briefly. # Do not deactivate ESP®. # Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist work- shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions.
% The collapsible spare wheel is secured in the collapsible spare wheel bag in the load com- partment.
% The collapsible spare wheel is only available in certain countries.
The collapsible spare wheel is an emergency spare wheel which is only suitable for use for a limited period of time and in a restricted manner
356 Wheels and tyres
in the event of a flat tyre (e.g. until the nearest workshop). The tyre sidewalls are folded when in transport mode. Before using the collapsible spare wheel, inflate it using the accompanying compressor. Check the tyre pressure of the collapsible spare wheel once fitted and, if necessary, adjust. The maximum permissible speed with a collapsi- ble spare wheel fitted is 80 km/h. Do not fit the collapsible spare wheel with snow chains. Replace the collapsible spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. % Vehicles with a tyre pressure loss warn-
ing system: if a collapsible spare wheel is fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system cannot function reliably. Only restart the sys- tem again when the collapsible spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: if a collapsible spare wheel is fitted the tyre pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the system
may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the collapsible spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 338) R Tyre pressure table (/ page 339)
Inflating the collapsible spare wheel Requirements: R Mount the collapsible spare wheel as descri-
bed (/ page 351). R Remove the tyre inflation compressor from
the stowage space under the load compart- ment floor (/ page 318).
* NOTE Damage to the emergency spare wheel when lowering the vehicle
Lowering the vehicle without previously inflating the emergency collapsible spare wheel can damage its rim.
# Inflate the emergency collapsible spare wheel using the tyre inflation compres- sor before lowering the vehicle.
* NOTE Overheating due to the tyre infla- tion compressor running too long
# Do not run the tyre inflation compres- sor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.
# Pull connector 4 and the hose out of the housing.
# Unscrew the cap from the valve on the col- lapsible spare wheel.
# Screw union nut 1 of the hose onto the valve.
% Make sure on and off switch 3 of the tyre inflation compressor is set to 0.
# Insert plug 4 into the cigarette lighter socket or into a 12 V socket (/ page 119) in your vehicle.
# Switch on the power supply (/ page 152). # Press on and off switch 3 on the tyre infla-
tion compressor to I. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. # The tyre pressure is shown on manometer 2. # Pump the tyre to the specified tyre pressure. The specified tyre pressure is printed on the yellow label of the collapsible spare wheel. # When the specified tyre pressure has been reached, press on and off switch 3 on the tyre inflation compressor to 0.
# If the tyre pressure is higher than the speci- fied pressure, press pressure release valve button 5 until the correct tyre pressure has been reached.
Wheels and tyres 357
358 Technical data
Notes on technical data
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
* NOTE Plug-in hybrid # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
The technical data was determined in accord- ance with EU Directives. The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from a MercedesBenz Service Centre. Only for certain countries: you can find vehi- cle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These papers are included with the vehicle.
On-board electronics Notes on tampering with the engine elec- tronics
* NOTE Premature wear through improper maintenance
Improper maintenance may cause vehicle components to wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalida- ted. # Always have work on the engine elec-
tronics and related components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Two-way radios Notes on fitting two-way radios
& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios
If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofit- ted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with
the vehicle electronics and jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. # You should have all work on electrical
and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident from incor- rect operation of two-way radios
If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is true in the following situations, in particular: R The two-way radio is not connected to an
exterior aerial. R The exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or
is not a low-reflection aerial.
This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-reflection exterior aerial
fitted at a qualified specialist workshop.
# When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior aerial.
* NOTE Invalidation of the operating per- mit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use
The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible out-
put power in these frequency bands. # Only use approved aerial positions.
1 Front roof area 2 Rear roof area 3 Rear wings On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, fit- ting an aerial to the front or rear roof area is not permitted.
Technical data 359
On the rear wings, it is recommended that you fit the aerial on the side of the vehicle closest to the centre of the road. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles "EMCs for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and aerial con- nectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when fitting. Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the values in the following table.
360 Technical data
Frequency band and maximum transmission output
Frequency band
Maximum transmis- sion output
Short wave 3 - 54 MHz
100 W
4 m frequency band 74 - 88 MHz
30 W
2 m frequency band 144 - 174 MHz
50 W
Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) 380 - 460 MHz
10 W
70 cm frequency band 420 - 450 MHz
35 W
Two-way radio (2G/3G/4G)
10 W
The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R two-way radios with a maximum transmission
output of up to 100 mW R RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA) R mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the follow- ing frequency bands: R Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) R 70 cm frequency band R 2G/3G/4G
Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app.
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview Vehicle identification plate
Regulatory radio identification of small components Manufacturer information about radio-based vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identification" in the
Technical data 361
5 Maximum permissible gross weight of vehi- cle combination (kg) (only for specific coun- tries)
6 Maximum permissible front axle load (kg) 7 Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg) 8 Paint code % The data shown in the illustration is example
data.
Vehicle identification plate (example: Kuwait) 1 Vehicle manufacturer 2 Place of manufacture 3 Manufacturing date 4 Vehicle model 5 VIN
Vehicle identification plate (example: all other countries) 1 Vehicle manufacturer 2 EU general operating permit number (only for certain countries) 3 VIN (vehicle identification number) 4 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight (kg)
362 Technical data VIN and engine number
Operating fluids Notes on operating fluids
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.
1 Engine number stamped into the crankcase 2 VIN (vehicle identification number) stamped
into the crossmember 3 VIN (vehicle identification number) as a label
at the lower edge of the windscreen The VIN as a label at the lower edge of the wind- screen 3 is only available in some countries. Further information can be obtained at a quali- fied specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of injury from operating fluids harmful to your health
Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm- ful to your health. # Observe the text on the original con-
tainers when using, storing or disposing of operating fluids. # Always store operating fluids sealed in their original containers. # Always keep children away from operat- ing fluids.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution due to disposing of operating fluids in a non-environmentally responsi- ble manner
Operating fluids include the following: R fuels R exhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.
AdBlue® R lubricants
Incorrect disposal of operating fluids can cause considerable damage to the environ- ment. # Dispose of operating fluids in an envi-
ronmentally responsible manner.
Operating fluids include the following: R fuels R DeNOx agent AdBlue® for exhaust gas after-
treatment R lubricants R coolant
R brake fluid R windscreen washer fluid R climate control system refrigerant
Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. The operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Further information on approved operating flu- ids: R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids by entering the designation - at https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo App R at a qualified specialist workshop
& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel
Fuels are highly flammable. # Fire, naked flames, smoking and crea-
tion of sparks must be avoided. # Switch off the ignition and, if available,
the stationary heater, before and while refuelling the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapour. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during
the refuelling process.
If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:
Technical data 363
# Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.
# If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thor- oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.
# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten- tion immediately. Do not induce vomit- ing.
# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.
Flexible-fuel vehicles can be refuelled with the following fuel types: R unleaded petrol R E85 fuel R a mixture of E85 fuel and unleaded petrol
Flexible-fuel vehicles can be identified by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Depending on the country, the fuels you can use in your vehicle may differ from the information in the Owner's Manual. The fuels that have been
364 Technical data
approved for your vehicle can be found on the instruction label on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Fuel Information on fuel quality for vehicles with a petrol engine Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 362).
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free
spark-ignition engine fuel that conforms to European EN 228, or an equivalent specification. Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suita- ble for use with E10 fuel.
# See the information label in fuel filler flap for other compatible fuels .
Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Regular petrol with an octane number
lower than 91 RON R Petrol with more than 3% methanol by
volume, e.g. M15, M30 R Petrol with additives containing metal
If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The following compatibility indications for fuel apply to your vehicle:
1 For petrol with maximum 5% ethanol by vol- ume
2 For petrol with maximum 10% ethanol by vol- ume
The compatibility indications for fuel on the vehi- cle according to the European standard EN 16942 can be found on the information label in the fuel filler flap or on the fuel dispenser or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle throughout Europe. If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul- phur, this can produce unpleasant odours.
The recommended octane number for your vehi- cle can be found on the information label in the fuel filler flap. If the recommended fuel is not available, you may also temporarily use regular unleaded petrol with an octane number of at least 91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel con- sumption. Never refuel using petrol with an even lower RON. Further information on fuel can be obtained at a filling station or a qualified specialist workshop.
Information on additives in petrol Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 362).
* NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives
Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring. # Only add cleaning additives recommen-
ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brand-name fuels with additives. In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a Mercedes-Benz service centre, mix the fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indicated on the tank.
Information on fuel grades for vehicles with a diesel engine
General notes Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 362).
& WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. # Never refuel using petrol in diesel
engines. # Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.
Technical data 365
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel
fuel that conforms to European stand- ard EN 590, or an equivalent specifica- tion. In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 50 ppm.
Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R petrol R marine diesel R heating oil R pure bio-diesel fuel or vegetable oil R paraffin or kerosene
If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch the ignition on.
366 Technical data # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The following compatibility indication for fuel applies to your vehicle:
1 For diesel fuel with a maximum of 7% by vol- ume bio-diesel (fatty acid methyl ester)
According to European standard EN 16942 you can find the compatibility indications at the fol- lowing locations: R on the vehicle on the information label in the
fuel filler flap (/ page 171) R on the fuel pump or pump nozzle suitable for
your vehicle throughout Europe
Information on low outside temperatures Refuel your vehicle with as much winter diesel fuel as possible at the beginning of winter. Before changing over to winter diesel fuel, the fuel tank should be empty, if possible. When first refuelling with winter diesel fuel, only refuel using a small amount, e.g. to reserve level. The fuel tank can be filled as usual when next refuel- ling. Further information on fuel can be obtained at a filling station or a qualified specialist workshop.
Tank content and reserve fuel The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment.
Total capacity and reserve fuel tank
Model
Total capacity
A 200 4MATIC A 200 d 4MATIC A 220 d 4MATIC A 250 4MATIC
51.0 litres
A 220 d A 250
43.0 litres or
51.0 litres
All other models
43.0 litres
Model
of which reserve fuel
All models
5.0 litres
AdBlue® (vehicles with a diesel engine only) Notes on AdBlue® Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 362).
AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for the NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It may be improper or punishable in some coun- tries to operate a vehicle that uses no AdBlue® or one that does not comply with the specifica- tions of these operating instructions.
* NOTE Malfunctions due to the dilution of AdBlue® or the use of additive-enhanced AdBlue®
The function of the NOx exhaust gas after- treatment can be impaired by the use of unsuitable denoxification agents. # Only use AdBlue® in accordance with
ISO 22241. # Do not dilute AdBlue® with water. # Do not use additive-enhanced AdBlue®.
* NOTE Damage and malfunctions due to impurities in AdBlue®
Consequences of impurities in AdBlue®: R increased emission values R damage to the catalytic converter R NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment malfunc-
tions
# Avoid impurities in AdBlue®.
AdBlue® residues crystallise after a period of time, and contaminate the surfaces with which they come into contact. Clean the dirty surfaces with water as soon as possible. When you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may escape. Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that may be released. Only fill the AdBlue® tank in well-venti- lated areas.
Technical data 367
AdBlue® filling capacity and consumption
Model
Total capacity
All models
23.8 litres
AdBlue® consumption The average AdBlue® consumption is between 1% and 5% of fuel consumption. Like fuel con- sumption, AdBlue® consumption is highly dependent upon driving style and operating con- ditions. For this reason, your vehicle's actual consumption figures under day-to-day operating conditions may differ from the consumption fig- ures calculated. The frequency at which you will have to top up AdBlue® will also vary. Have the AdBlue® supply checked at a qualified specialist workshop before making journeys outside of Europe. Before a longer stay outside of Europe, consult a qualified specialist workshop. AdBlue® range and fill level The AdBlue® fill level and range can be displayed via the on-board computer. The AdBlue® range shown depends strongly on the driving style and operating conditions. The actual range can
368 Technical data therefore deviate from the range currently dis- played in the on-board computer. The informa- tion supplied in the Owner's Manual regarding the reserve quantity at the first display warning and on the minimum top-up quantity when the fuel tank is empty is also to be understood as guide values.
Engine oil Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 362).
* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi- tives
# Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifi- cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.
# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.
# Do not use additives. # Have the engine oil renewed at regular
intervals.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use engine oils approved by MercedesBenz. Petrol engines: for certain countries, different engine oils can be used in conjunction with reduced maintenance intervals.
% Further information on different engine oils can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Quality and capacity of engine oil Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.
Petrol engines
A 160 A 180, manual trans- mission A 200, manual trans- mission All other models
MB-Freigabe or MBApproval
229.51, 229.52, 229.61, 229.71*,
229.72
229.51, 229.52, 229.61 229.71*
Diesel engines
MB-Freigabe or MBApproval
All models
229.52, 229.61, 229.71*, 229.72
* recommended for lowest possible fuel con- sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes) To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifi- cations marked in the table for the lowest SAE viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed. % If the engine oils listed in the table are not
available, you may add a maximum of 1.0 litre of the following engine oils once only. Engine oils for one-time filling only in exceptional cases: R Vehicles with a petrol engine: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.31 or ACEA C3
R vehicles with a diesel engine: ACEA C3
Engine oil filling capacity
Model
Capacity
A 160 A 180 A 200 A 200 4MATIC
5.1 litres
A 250 A 250 4MATIC
5.5 litres
All other models
6.8 litres
The specified filling capacity refers to an oil change with the oil filter.
Notes on brake fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 362).
Technical data 369
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapour pockets forming in the brake sys- tem
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake sys- tem when the brakes are applied hard. This impairs the braking effect. # Have the brake fluid renewed at the
specified intervals.
Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use a brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.
Coolant Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 362).
370 Technical data
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from antifreeze
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart- ment, it may ignite. # Allow the engine to cool down before
you top up the antifreeze. # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out
next to the filler opening. # Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from
component parts before starting the vehicle.
* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool- ant
# Only use coolant that has been pre- mixed with the required antifreeze pro- tection.
Information on coolant is available at the fol- lowing locations: R in the Mercedes-Benz Specification for
Operating Fluids 310.1 - at https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R at a qualified specialist workshop
* NOTE Overheating at high outside tem- peratures
If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro- tected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures. # Always use coolant approved by
Mercedes-Benz. # Observe the instructions in the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper- ating Fluids 310.1.
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system: R a minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection
down to approximately -37°C) R a maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -45°C)
Notes on windscreen washer fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 362).
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windscreen washer
concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.
* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windscreen washer fluid
Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may damage the plastic surface of the exterior lighting. # Only use windscreen washer fluids
which are also suitable for use on plas- tic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.
* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windscreen washer fluids
# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win- terFit with other windscreen washer flu- ids.
Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Other- wise, the fill level sensor may be triggered erro- neously. Recommended windscreen washer fluid: R above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
Technical data 371
For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa- tion on the antifreeze container. Mix washer fluid with windscreen washer fluid all year round.
Height when opened and headroom
Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions
The heights specified may vary as a result of the following factors: R tyres R load R condition of the suspension R optional equipment
Model
A 220 d A 220 d 4MATIC A 250 A 250 4MATIC All other models
1 Height when opened
2 Head- room
2002 mm 1856 mm
1997 mm 1851 mm
372 Technical data
Vehicle dimensions
All models Vehicle length Vehicle width including out- side mirrors Vehicle width excluding out- side mirrors Wheelbase
Vehicle height Model A 220 d A 220 d 4MATIC A 250 A 250 4MATIC All other models
4419 mm 1992 mm 1796 mm 2729 mm
1445 mm
1440 mm
Weights and loads
Please observe the following notes for the speci- fied vehicle data: R Items of optional equipment increase the
unladen weight and reduce the payload. R Vehicle-specific weight information can be
found on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 360).
Roof load Model
Maximum roof load
All models
75 kg
Mounting dimensions of the trailer hitch
Trailer hitch General notes on the trailer hitch
Modifications to the engine cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle model. The retrofitting of a trailer hitch is only permissi- ble if a towing capacity is specified in your vehi- cle documents. Further information can be obtained at a quali- fied specialist workshop.
1 Fastening points 2 Overhang dimension 3 Rear axle centre line
The overhang dimension and fastening points are valid for a trailer hitch installed at the fac- tory.
Model All models
2 Over- hang dimen-
sion 888 mm
Towing capacity The tongue weight is not included in the towing capacity.
Technical data 373
Towing capacity, braked (at a minimum startoff gradeability of 8%)
Model
Towing capacity, braked
A 160
1300 kg
A 180 (manual and automatic transmis- sion) A 180 d (manual and automatic transmis- sion)
1400 kg
A 200 4MATIC A 200 d 4MATIC A 220 d 4MATIC A 250 4MATIC
1800 kg
All other models
1600 kg
Towing capacity, braked (at a minimum startoff gradeability of 12%)
Model
Towing capacity, braked
A 160
1300 kg
A 180 (manual and automatic transmis- sion) A 180 d (manual and automatic transmis- sion)
1400 kg
A 200 4MATIC A 200 d 4MATIC A 220 d 4MATIC A 250 4MATIC
1800 kg
All other models
1600 kg
374 Technical data
Towing capacity, unbraked
Model
Towing capacity, unbraked
A 160 A 180, manual trans- mission A 200, manual trans- mission
675 kg
A 180, automatic transmission
680 kg
A 180 d, manual transmission A 200 d, manual transmission
730 kg
A 180 d, automatic transmission A 200 d, automatic transmission
745 kg
A 200, automatic transmission
685 kg
Model
A 200 4MATIC A 250 All other models
Towing capacity, unbraked 725 kg
750 kg
Maximum tongue weight and load capacity
* NOTE Damage caused by the trailer coming loose
If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer may come loose. # The tongue weight must not be below
50 kg. # Use a tongue weight that is as close as
possible to the maximum permissible tongue weight.
* NOTE Damage caused by the bicycle rack coming loose
When using a bicycle rack, both the maximal tongue weight and the maximal load capacity should be observed. # Do not exceed the permissible load
capacity.
Observe the additional notes on load capacity (/ page 243).
Tongue weight Model
Maximum tongue weight
All other models
80 kg
Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.
Load capacity Model
Maximum load
All models
Permissible rear axle load (trailer operation)
Model
A 160 A 180, manual trans- mission A 200, manual trans- mission A 180 d, automatic transmission A 180 d, manual transmission A 200 d, automatic transmission A 220 d A 200 d, manual transmission A 200 4MATIC A 200 d 4MATIC
Axle load 980 kg 995 kg
1000 kg 1005 kg 1015 kg
1020 kg 1040 kg 1065 kg
Model A 220 d 4MATIC A 250 4MATIC All other models
Axle load 1050 kg 1030 kg 990 kg
Technical data 375
376 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Introduction
Information about display messages Display messages appear on the multifunction display. Display messages with graphical symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols on the multifunction display. The multifunction display shows high-priority dis- play messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please act in accordance with the display mes- sages and follow the additional notes in the Owner's Manual. For some display messages, a symbol will also be shown: R Õ Further information R ¨ Hide display message
With the left-hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the left or right. Press the Õ symbol to show further infor-
mation on the media display. Press the ¨ symbol to hide the display message. You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing the P back button or the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hid- den. The multifunction display shows these dis- play messages continuously until the cause of the display message has been rectified.
Calling up saved display messages On-board computer: 4 Service 5 1 message If there are no display messages, No messages will appear on the multifunction display. # Scroll through the display messages by swip-
ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # To exit the message memory: press the back button P.
Occupant safety Display messages
6
Restraint sys. malfunction Consult workshop
6
Front left malfunction Consult workshop (example)
6
Left windowbag malfunction Consult workshop (example)
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 377
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 40). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. * The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 40). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. * The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 40). & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. # Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
378 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual
Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult build is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.
& WARNING Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabled If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, espe- cially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. # Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. # Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 50). # If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The front passenger airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations: R even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the
front passenger seat R even when the front passenger seat is not occupied
The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.
Display messages PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 379
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. # Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 50). # If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The PRESAFE® functions are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
380 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Key Display messages
Á
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Have the key replaced. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Replace key
Á
* The key battery is discharged. # Replace the battery (/ page 77).
Change key batteries
Á
Key not detected (white dis- play message)
* The key is currently undetected. # Change the location of the key in the vehicle. # If the key is still not recognised, place it in the slot for starting with the key (/ page 154).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 381
Display messages
Á
Key not detected (red dis- play message)
Á
Key being initialised Please wait Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The key cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine: R You can no longer start the engine. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle. # Ensure that the key is in the vehicle.
If the key detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source: # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 154). * The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new key. # Wait until processing is complete.
* Key detection is malfunctioning. # Change the location of the key in the vehicle. # Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 154).
382 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Lights Display messages
:
Left dipped beam (example)
:
Malfunction See Owner's Manual
:
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The corresponding light source is defective. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
or # Check whether you are permitted to replace the light source yourself (/ page 134). % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting
diodes in the light are faulty.
* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Vehicles with a trailer hitch: a fuse may have blown. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the fuses and replace them if necessary (/ page 333).
* The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Automatic driving lights inoperative
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 383
Display messages
:
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The active headlamps are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Light System inoperative
:
* You are driving without low-beam headlamps. # Turn the light switch to the L or à position.
Switch on headlamps
:
* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. # Turn the light switch to the à position.
Switch off lights
:
Intelligent Light System inoperative
* The Intelligent Light System is malfunctioning. The lighting system continues to function properly without the func- tions of the Intelligent Light System. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
384 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Adaptive Highbeam Assist inoperative
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 129). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist available again display message will appear. # Drive on # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again.
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, operate the high beam manually.
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 130). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus available again display message will appear. # Drive on # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 385
Display messages Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inoperative
Hazard warning lamps malfunctioning
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, operate the high beam manually.
* The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Climate control Display messages
&
inoperative See Owner's Man.
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The stationary heater is temporarily malfunctioning. # When the vehicle is stationary on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the stationary heater, waiting several minutes between each attempt. # If the stationary heater does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
386 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
&
inoperative Battery low
&
inoperative Refuel vehicle
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The on-board electrical system voltage is too low. The stationary heater has switched itself off. # Drive an extended distance until the battery has reached a sufficient charge level again.
* There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The stationary heater cannot be switched on. # Refuel the vehicle.
Vehicle Display messages
d
Vehicle is operational Switch off ignition before exiting
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state. # When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition, secure the vehicle against rolling away and take the key with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12V battery may discharge and starting the engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start).
Display messages
ï
Check trailer hitch lock
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 387
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked The trailer may become detached. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away. # Initiate a new swivel movement and do not re-couple the trailer until the warning/indicator lamp goes out.
# Initiate a new swivel movement (/ page 240). # When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.
If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked. # Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the
unlocked ball neck. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The trailer hitch will not be operational when the vehicle is stationary. # Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away. # If the ball neck has been folded in: unlock the ball neck (/ page 240). # Swivel the ball neck into the end position manually and let it engage. # If the ball neck has been folded out: unlock the ball neck (/ page 240).
388 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Head-up display currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Head-up display inoperative
Ù
Steering malfunction Increased physical effort See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Swivel the ball neck beneath the bumper manually and let it engage.
If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked. # Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the
unlocked ball neck. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The head-up display is temporarily unavailable. Possible causes: R malfunctions in the power supply R signal interference
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch the ignition off and on again. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The head-up display has an internal error. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
Display messages
Ù
Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual
Ù
Steering malfunction See Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 389
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The electric steering lock is malfunctioning. The steering may be locked by the electric steering lock.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
390 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
û
Before starting the engine, turn the steering wheel.
Active bonnet malfunction See Owner's Manual
C
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The electric steering lock could not unlock the steering. # Switch the ignition off. # To unlock the steering, move the steering wheel slightly to the left and right. # Switch the ignition back on.
* The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* At least one door is open. # Close all doors.
?
* The bonnet is open.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked The bonnet may open and block your view. # Never release the bonnet when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Close the bonnet.
Display messages
A
Anti-theft alarm system Malfunction
¥
Top up washer fluid Wiper malfunctioning
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 391
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The tailgate is open.
& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open.
# Close the tailgate. * The anti-theft alarm system is malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.
# Top up the washer fluid (/ page 305).
* The windscreen wiper is malfunctioning. # Restart the engine. If the display message still appears:
392 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine Display messages To switch off the engine, press the Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or 3 times. Cannot start engine See Owner's Manual
+
Top up coolant See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion. # Information about switching off the engine while driving (/ page 153).
* The vehicle cannot be started. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The coolant level is too low.
* NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant # Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.
# Add coolant (/ page 304). # Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
ÿ
Coolant Stop vehicle Switch engine off
ÿ
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 393
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The coolant is too hot. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine.
& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet If you open the bonnet when the engine has overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You could come into contact with hot gases. R You could come into contact with other hot, escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.
# Wait until the engine has cooled down. # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below 120°C. * There is a malfunction in the engine cooling system.
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.
394 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
æ
Reserve fuel level
!
Clean the fuel filter
¸
Replace air cleaner
Drive system Malfunction Visit workshop
Drive system Malfunction Stop Switch engine off
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.
* Vehicles with diesel engines: the fuel filter is dirty or the water in the fuel filter needs to be drained. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Vehicles with diesel engines: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The drive system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The drive system is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 395
Transmission Display messages Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position To shift out of P or N, depress brake and start engine
Apply brake to select D or R
Apply brake to select R
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* It is possible to select the park position j only if the vehicle is stationary. # Depress the brake pedal to stop. # Shift the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary.
* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h, k or neutral i.
* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Start the vehicle. # Change the transmission position.
* You have attempted to select transmission position h or k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h or k.
* You have attempted to select transmission position k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position k.
396 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Risk of vehicle rolling Driver door open and transmission not in P N permanently active Risk of vehicle rolling
Without changing gear, consult workshop
Reversing not poss. Consult workshop Transmission Malfunction Stop
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected. The vehicle may roll away. # Select park position j when switching off the vehicle.
* Neutral i has been selected while the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving. # Depress the brake pedal to stop. # Shift the transmission to park position j while the vehicle is stationary. # To continue driving, select transmission position h or k.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position. # If transmission position h is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmis- sion position. # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position k. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral i automatically. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Depress the brake pedal. # Engage park position j.
Display messages Transmission Malfunction
d
Trans. oil overheated Drive on with care Parking lock inoperative Apply the parking brake Teaching in transmission Operate selector lever Brake for XX seconds Risk of vehicle rolling
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 397
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The cause could be an overheated clutch or blocked gears. # Let the transmission cool down. # If the display message still appears following a restart, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The transmission is overheating. When the display message is active, start-up and driving characteristics may be temporarily impaired. # Drive at low engine speed. # Avoid sporty driving. # Before pulling away on uphill gradients, let the transmission cool down until the display message disappears.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The park position j cannot be selected. # Park the vehicle safely. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
* The transmission is being taught in. There is a risk of the vehicle rolling. # Depress and hold the brake pedal until the teach-in process has been completed. The electric parking brake is also applied automatically during the teach-in process. # Switch on the ignition. # Select park position j, transmission position k or neutral i.
398 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply parking brake See Owner's Manual Teaching in transmission complete Transmission Malfunction Visit workshop Depress clutch fully to start engine
Clutch overheated Avoid pulling away until the warning goes out
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The transmission position cannot be reliably identified. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
* The transmission's teach-in process is complete. All transmission positions can be selected again.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* You have attempted to start the engine without depressing the clutch pedal. # Depress the clutch pedal and then start the engine.
* The engine has stalled while the vehicle was pulling away, e.g. because the clutch pedal was released too quickly. # Depress the clutch pedal again. The engine will start automatically. # Slowly release the clutch pedal to pull away.
* The clutch is under considerable load and is overheating. Avoid frequent pulling away and driving at walking pace over longer distances. # Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and leave the engine running. The clutch will cool more quickly when the engine is running. or
Display messages Auxiliary battery malfunction (white display mes- sage) Auxiliary battery malfunction (red display message)
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 399
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # If possible, continue driving at a steady speed and remove your foot from the clutch pedal. Do not let the clutch drag. The clutch will cool while the vehicle is in motion. When the clutch has cooled down, the display message will disappear.
* Vehicles with transmission: There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery. Vehicles with automatic transmission: The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Vehicles with automatic transmission: Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the engine. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
* Vehicles with transmission: There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery. Vehicles with automatic transmission: The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Vehicles with automatic transmission: Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the engine. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
400 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Brakes Display messages
!
Parking brake See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 183).
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunction- ing. To release: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 183). or # Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 182). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 401
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is mal- functioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.
To apply: # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 183).
To release: # Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red ! indicator lamp continues to flash: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the state of charge is too low: # Charge the 12 V battery.
To apply:
402 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Switch the ignition off. The electric parking brake will be applied automatically.
If you do not want the electric parking brake to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed, leave the ignition switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised. If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 183).
If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
To release: # If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,
release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 183).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 403
Display messages
!
Release parking brake
!
Turn on the ignition to release the parking brake Risk of vehicle rolling away Parking brake not applied See Owner's Manual
J
Brake immediately
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red ! indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 182). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 183). # Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake. # Release the electric parking brake manually. * The red ! indicator lamp is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off. # Switch on the ignition.
* Vehicles with manual transmission: the electric parking brake has not been applied and you open the driver's door. # Apply the electric parking brake.
* Vehicles with manual transmission: a malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated. A horn may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the horn will become louder. You cannot start the engine.
404 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
J
Check brake fluid level
Check brake pads See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the display message disappears. You can restart the engine.
* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv-
ing. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not top up the brake fluid.
* The brakepads have reached the wear limit. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving systems
Display messages
ë
Off
é
ATTENTION ASSIST inoperative
é
ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 405
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled. # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 190).
* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 193). # If necessary, take a break.
406 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
h
- - - km/h Cruise control inoperative
Cruise control and Limiter inoperative Cruise control off
È
- - - km/h Limiter passive
Limiter inoperative
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 196).
* Cruise control is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 195).
* The limiter can temporarily not be engaged. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the limiter is switched to passive mode (/ page 196).
* The limiter is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 407
Display messages
ç
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 201).
- - - km/h
ç
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 198).
suspended
ç
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 201).
Off Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 198). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on or
408 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Active Distance Assist inoperative
Active Distance Assist available again Speed Limit Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Speed Limit Assist inoperative
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again. # Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 201).
* Speed Limit Assist is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
* Speed Limit Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 409
Display messages
ð
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* You have exceeded the maximum permissible speed (for certain countries only). # Drive more slowly.
Maximum speed exceeded Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Active Steering Assist inoperative
* You have reached the maximum permissible stored speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.
* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 205). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on # Check the tyre pressure if necessary.
* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
410 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Active Steering Assist currently unavailable due to multiple emergency stops Beginning emergency stop
Ø
Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Traffic Sign Assist inoperative
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. Active Steering Assist is available once more.
* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is being initiated (/ page 207). # Put your hands back on the steering wheel. You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 205). You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time. # Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions.
* Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on
* Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 411
Display messages Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Blind Spot Assist inoperative Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 217). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
* Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable. # Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
412 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative
Active Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 217). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. * Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. * When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable. # Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 219). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 413
Display messages Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative
¸ Ã ç Ä
Currently unavailable Radar sensors dirty
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Drive on
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Front and corner radar sensors (hereafter "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes: R The sensors are dirty R Heavy rain or snow R Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on
Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be avail- able again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean all sensor covers from outside (/ page 185).
414 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
á Ã Ä Ø Ô
Currently unavailable Camera view restricted
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Restart the vehicle.
* The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windscreen in the field of vision of the multifunction camera R Heavy rain, snow or fog R Mist on the inside of the windscreen: in certain weather conditions, mist can form on the inside of the wind- screen during cold times of year in particular.
% This mist on the windscreen will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restriction is temporary.
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on
Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be avail- able again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean the windscreen, especially in the position of the multifunction camera (/ page 185). # Restart the vehicle.
Display messages
ä
Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 415
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The adjustable damping is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. # Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. Vehicles without Active Parking Assist: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
416 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Driving safety systems Display messages
! ÷
currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa- tion.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may lock during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilisation. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi- tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h. # If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive care-
fully.
Display messages
! ÷
inoperative See Owner's Manual
÷
currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 417
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa- tion.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi- tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
* ESP® is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning® If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.
418 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
÷
inoperative See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive care- fully.
* ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa- tion.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
T ! ÷
inoperative See Owner's Manual Active Brake Assist Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 419
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi- tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE® PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
420 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only partially available: R Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function R Evasive Steering Assist R PRESAFE® PLUS
Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Display messages
G
Inoperative
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system malfunctioning The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunction- ing. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 421
Display messages Device detected at diagnostics connection See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The vehicle functions for fault detection are restricted. At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning. # Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 32). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Battery Display messages
#
12 V battery See Owner's Manual
#
See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The engine is off and the charge level is too low. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.
To charge the 12 V battery: # Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance. * If the message appears while the engine is running, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The 12 V battery is not being charged.
* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
422 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
#
Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual
#
Stop vehicle Leave engine running
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the charge level is too low.
* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Switch off the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The 12 V battery charge level is too low. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Leave the engine running. # If the display message disappears: drive on. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tyre pressure monitor Display messages Tyre press. monitor currently unavailable
Tyre press. monitor inoperative
Tyre press. monitor inoperative No wheel sensors
h
Wheel sensor(s) missing
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 423
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. As a result, no signals from the tyre pressure sensors are being received. The tyre pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable. The tyre pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. # Drive on. * The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres. Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
* The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated. # Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
* There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the affected tyre. # Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
424 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
h
Check tyre(s)
h
Rectify tyre pressure
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone also sounds.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure R The tyres can burst. R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tyre pressures. # Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tyre pressure (/ page 338) and the tyres.
* The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the difference in tyre pressure between the individual wheels is too great. # Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary. # When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 341).
Display messages
h
Warning tyre defect Tyre(s) overheated
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 425
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tyre R The tyres can overheat and be damaged. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Do not drive with a flat tyre. # Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissi-
ble speed with a flat MOExtended tyre. # Observe the notes on flat tyres.
Notes in the event of a flat tyre (/ page 316). # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tyres. * At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres Overheated tyres can burst.
426 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Reduce speed
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
* At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres Overheated tyres can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
Tyre pressure loss warning system
Display messages Tyre pressure Check tyres
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss of pressure.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure
R The tyres can burst. R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
Display messages
Check tyre pressures then restart Run Flat Indicator Run Flat Indicator inoperative
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 427
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Observe the recommended tyre pressures. # Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tyre pressure (/ page 338) and the tyres. # When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (/ page 341). * The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. # When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (/ page 341). * The tyre pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Exhaust gas aftertreatment
Display messages
Ú
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The AdBlue® level has fallen into the reserve range. # Add at least 5 l of AdBlue® (/ page 175).
Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual
428 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Ú
Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX miles See Owner's Manual
Ú
XX,X l Top up AdBlue Emer. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km
Ú
XX,X l Top up AdBlue Switch on ignition, wait 60 sec. or eng. start not poss.
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance after the remaining distance displayed has been covered. # Add at least 5 l of AdBlue® (/ page 175).
* The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance from the speed displayed. After the remaining distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the engine. # Add at least the amount of AdBlue® displayed (/ page 175).
* The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the engine. # Add at least the amount of AdBlue® displayed (/ page 175). # Switch on the ignition and wait for approximately 60 seconds. # Start the engine.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 429
Display messages
¯
AdBlue system fault See Owner's Manual
¯
AdBlue system fault Emergency op. in XXX miles See Owner's Manual
¯
AdBlue system fault Emer. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. Performance will be reduced once the remaining distance displayed has been covered. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
* Power restriction due to the AdBlue® system fault. After the distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
430 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
¯
AdBlue system fault Engine start not possible
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. You can no longer start the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Engine oil Display messages
5
Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
# When next refuelling, add 1 litre of engine oil (/ page 303). Notes on engine oil (/ page 368).
Display messages
5
Engine oil level Reduce oil level
5
Engine oil level Stop vehicle Switch engine off
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 431
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The engine oil level is too high.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil # Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced. * The engine oil level is too low.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Switch off the engine. # Add 1 l of engine oil (/ page 303). # Check the engine oil level. Notes on engine oil (/ page 368).
432 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
5
Engine oil pressure Stop Switch off engine
5
Engine oil level cannot be measured
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The oil pressure is too low.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure # Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Switch off the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps Overview of indicator and warning lamps
Some systems will perform a self-test when the ignition is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behaviour is non-critical. These indicator and
warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or flash after the engine has been star- ted or during a journey.
Instrument display (standard) Widescreen cockpit instrument display
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 433
Depending on the display setting, the positions of the indicator lamps on the instrument display may differ from the example shown.
Indicator and warning lamps:
6
Restraint system (/ page 434)
ü
Seat belt (/ page 434)
ï
Trailer hitch (/ page 435)
Ù
Power steering (/ page 435)
ÿ
Vehicles with a widescreen cock- pit: coolant temperature (/ page 436)
;
Engine diagnostics (/ page 436)
%
Vehicles with a diesel engine: pre- glow
#
Electrical fault (/ page 436)
æ
Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap loca- tion indicator (/ page 436)
!
Electric parking brake (red) (/ page 440)
!
Electric parking brake (yellow) (/ page 440)
J
Brakes (yellow) (/ page 440)
J
Brakes (red) (/ page 440)
L
Distance warning (/ page 442)
!
ABS (/ page 443)
÷
ESP®(/ page 443)
å
ESP® OFF (/ page 443)
h
Tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 445)
T
Standing lights (/ page 124)
L
Low beam (/ page 124)
K
High beam (/ page 126)
#! Turn signal light (/ page 126)
R
Rear fog light (/ page 124)
434 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Occupant safety Warning/indicator lamp
6
Restraint system warning lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 40).
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
ü
Seat belt warning lamp flashes
# Drive on carefully. # Note the messages on the multifunction display. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
* The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 43). There are objects on the front passenger seat. # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.
Warning/indicator lamp
ü
Seat belt warning lamp lights up
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 435
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red seat belt warning lamp lights up once the engine has started.
In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound. The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 43). If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.
Vehicle Warning/indicator lamp
Ù
Power steering warning lamp (red)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red power steering system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Note the messages on the multifunction display.
436 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
ï
Trailer tow hitch warning lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red trailer hitch warning lamp is lit.
The trailer hitch is not operational.
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked The trailer may become detached. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away. # Initiate a new swivel movement and do not re-couple the trailer until the warning/indicator lamp goes out.
# Note the messages on the multifunction display.
Engine Warning/indicator lamp
ÿ
Coolant warning lamp (red)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The coolant level is too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is faulty
Warning/indicator lamp
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 437
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions R The engine coolant pump is faulty If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded 120°C.
& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet If you open the bonnet when the engine has overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You could come into contact with hot gases. R You could come into contact with other hot, escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving.
# Note the messages on the multifunction display. If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale: # Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down. # Check the coolant level (/ page 304).
438 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
ÿ
Coolant warning lamp (yel- low)
;
Engine diagnosis warning lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.
* The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty R The radiator shutters are blocked or defective
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
* The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode. # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank may have been run dry. # Start the engine three to four times after refuelling. If the yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp goes out, emergency operation mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked.
Warning/indicator lamp
#
Electrical fault warning lamp
æ
Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit. There is a fault in the electrics. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 439
* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.
440 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Brakes Warning/indicator lamp
!
Electric parking brake indi-
! cator lamp (red)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.
The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp
J
Brake system warning lamp (yellow)
* The yellow brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front. # If the multifunction display shows a display message, observe it.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 441
Warning/indicator lamp
J
Brake system warning lamp (red)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
# Note the messages on the multifunction display.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving! # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv-
ing. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
442 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Do not top up the brake fluid.
Driving systems Warning/indicator lamp
L
Warning lamp for distance warning function
æ
Active Brake Assist warning lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance.
Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 208).
* The white Active Brake Assist warning lamp is lit. The system is switched off or unavailable. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.
Driving safety systems Warning/indicator lamp
!
ABS warning lamp
÷
ESP® warning lamp flashes
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 443
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS is malfunctioning. If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.
& WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi- tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
* The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 188). # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
444 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
÷
ESP® warning lamp lights up
å
ESP® OFF warning lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
* The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP® is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.
& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated ESP® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. # Drive on carefully. # Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires.
Warning/indicator lamp
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 445
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning. # Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 188).
Tyre pressure monitor Warning/indicator lamp
h
Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres. Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
446 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
h
Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure R The tyres can burst. R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tyre pressures. # Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.
Index 447
1, 2, 3 ... 4MATIC
Function................................................. 171 12 V battery
see Battery (vehicle) 12 V socket
see Socket (12 V) 115 V socket
see Socket (115 V) 360° Camera
Care....................................................... 310 Function................................................ 225 Opening the camera cover (reversing camera)................................................. 228 Selecting a view.................................... 228 Switching automatic operation on/off (reversing camera)..................... 228
A A/C function
Activating/deactivating (control panel).................................................... 144
Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul- timedia system)..................................... 144
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............... 187
Acceleration see Kickdown
Accident and Breakdown Manage- ment
Mercedes me connect........................... 279 Acoustic locking verification signal
Activating/deactivating........................... 76 Active Blind Spot Assist
Brake application................................... 218 Function................................................. 217 System limitations................................. 217 Trailer operation.................................... 218 Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Operation.............................................. 299 Resetting............................................... 299 Active Brake Assist Function/notes..................................... 208 Setting................................................... 212 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Emergency Stop Assist............... 207
Calling up a speed................................. 201 Function................................................ 198 Increasing/decreasing speed................ 201 Route-based speed adaptation.............. 203 Selecting............................................... 201 Storing a speed..................................... 201 Switching off/deactivating.................... 201 Switching on/activating........................ 201 System limitations................................. 198 Active Emergency Stop Assist................. 207
Active headlamps...................................... 127 Active Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating......................... 222 Activating/deactivating the warning..... 222 Function................................................. 219 Setting the sensitivity............................ 222 System limits......................................... 219 Trailer operation..................................... 219 Active Parking Assist Exiting a parking space......................... 236 Function................................................ 233 Parking.................................................. 235 System limitations................................. 233
448 Index
Active Service System PLUS see ASSYST PLUS
Active Speed Limit Assist Display.................................................. 203 Function................................................ 203
Active Steering Assist Activating/deactivating......................... 207 Active Emergency Stop Assist............... 207 Function................................................ 205 System limits......................................... 205
Adaptive brake lights................................ 192
Adaptive cruise control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Function................................................ 129 Switching on/off................................... 130
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Function................................................ 130 Switching on/off................................... 131
AdBlue® Additives............................................... 366 Capacity................................................ 367 Notes..................................................... 175
Purity..................................................... 366 Topping up............................................. 175 Additional door lock.................................... 79 Additives AdBlue®................................................ 366 Engine oil.............................................. 368 Fuel....................................................... 365
Additives (AdBlue®) see AdBlue®
Additives (engine oil) see Additives
Additives (fuel) see Fuel
Adjusting the headlamp range................. 125 After-sales service centre
see ASSYST PLUS Air conditioning menu
Calling up.............................................. 144 Air distribution
Setting................................................... 143 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 144
Air inlet see Air-water duct
Air pressure see Tyre pressure
Air vents Adjusting (front).................................... 150 Adjusting (rear)...................................... 151
Air vents see Air vents
Air-conditioning system see Climate control
Air-recirculation mode.............................. 145
Air-water duct Keeping free.......................................... 306
Airbag Activation................................................ 40 Front airbag (driver, front passenger)...... 45 Installation locations............................... 45 Knee airbag............................................. 45 Overview................................................. 45 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp....... 50 Protection................................................ 46 Reduced protection................................. 48
Index 449
Side airbag.............................................. 45 Window airbag......................................... 45 Airflow Setting................................................... 143 Alarm system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) All-wheel drive see 4MATIC Ambient lighting Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 132 Android Auto see Smartphone integration Animals Pets in the vehicle................................... 73 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-skid chains see Snow chains Anti-theft protection Additional door lock................................ 79 Immobiliser............................................. 92 Anti-theft protection see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Anticipatory occupant protection see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu- pant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)
Apple CarPlay® see Smartphone integration
Assistance systems see Driving safety system
ASSYST PLUS Battery disconnection periods.............. 299 Displaying the service due date............ 298 Function/notes..................................... 298 Regular maintenance work.................... 298 Special service requirements................ 298
ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Deactivating the alarm............................ 93 Function.................................................. 92 Function of interior protection................. 94 Priming/deactivating interior protec- tion.......................................................... 94 Priming/deactivating tow-away pro- tection..................................................... 94 Tow-away protection function.................. 93
ATTENTION ASSIST Function................................................ 193 Setting................................................... 195 System limitations................................. 193
Attention assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST
Authorised workshop see Qualified specialist workshop
Automatic car wash mode Activating.............................................. 307
Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff Function of co-driver airbag shutoff........ 48
Automatic distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Automatic driving lights........................... 125
Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function)............................................ 160
Automatic engine stop (ECO start/ stop function)............................................ 160
Automatic front passenger front air- bag shutoff
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp....... 50
450 Index
Automatic measures after an accident..... 54 Automatic mirror folding function
Activating/deactivating......................... 142 Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 166 Drive program display............................ 163 Drive programs...................................... 162 DYNAMIC SELECT switch...................... 162 Engaging drive position......................... 168 Engaging reverse gear........................... 167 Kickdown............................................... 170 Manual gear changing........................... 169 Selecting park position.......................... 168 Steering wheel gearshift paddles.......... 169 Transmission position display................ 166 Transmission positions.......................... 166 Automatic transmission (problem) see Transmission (problem) Axle load Permissible............................................ 360 Trailer operation.................................... 375
B Bag hook..................................................... 117
Ball neck Folding out/in....................................... 240
BAS (Brake Assist System)....................... 187
Battery Remote control (stationary heater)........ 149
Battery see Battery (vehicle)
Battery (key) Replacing................................................. 77
Battery (vehicle) Charging................................................ 326 Charging (Remote Online)..................... 155 Notes.................................................... 322 Notes (starting assistance and charging)............................................... 324 Replacing.............................................. 327 Starting assistance................................ 326
Belt see Seat belt
Bicycle rack Load capacity........................................ 374 Trailer operation.................................... 243
Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating......................... 219 Function................................................. 217 System limitations................................. 217
Blower see Climate control
BlueTEC see AdBlue®
Bonnet Function (active bonnet)........................ 299 Resetting (active bonnet)...................... 299
Boot lid see Tailgate
Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid Notes.................................................... 369
Brake force distribution EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu- tion)....................................................... 190
Brakes ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............. 187 Active Brake Assist................................ 208
Index 451
Adaptive brake lights............................. 192 BAS (Brake Assist System).................... 187 Driving tips............................................ 157 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu- tion)....................................................... 190 HOLD function....................................... 190 Limited braking effect (salt-treated roads).................................................... 157 New/replaced brake linings/brake discs...................................................... 156 Post-collision brake................................. 54 Running-in notes.................................... 156 Braking assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System) Breakdown Assistance overview................................ 18 Tow-starting.......................................... 333 Towing away.......................................... 329 Transporting the vehicle........................ 330 Wheel change........................................ 347 Breakdown see Flat tyre Buttons Steering wheel....................................... 248
C
Calls Mercedes me........................................ 280
Camera see 360° Camera see Dashcam see Reversing camera
Car key see Key
Car wash see Care
Car wash (care)......................................... 306 Car-to-X-Communication
Displaying hazard warnings................... 272 Care
360° Camera......................................... 310 Air-water duct........................................ 306 Automatic car wash............................... 306 Carpet.................................................... 312 Decorative foil....................................... 309 Display................................................... 312 Exterior lighting..................................... 310 Head-up display..................................... 312
High-pressure cleaner........................... 308 Paintwork.............................................. 309 Plastic trim............................................ 312 Real wood/trim elements...................... 312 Reversing camera.................................. 310 Roof lining.............................................. 312 Seat belt................................................ 312 Seat cover.............................................. 312 Sensors................................................. 310 Steering wheel....................................... 312 Tailpipes................................................. 310 Trailer hitch............................................ 310 Washing by hand................................... 308 Wheels/rims.......................................... 310 Windows................................................ 310 Wiper blades.......................................... 310 Carpet (Care).............................................. 312 Changing bulbs Dipped beam......................................... 135 Fitting/removing cover (front wheel arch)...................................................... 134 Main beam............................................ 135 Notes..................................................... 133 Overview............................................... 134 Reversing lights..................................... 135
452 Index
Turn signal lights (rear).......................... 135 Changing gears
Manually................................................ 169
Changing hub caps.................................... 347
Charging Battery (vehicle).................................... 326 USB port................................................ 120
Child safety lock Rear door................................................. 71 Rear side windows................................... 73
Child seat Approval categories................................. 60 Attaching (notes)..................................... 59 Basic instructions.................................... 54 Front passenger seat (notes)................... 70 Front passenger seat (without auto- matic airbag shutoff)............................... 69 ISOFIX/i-Size (fitting).............................. 63 Notes on risks and dangers..................... 55 Recommended child restraint systems.... 58 Seats suitable for belt-secured child restraint systems..................................... 66 Seats suitable for iSize child restraint systems..................................... 62
Seats suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems..................................... 61 Securing on the co-driver seat................ 70 Securing on the rear seat........................ 68 Top Tether............................................... 65 Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle............... 55 Basic instructions.................................... 54 Chock Storage location.................................... 346 Chock see Chock
City lighting............................................... 128
Cleaning see Care
Climate control Activating/deactivating the A/C function (control panel)......................... 144 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (MBUX multimedia system)..... 144 Activating/deactivating the synchro- nisation function (control panel)............ 145
Activating/deactivating the synchro- nisation function (MBUX multimedia system).................................................. 145 Air-recirculation mode........................... 145 Automatic control.................................. 144 Calling up the air conditioning menu..... 144 Demisting the windscreen..................... 143 Demisting windows............................... 145 Front air vents....................................... 150 Note...................................................... 143 Rear air vents......................................... 151 Residual heat......................................... 145 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 144 Setting the air distribution..................... 143 Setting the airflow................................. 143 Setting the vehicle interior tempera- ture........................................................ 143 Stationary heater/ventilation................ 146 Switching on/off................................... 144 Switching the rear window heater on/off................................................... 143 THERMATIC control panel...................... 143 THERMOTRONIC control panel.............. 143 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience opening).................................................. 86
Index 453
Clothes hook.............................................. 117 Co-driver airbag shutoff
see Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff Cockpit
Overview................................................... 6 Coffee cup symbol
see ATTENTION ASSIST Collapsible spare wheel
Inflating................................................. 356 Notes.................................................... 355 Collision detection (parked vehicle) Information............................................ 183 Combination switch.................................. 126 Computer see On-board computer Convenience closing................................... 87
Convenience opening.................................. 86 Coolant (engine)
Level check........................................... 304 Notes.................................................... 369 Cooling see Climate control
Copyright..................................................... 38 Cornering light........................................... 128 Cross traffic (warning)
see Manoeuvring assistance Cross Traffic Alert..................................... 238 Crosswind Assist
Function/notes..................................... 189 Cruise control
Activating.............................................. 196 Buttons.................................................. 196 Calling up a speed................................. 196 Deactivating.......................................... 196 Function................................................ 195 Requirements:....................................... 196 Selecting............................................... 196 Setting a speed..................................... 196 Storing a speed..................................... 196 System limitations................................. 195
D Damping adjustment................................ 222 Dashboard
see Cockpit
Dashcam Notes..................................................... 273 Selecting a USB device.......................... 274 Starting/stopping video recording........ 274
Data acquisition Vehicle.................................................... 35
Data protection rights Data storage............................................ 38
Data storage Data protection rights............................. 38 Electronic control units........................... 35 Online services........................................ 37 Vehicle.................................................... 35
Deactivating the alarm (ATA)...................... 93
Dealership see Qualified specialist workshop
Declaration of conformity Electromagnetic compatibility................. 25 Jack......................................................... 29 Specific absorption rate.......................... 26 TIREFIT kit............................................... 30 Wireless vehicle components.................. 26
Decorative foil (cleaning instructions).... 309
454 Index
DeNOx agent see AdBlue®
Destination entry Entering a POI or address...................... 269
Detecting inattentiveness see ATTENTION ASSIST
Diagnostics connection.............................. 32
Diesel Low outside temperatures..................... 365 Notes.................................................... 365
Digital Owner's Manual.............................. 20
Dinghy towing see Tow-bar system
Dipped beam Changing bulbs...................................... 135
DIRECT SELECT lever Engageing reverse gear.......................... 167 Engaging drive position......................... 168 Engaging neutral.................................... 167 Engaging park position automatically.... 168 Function................................................ 166 Selecting park position.......................... 168
Display (care)............................................. 312
Display (MBUX multimedia system) Home screen......................................... 254 Operating.............................................. 255
Display (on-board computer) Displays on the multifunction display.... 250
Display in the windscreen see Head-up display
Display message Calling up (on-board computer)............. 376 Notes..................................................... 376
Display messages ç - - - km/h..................................... 407
È - - - km/h..................................... 406 h - - - km/h..................................... 406
# 12 V battery See Owner's Man- ual......................................................... 421 : Active Light System inoperative... 383
¯ AdBlue system fault Emer. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km................................................. 429
¯ AdBlue system fault Emer- gency op. in XXX miles See Owner's Manual.................................................. 429
¯ AdBlue system fault Engine start not possible.................................. 430
¯ AdBlue system fault See Own- er's Manual........................................... 429
5 Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling....................................... 430 é ATTENTION ASSIST inoperative.... 405 é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!.................................................... 405 : Automatic driving lights inoper- ative...................................................... 382 û Before starting the engine, turn the steering wheel................................. 390
J Brake immediately....................... 403 Á Change key batteries................... 380
J Check brake fluid level................. 404 ï Check trailer hitch lock................ 387
h Check tyre(s)................................ 424 ! Clean the fuel filter....................... 394 ÿ Coolant Stop vehicle Switch engine off.............................................. 393 á Currently unavailable Camera view restricted....................................... 414 ¸ Currently unavailable Radar sensors dirty.......................................... 413 ! currently unavailable See Own- er's Manual............................................ 416 ÷ currently unavailable See Own- er's Manual............................................ 417 5 Engine oil level cannot be measured.............................................. 432 5 Engine oil level Reduce oil level.... 431 5 Engine oil level Stop vehicle Switch engine off................................... 431 5 Engine oil pressure Stop Switch off engine.................................. 432 ä Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h........ 415
6 Front left malfunction Consult workshop (example).............................. 377 & inoperative Battery low................ 386 & inoperative Refuel vehicle............ 386 & inoperative See Owner's Man...... 385 ! inoperative See Owner's Manual.. 417 ÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual.. 418 T inoperative See Owner's Manual.. 419 G Inoperative................................... 420 : Intelligent Light System inoper- ative...................................................... 383 Á Key being initialised Please wait... 381 Á Key not detected (red display message)............................................... 381 Á Key not detected (white display message)............................................... 380 : Left dipped beam (example)......... 382
6 Left windowbag malfunction Consult workshop (example)................. 377
Index 455
: Malfunction See Owner's Man- ual......................................................... 382 ð Maximum speed exceeded........... 409 ç Off................................................ 407 ë Off................................................ 405 ! Parking brake See Owner's Manual.................................................. 400 h Rectify tyre pressure.................... 424 Ú Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual.................................................. 427 ! Release parking brake.................. 403 ¸ Replace air cleaner....................... 394 Á Replace key.................................. 380 æ Reserve fuel level......................... 394 6 Restraint sys. malfunction Con- sult workshop........................................ 377 # See Owner's Manual.................... 421 Ù Steering malfunction Increased physical effort See Owner's Manual...... 388
456 Index
Ù Steering malfunction See Own- er's Manual........................................... 389 Ù Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual......... 389 # Stop vehicle Leave engine run- ning....................................................... 422 # Stop vehicle See Owner's Man- ual......................................................... 422 ç suspended.................................... 407 : Switch off lights........................... 383 : Switch on headlamps................... 383 Ú Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX miles See Owner's Manual......... 428 + Top up coolant See Owner's Manual.................................................. 392 ¥ Top up washer fluid...................... 391 d Trans. oil overheated Drive on with care............................................... 397 ! Turn on the ignition to release the parking brake.................................. 403
Ú ..................................................... 428
d Vehicle is operational Switch off ignition before exiting...................... 386
h Warning tyre defect...................... 425
h Wheel sensor(s) missing.............. 423 Ú XX,X l Top up AdBlue Switch on ignition, wait 60 sec. or eng. start not poss................................................ 428 Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual........... 412 Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative....... 412 Active Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual................................................... 412 Active bonnet malfunction See Own- er's Manual........................................... 390 Active Brake Assist Functions cur- rently limited See Owner's Manual........ 419 Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual............................. 420
Active Distance Assist available again... 408 Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual........... 407 Active Distance Assist inoperative........ 408 Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual........... 412 Active Lane Keeping Assist inopera- tive......................................................... 413 Active Steering Assist currently unavailable due to multiple emer- gency stops........................................... 410 Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual........... 409 Active Steering Assist inoperative......... 409 Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual........... 384 Adaptive Highbeam Assist inoperative.. 384 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cur- rently unavailable See Owner's Man- ual......................................................... 384
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inop- erative................................................... 385 Anti-theft alarm system Malfunction..... 391 Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position................................................. 395 Apply brake to select D or R.................. 395 Apply brake to select R......................... 395 Auxiliary battery malfunction (red display message)................................... 399 Auxiliary battery malfunction (white display message)................................... 399 Beginning emergency stop..................... 410 Blind Spot Assist currently unavaila- ble See Owner's Manual........................ 411 Blind Spot Assist inoperative.................. 411 Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual...... 411 Cannot start engine See Owner's Manual.................................................. 392
Check brake pads See Owner's Man- ual......................................................... 404 Check tyre pressures then restart Run Flat Indicator.................................. 427 Clutch overheated Avoid pulling away until the warning goes out..................... 398 Cruise control and Limiter inoperative.. 406 Cruise control inoperative..................... 406 Cruise control off.................................. 406 Depress clutch fully to start engine....... 398 Device detected at diagnostics con- nection See Owner's Manual................. 421 Drive system Malfunction Stop Switch engine off.................................. 394 Drive system Malfunction Visit work- shop...................................................... 394 Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual.................................... 378 Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual.................................... 378
Index 457
Hazard warning lamps malfunctioning... 385 Head-up display currently unavaila- ble See Owner's Manual........................ 388 Head-up display inoperative.................. 388 Limiter inoperative................................ 406 Limiter passive...................................... 406 N permanently active Risk of vehicle rolling.................................................... 396 Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary.............................................. 395 Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual........... 415 Parking lock inoperative Apply the parking brake........................................ 397 Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual.............................. 381 PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual.................................................. 379 Reduce speed........................................ 426
458 Index
Reversing not poss. Consult work- shop...................................................... 396 Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply parking brake See Owner's Manual....... 398 Risk of vehicle rolling away Parking brake not applied See Owner's Man- ual......................................................... 403 Risk of vehicle rolling Driver door open and transmission not in P............. 396 Run Flat Indicator inoperative................ 427 Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h..... 409 Speed Limit Assist currently unavail- able See Owner's Manual...................... 408 Speed Limit Assist inoperative.............. 408 Teaching in transmission complete....... 398 Teaching in transmission Operate selector lever Brake for XX seconds Risk of vehicle rolling............................ 397 To shift out of P or N, depress brake and start engine.................................... 395
To switch off the engine, press the Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec- onds or 3 times..................................... 392 Traffic Sign Assist currently unavaila- ble See Owner's Manual........................ 410 Traffic Sign Assist inoperative................ 410 Transmission Malfunction...................... 397 Transmission Malfunction Stop............. 396 Transmission Malfunction Visit work- shop...................................................... 398 Tyre press. monitor currently unavail- able....................................................... 423 Tyre press. monitor inoperative............. 423 Tyre press. monitor inoperative No wheel sensors....................................... 423 Tyre pressure Check tyres..................... 426 Tyre(s) overheated................................. 425 Wiper malfunctioning............................. 391 Without changing gear, consult work- shop...................................................... 396
Distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
DISTRONIC see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Door Additional door lock................................ 79 Child safety lock (rear door).................... 71 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)....... 82 Opening (from inside).............................. 79 Unlocking (from inside)........................... 79
Door control panel....................................... 16
Drawbar see Tow-bar system
Drive Away Assist...................................... 238
Drive position Engaging................................................ 168
Drive program display............................... 163
Drive programs see DYNAMIC SELECT
Driver's seat see Seat
Driving abroad Light adjustment (low beam)................. 124
Index 459
Driving safety system ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............. 187 Active Brake Assist................................ 208 Adaptive brake lights............................. 192 BAS (Brake Assist System).................... 187 Cameras................................................ 185 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu- tion)....................................................... 190 ESP® Crosswind Assist.......................... 189 ESP® trailer stabilisation....................... 189 Overview............................................... 186 Radar and ultrasonic sensors................ 185 Responsibility........................................ 185 STEER CONTROL................................... 190
Driving system Suspension with adaptive damping adjustment............................................ 222
Driving system see 360° Camera see Active Blind Spot Assist see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Emergency Stop Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist see Active Speed Limit Assist
see Active Steering Assist see ATTENTION ASSIST see Blind Spot Assist see Cruise control see Driving safety system see HOLD function see Limiter see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Reversing camera see Speed Limit Assist see Start-off assist see Traffic Sign Assist Driving tips Driving abroad (low beam light adjustment)........................................... 124 General driving tips............................... 157 Running-in notes.................................... 156 Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST Dynamic handling control system see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) DYNAMIC SELECT Adaptive damping adjustment............... 222
Calling up the fuel consumption indi- cator...................................................... 164 Configuring drive program I................... 164 Displaying engine data.......................... 164 Displaying vehicle data.......................... 164 Drive program display............................ 163 Drive programs...................................... 162 Function................................................ 162 Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch).... 163 Selecting the drive program.................. 163
E E10............................................................. 364 Easy entry feature
Function/notes..................................... 104 Setting................................................... 105 Easy exit feature Function/notes..................................... 104 Setting................................................... 105 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu- tion) Function/notes..................................... 190 ECO display Function................................................. 161
460 Index
ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start.......................... 160 Automatic engine stop........................... 160 Switching off/on.................................... 161
Electric parking brake Applying automatically........................... 181 Applying/releasing manually................. 183 Emergency braking................................ 183 Releasing automatically......................... 182
Electrical fuses see Fuses
Electromagnetic compatibility Declaration of conformity........................ 25
Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency Assistance overview................................ 18 Fire extinguisher.................................... 315 First-aid kit (soft sided).......................... 315 Removing the warning triangle............... 314 Safety vest............................................. 314 Setting up the warning triangle.............. 315
Emergency braking................................... 183
Emergency braking see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Emergency call see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Emergency engine start........................... 333
Emergency key Inserting/removing................................. 77 Locking/unlocking the doors.................. 82 Unlocking the tailgate............................. 84
Emergency operation mode Starting the vehicle............................... 154
Emergency spare wheel Inflating................................................. 354 Notes.................................................... 353
Engine ECO start/stop function........................ 160 Engine number...................................... 360 Starting (emergency operation mode)... 154 Starting (Remote Online)....................... 155 Starting (start/stop button).................. 153 Starting assistance................................ 326 Switching off (start/stop button).......... 177
Engine bonnet Opening/closing................................... 300
Engine data Displaying.............................................. 164
Engine electronics Notes.................................................... 358
Engine number.......................................... 360
Engine oil Additives............................................... 368 Capacity................................................ 368 Checking the oil level using the onboard computer..................................... 302 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval................. 368 Quality................................................... 368 Topping up............................................. 303
ERA-GLONASS test mode Starting/ending.................................... 290
Error message see Display message
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
ESP® Crosswind Assist................................... 189
Index 461
Trailer stabilisation................................ 189 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Activating/deactivating......................... 190 Function/notes..................................... 188 EU general operating permit number...... 360 Exterior lighting Care....................................................... 310 Exterior lighting see Lights
F Fatigue detection
see ATTENTION ASSIST Fire extinguisher........................................ 315 First-aid kit (soft sided)............................. 315 Flat towing
see Tow-bar system Flat tyre
MOExtended tyres................................. 317 Notes..................................................... 316 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 318 Wheel change........................................ 347
Floor mats.................................................. 123 Foil covering
Radar and ultrasonic sensors................ 185 Free software.............................................. 38 Frequencies
Mobile phone........................................ 359 Two-way radio....................................... 359 Front airbag (driver, front passenger)....... 45 Front passenger seat see Load compartment see Seat Front wheel arch Fitting/removing the cover.................... 134 Front wheel arch cover Fitting/removing................................... 134 Fuel Additives............................................... 365 Diesel.................................................... 365 E10........................................................ 364 Fuel reserve.......................................... 366 Low outside temperatures..................... 365 Petrol..................................................... 364 Quality (diesel)...................................... 365
Quality (petrol)...................................... 364 Refuelling............................................... 171 Sulphur content..................................... 364 Tank content......................................... 366 Fuel consumption indicator Calling up.............................................. 164 Function seat see Door control panel Fuses Before replacing a fuse.......................... 333 Fuse assignment diagram..................... 333 Fuse box in the engine compartment.... 334 Fuse box in the front passenger foot- well....................................................... 335 Fuse box in the load compartment........ 336 Notes.................................................... 333
G Garage door opener
Clearing the memory............................. 181 Programming buttons............................ 179 Resolving problems............................... 180 Garage door openers Opening/closing the door..................... 181
462 Index
Synchronising the rolling code.............. 180 Gearshift recommendation.............. 166, 170 General operating permit number (EU)... 360 Genuine parts.............................................. 23 Glide mode................................................. 170
H Handbrake
see Electric parking brake Handling characteristics (unusual)......... 337 Hazard warning lights............................... 127 Head restraint
Front (adjusting mechanically)................ 99 Rear (adjusting)..................................... 100 Rear (removing/fitting).......................... 101 Head-up display Adjusting brightness (on-board com- puter)..................................................... 251 Adjusting display elements (on-board computer).............................................. 251 Care....................................................... 312 Function................................................ 250 Menu (on-board computer).................... 251
Operating the memory function............ 106 Setting the position (on-board com- puter)..................................................... 251 Switching on/off................................... 252
Headlamp flashing.................................... 126
Headlamps see Automatic driving lights
Heating see Climate control
Help call see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
High beam Activating/deactivating......................... 126 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............. 130
High beam see Adaptive Highbeam Assist
High-pressure cleaner (care)................... 308
Hill Start Assist......................................... 192
HOLD function Function/notes..................................... 190 Switching on/off................................... 191
Home screen (media display) Overview............................................... 254
I
i-Size child seat securing system Fitting...................................................... 63 Seats suitable for attaching..................... 62
Identification plate Engine................................................... 360 Vehicle.................................................. 360
Ignition Switching on (start/stop button)........... 152
Ignition key see Key
Immobiliser.................................................. 92
Implied warranty Vehicle.................................................... 35
In-Car Office Features................................................ 284
Indicator lamp see Warning/indicator lamp
Individual drive program Configuring............................................ 164 Selecting............................................... 163
Index 463
Inspection see ASSYST PLUS
Instrument cluster Function/notes.............................. 246, 247
Instrument display Function/notes...................................... 247 Instrument cluster................................... 10 Warning/indicator lamps...................... 432
Instrument display and on-board computer
Function/notes..................................... 246 Intelligent Light System
Activating/deactivating......................... 128 Active headlamps.................................. 127 Adaptive Highbeam Assist..................... 129 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............. 130 City lighting........................................... 128 Cornering light....................................... 128 Motorway mode..................................... 128 Overview................................................ 127 Interior lighting Adjusting............................................... 132 Ambient lighting.................................... 132 Reading lamp......................................... 132
Switch-off delay time............................. 133 Interior protection
Function.................................................. 94 Priming/deactivating............................... 94 Internet radio see TuneIn iPhone® see Smartphone integration ISOFIX child seat anchor Seats suitable for attaching..................... 61 ISOFIX child seat securing system Fitting...................................................... 63
J Jack
Declaration of conformity........................ 29 Storage location.................................... 346 Jump-start connection General notes........................................ 324
K Key
Acoustic locking verification signal.......... 76
Battery.................................................... 77 Deactivating a function............................ 76 Emergency key........................................ 77 Energy consumption................................ 76 Function overview................................... 75 Key ring attachment................................ 77 Problem................................................... 78 Unlocking setting..................................... 76 KEYLESS-GO Deactivating a function............................ 76 Locking/unlocking the vehicle................ 80 Problem................................................... 81 Unlocking setting..................................... 76 Kickdown Using..................................................... 170 Knee airbag.................................................. 45
L Lamp
see Interior lighting Lamp (instrument display)
see Warning/indicator lamp Lane detection (automatic)
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
464 Index
Lane Keeping Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Language Notes.................................................... 266 Setting................................................... 266
Light adjustment Low beam (driving abroad).................... 124
Light switch Overview................................................ 124
Lighting see Interior lighting see Lights
Lights Active headlamps.................................. 127 Adaptive Highbeam Assist..................... 129 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............. 130 Automatic driving lights......................... 125 Changing bulbs...................................... 133 City lighting........................................... 128 Combination switch............................... 126 Cornering light....................................... 128 Driving abroad (low beam light adjustment)........................................... 124 Hazard warning lights............................ 127
Headlamp flashing................................. 126 Headlamp range.................................... 125 High beam............................................. 126 Intelligent Light System......................... 127 Light switch........................................... 124 Low beam.............................................. 124 Motorway mode..................................... 128 Parking lights......................................... 124 Rear fog light......................................... 124 Responsibility for lighting systems......... 124 Setting the exterior lighting switchoff delay time......................................... 131 Standing lights....................................... 124 Switching the Intelligent Light Sys- tem on/off............................................ 128 Switching the surround lighting on/ off.......................................................... 132 Turn signal indicator.............................. 126 Limiter Activating.............................................. 196 Buttons.................................................. 196 Calling up a speed................................. 196 Deactivating.......................................... 196 Function................................................ 196 Passive mode........................................ 196
Permanent setting................................. 198 Requirements........................................ 196 Selecting............................................... 196 Setting a speed..................................... 196 Storing a speed............................. 196, 201 Switching off/deactivating.................... 201 Switching on/activating........................ 201 System limits......................................... 196 Limiting speed see Limiter LINGUATRONIC Function................................................ 257 Starting................................................. 257 Live Traffic Information Switching the traffic information dis- play on................................................... 272 Load compartment Expanding.............................................. 110 Load compartment cover Removing/fitting.................................... 113 Loading Bag hook................................................ 117 Clothes hook.......................................... 117 Notes..................................................... 106
Index 465
Roof luggage rack.................................. 118 Tie-down eyes........................................ 116
Loading guidelines.................................... 106
Loads Securing................................................ 106
Locking/unlocking Additional door lock................................ 79 Emergency key........................................ 82 KEYLESS-GO........................................... 80 Opening the tailgate................................ 83 Switching the automatic locking fea- ture on/off.............................................. 81 Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside................................................ 79
Low beam Light adjustment (driving abroad).......... 124 Switching on/off................................... 124
Lubricant additives see Additives
Luggage Securing................................................ 106
Lumbar support see Lumbar support (4-way)
Lumbar support (4-way)............................. 99
M Main beam
Changing bulbs...................................... 135 Maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS Malfunction
Restraint system..................................... 40 Manoeuvring aid
see Manoeuvring assistance Manoeuvring assistance
Cross Traffic Alert................................. 238 Drive Away Assist.................................. 238 Manoeuvring assistant Activating/deactivating......................... 239 Manual transmission Operating the gearshift lever................. 165 Map Displaying online map contents............. 272 Displaying weather information............. 272 Moving................................................... 271 Selecting the map orientation............... 271
Setting the map scale............................ 271 Switching motorway information on/ off.......................................................... 271 Massage programmes Resetting the settings............................ 101 Selecting the front seats........................ 101 Maximum design speed see Limiter
Maximum gross vehicle weight............... 360
MBUX Interior Assistant Overview............................................... 258 Switching the reading light for the driver and front passenger on/off contact-free........................................... 260 Switching the search light for the driver on/off......................................... 260
MBUX multimedia system Activating/deactivating standby mode..................................................... 185 Collision detection (parked vehicle)....... 183 Configuring drive program I................... 164 Home screen......................................... 254 Notes.................................................... 253 Operating the touchscreen.................... 255
466 Index
Overview............................................... 253 Resetting (factory setting)..................... 266 Setting route-based speed adaptation.. 205 Setting the air distribution..................... 144 Setting the stationary heater/venti- lation..................................................... 147 Standby mode function......................... 184 MBUX multimedia system see Display (MBUX multimedia system) see MBUX Interior Assistant Media Overview of the functions and sym- bols....................................................... 291 Media mode Connecting Bluetooth® audio equip- ment...................................................... 293
Medical aids................................................. 34
Memory function Function................................................ 105 Head-up display -- Calling up stored settings................................................. 106 Head-up display -- Storing settings........ 106 Operating.............................................. 106
Outside mirrors -- Calling up stored settings................................................. 106 Outside mirrors -- Storing settings........ 106 Seat -- Calling up stored settings.......... 106 Seat -- Storing settings.......................... 106 Menu (on-board computer) Head-up display..................................... 251 Overview............................................... 248 Mercedes me app Information............................................ 284 Mercedes me calls Arranging a service appointment.......... 282 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre................................................... 281 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre after automatic accident or breakdown detection............................. 281 Consenting to data transfer.................. 282 Information............................................ 281 Making a call via the overhead con- trol panel............................................... 280 Transferred data.................................... 283
Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Manage- ment...................................................... 279 Information............................................ 278 Transferred data.................................... 280
Mercedes-AMG vehicles Notes..................................................... 152
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Automatic emergency call..................... 288 Information............................................ 287 Information on data transfer................. 290 Manual emergency call......................... 289 Overview............................................... 288 Self diagnosis........................................ 290 Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode..................................................... 290
Mercedes-Benz service centre see Qualified specialist workshop
Message (multifunction display) see Display message
Message memory...................................... 376
Mirrors see Outside mirrors
Index 467
Mobile phone Frequencies........................................... 359 Transmission output (maximum)........... 359
Mobile phone see Smartphone integration see Telephone
Model series see Vehicle identification plate
MOExtended tyres..................................... 317
Motorway mode......................................... 128
MULTIBEAM LED........................................ 127 Multifunction display
Overview of the displays....................... 250 Multifunction steering wheel
Overview of buttons.............................. 248 Multifunction steering wheel
see Steering wheel Multimedia system
see MBUX multimedia system
N Navigation
Notes..................................................... 267 Overview............................................... 268 Showing/hiding the menu..................... 267 Switching on.......................................... 267 Navigation see Destination entry see Map see Route Neutral Engaging................................................ 167
O Occupant safety
see Airbag see Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff see Automatic measures after an accident see Child seat see Pets in the vehicle see Post-collision brake see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu- pant protection)
see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) see Restraint system see Seat belt Oil see Engine oil On-board computer Displaying the service due date............ 298 Head-up display menu........................... 251 Multifunction display............................. 250 Operating.............................................. 248 Overview of menus................................ 248 On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection On-board electronics Engine electronics................................. 358 Notes.................................................... 358 Two-way radios...................................... 358 Online services Data storage............................................ 37 Online services see In-Car Office
Open-source software................................ 38
468 Index
Operating fluids AdBlue®................................................ 366 Additives (fuel)...................................... 365 Brake fluid............................................. 369 Coolant (engine).................................... 369 Engine oil.............................................. 368 Fuel (diesel)........................................... 365 Fuel (petrol)........................................... 364 Notes.................................................... 362 Windscreen washer fluid....................... 370
Operating safety Declaration of conformity (electro- magnetic compatibility)........................... 25 Declaration of conformity (jack).............. 29 Declaration of conformity (TIREFIT kit).... 30 Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components)............................... 26 Information.............................................. 24
Operating system see On-board computer
Outside mirrors Anti-dazzle mode (automatic)................ 141 Automatic mirror folding function.......... 142 Folding in/out....................................... 140 Operating the memory function............ 106
Parking position..................................... 141 Setting................................................... 140 Overhead control panel Overview................................................. 14 Owner's Manual Vehicle equipment................................... 24 Owner's Manual (digital)............................ 20
P Paint code.................................................. 360 Paintwork (cleaning instructions)........... 309 Panorama sliding sunroof
see Sliding sunroof Park position
Engaging................................................ 168 Selecting automatically......................... 168 Parking see Electric parking brake Parking aid see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Activating...................................... 231, 232
Adjusting warning tones........................ 233 Deactivating.................................. 231, 232 Function................................................ 228 Side impact protection.......................... 230 System limitations................................. 228 Parking assistance systems see Active Parking Assist Parking brake see Electric parking brake
Parking lights............................................. 124
Parking option Selecting............................................... 272
Parking position Outside mirrors...................................... 141 Storing the position of the passenger outside mirror using reverse gear.......... 142
Parking service Selecting parking options...................... 272
Parking up.................................................. 184
Partitioning net Attaching............................................... 114
Index 469
PASSENGER AIR BAG status display see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff
Pedestrian protection see Active bonnet (pedestrian protection)
Period out of use Activating/deactivating standby mode..................................................... 185 Standby mode function......................... 184
Permissible axle load................................ 360
Permitted towing methods....................... 327
Petrol.......................................................... 364
Pets in the vehicle....................................... 73
Plastic trim (Care)...................................... 312
Post-collision brake..................................... 54 Power supply
Switching on (start/stop button)........... 152 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection)
Function.................................................. 53 PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 53 Reversing measures................................ 53
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu- pant protection plus)
Function.................................................. 53 Reversing measures................................ 53 Preventative occupant protection sys- tem see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu- pant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) Profile Creating a new profile........................... 262 Notes.................................................... 260 Selecting profile options....................... 262 Programs see DYNAMIC SELECT Protection of the environment Notes....................................................... 22 Take-back of end-of-life vehicles.............. 22
Q QR code
Rescue card............................................ 35
Qualified specialist workshop................... 33
R Radar and ultrasonic sensors
Damage................................................. 185 Radio
Overview of the functions and sym- bols....................................................... 294 Rain-closing feature Side windows.......................................... 86 Sliding sunroof......................................... 91 REACH regulation........................................ 34 Reading lamp see Interior lighting Reading light Switching on/off with hand move- ments.................................................... 260 Real wood (Care)........................................ 312 Rear door (child safety lock)...................... 71 Rear fog light Switching on/off................................... 125
470 Index
Rear seat see Seat
Rear seat belt Status display.......................................... 45
Rear seat belt status display..................... 45
Rear window Changing the wiper blade...................... 139
Rear window heater.................................. 143
Rear window wipers Activating/deactivating......................... 136
Rear-view mirror Anti-dazzle mode (automatic)................ 141
Rear-view mirror see Outside mirrors
Recycling see Take-back of end-of-life vehicles
Reducing agent see AdBlue®
Refuelling Refuelling the vehicle............................. 171
Registration Vehicle.................................................... 33
Regulatory radio identification................ 360
Remote control (stationary heater/ ventilation)
Displays................................................. 148 Problems............................................... 150 Replacing the battery............................ 149 Setting................................................... 147 Remote Online Charging the starter battery.................. 155 Cooling/heating the vehicle interior...... 155 Starting the vehicle............................... 155 Replacing a bulb see Changing bulbs
Rescue card................................................. 35
Reserve Fuel....................................................... 366
Reset function (MBUX multimedia system)...................................................... 266
Reset function (MBUX multimedia system)
see Reset function (MBUX multime- dia system)
Resetting (factory setting) see Reset function (MBUX multime- dia system)
Residual heat............................................. 145 Restraint system
Basic instructions for children................. 54 Function in an accident........................... 40 Functionality............................................ 39 Malfunction............................................. 40 Protection................................................ 39 Reduced protection................................. 39 Self-test................................................... 39 Warning lamp.......................................... 39 Reverse gear Engaging................................................ 167 Reversing camera Care....................................................... 310 Function................................................ 222 Opening the camera cover (360° Camera)................................................ 228 Switching automatic operation on/off (360° Camera)........................... 228 Reversing lights (changing bulbs)........... 135
Rims (care)................................................. 310
Index 471
Roll away protection see HOLD function
Roller sunblind Sliding sunroof........................................ 88
Roof lining (care)....................................... 312
Roof load.................................................... 372
Roof luggage rack Loading.................................................. 118 Securing................................................. 118
Route Calculating............................................ 270 Selecting options................................... 270
Route guidance with augmented real- ity
Activating.............................................. 270 Displaying street names and house numbers................................................ 270 Route-based speed adaptation Function................................................ 203 Setting................................................... 205 Run-flat characteristics MOExtended tyres................................. 317
Running-in notes....................................... 156
S
Safety systems see Driving safety system
Safety vest................................................. 314 Search light
Switching on/off with hand move- ments.................................................... 260 Seat 4-way lumbar support............................. 99 adjusting (electrically)............................. 99 Adjusting (Seat Comfort)......................... 98 Adjusting the seat backrest angle (rear)...................................................... 113 Adjustment (without Seat Comfort Package).................................................. 96 Configuring the settings........................ 101 Correct driver's seat position.................. 95 Folding back the backrest (rear)............ 112 Folding the backrest (front passenger seat) forwards....................... 110 Folding the backrest forwards (rear)...... 110 Locking the backrest (rear).................... 113 Operating the memory function............ 106 Resetting the settings............................ 101
Setting options........................................ 16 Seat belt
Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment.............................................. 44 Care....................................................... 312 Fastening................................................. 43 Protection................................................ 41 Rear seat belt status display................... 45 Reduced protection................................. 42 Releasing................................................. 44 Seat belt adjustment (function)............... 44 Warning lamp.......................................... 45 Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating........................... 44 Function.................................................. 44 Seat belt tensioners Activation................................................ 40 Seat belt warning see Seat belt
Seat cover (Care)....................................... 312
Seat heater Activating/deactivating......................... 102
472 Index
Seat ventilation Switching on/off................................... 102
Selecting a gear see Changing gears
Selector lever see DIRECT SELECT lever
Self-test Automatic front passenger front air- bag shutoff.............................................. 50
Sensors (care)............................................ 310
Service see ASSYST PLUS
Service centre see Qualified specialist workshop
Service interval display see ASSYST PLUS
Setting a speed see Cruise control
Setting the map scale see Map
Shift paddles see Steering wheel gearshift paddles
Shifting gears Gearshift recommendation............ 166, 170
Side airbag................................................... 45
Side impact protection............................. 230 Side windows
Automatic function.................................. 86 Child safety lock in the rear..................... 73 Closing using the key............................... 87 Convenience closing................................ 87 Convenience opening.............................. 86 Opening with the key............................... 86 Opening/closing..................................... 85 Problem................................................... 87 Rain-closing feature................................. 86 Sliding sunroof Automatic functions................................ 91 Closing.................................................... 88 Closing using the key............................... 87 Opening................................................... 88 Opening with the key............................... 86 Problem................................................... 91 Rain-closing feature................................. 91 Smartphone see Smartphone integration
see Telephone Smartphone integration
Overview............................................... 286
Snow chains.............................................. 337
Socket (12 V) Boot/luggage compartment.................. 119 Front centre console.............................. 119
Socket (115 V) Rear....................................................... 119
Software update System updates..................................... 263
Sound PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 53 Wheels and tyres................................... 337
Sound menu Functions overview............................... 296
Spare wheel see Collapsible spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel
Specialist workshop see Qualified specialist workshop
Specific absorption rate............................. 26
Index 473
Speed Limit Assist Function/notes...................................... 213 Setting................................................... 214 System limitations................................. 213
Speed limit for winter tyres Setting................................................... 198
Standby mode Activating/deactivating......................... 185 Function................................................ 184
Standing lights........................................... 124
Start-off assist Activating.............................................. 193 Function................................................ 192
Start/stop button Parking the vehicle................................ 177 Starting the vehicle............................... 153 Switching on the power supply/igni- tion........................................................ 152
Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function
Starter battery Charging (Remote Online)..................... 155
Starting see Vehicle
Starting assistance see Jump-start connection
Starting-off aid see Hill Start Assist
Stationary heater/ventilation Displays (remote control)...................... 148 Problems (remote control)..................... 150 Replacing the battery (remote con- trol)....................................................... 149 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 147 Setting (remote control)........................ 147 Switching on/off (control panel)........... 146
STEER CONTROL Function/notes..................................... 190
Steering wheel Adjusting (manually).............................. 103 Buttons.................................................. 248 Care....................................................... 312 Steering wheel heater........................... 104
Steering wheel gearshift paddles............ 169
Steering wheel heater Activating/deactivating......................... 104
Stowage areas see Loading see Stowage space
Stowage compartments see Loading see Stowage space
Stowage space Armrest................................................. 109 Centre console...................................... 109 Door...................................................... 109 Glove compartment............................... 109
Street names and house numbers Displaying.............................................. 270
Suggestions Configuring........................................... 262
Sulphur content........................................ 364
Surround lighting Switching on/off................................... 132
Surround View see 360° Camera
474 Index
Suspension Adaptive damping adjustment............... 222 Damping characteristics........................ 222
SVHC (substances of very high con- cern)............................................................. 34 Switch-off delay time
Exterior.................................................. 131 Interior.................................................. 133 Synchronisation function Activating/deactivating (control panel).................................................... 145 Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul- timedia system)..................................... 145 System settings Overview of the system settings menu..................................................... 262 Reset function (MBUX multimedia system)................................................. 266 System settings see Language
T Tailgate
Closing.................................................... 83
Opening................................................... 83 Unlocking (emergency key)..................... 84
Tailpipes (care)........................................... 310
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles Protection of the environment................. 22
Tank content AdBlue®................................................. 367 Fuel....................................................... 366 Reserve (fuel)........................................ 366
Technical data Axle load (trailer operation)................... 375 Fastening points (trailer hitch)............... 372 Information............................................ 358 Mounting dimensions (trailer hitch)....... 372 Notes (trailer hitch)............................... 372 Overhang dimension (trailer hitch)........ 372 Regulatory radio identification.............. 360 Tongue weight....................................... 374 Towing capacity (trailer operation)........ 373 Vehicle identification plate.................... 360
Telephone Connecting a mobile phone (Passkey)... 278 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing)...................................... 278
Function/notes..................................... 120 Functions in the telephone menu.......... 278 Notes..................................................... 275 Operating modes................................... 277 Telephone menu overview..................... 277 Wireless charging (mobile phone).......... 122 Telephony operating modes Bluetooth® Telephony............................ 277 Temperature Setting the vehicle interior tempera- ture........................................................ 143 Themes Fastening.............................................. 262 Through-loading feature see Load compartment see Seat
Tie-down eyes............................................. 116
TIREFIT kit Declaration of conformity........................ 30 Storage location..................................... 318 Using..................................................... 318
Tongue weight............................................ 374
Index 475
Tool see Vehicle tool kit
Top Tether.................................................... 65 Topping up
Topping up AdBlue®............................... 175 Touch Control
On-board computer............................... 248 Operating.............................................. 255 Touchpad Operating.............................................. 255 Touchscreen Operating.............................................. 255 Tow-away protection Function.................................................. 93 Priming/deactivating............................... 94 Tow-bar system......................................... 245
Tow-starting............................................... 333
Towing away.............................................. 329 Towing eye
Installing................................................ 332 Storage location.................................... 332 Towing methods........................................ 327
Traffic information Switching on the display........................ 272
Traffic Sign Assist Function/notes...................................... 214 Setting................................................... 216 System limits......................................... 214
Trailer hitch Axle load................................................ 375 Bicycle rack........................................... 243 Care....................................................... 310 Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer........... 242 Fastening points.................................... 372 Folding the ball neck out/in.................. 240 General notes........................................ 372 Mounting dimensions............................ 372 Notes.................................................... 239 Overhang dimension.............................. 372 Socket................................................... 242 Tongue weight....................................... 374 Towing capacity..................................... 373
Trailer operation Active Blind Spot Assist......................... 218 Active Lane Keeping Assist.................... 219 Bicycle rack........................................... 243 Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer........... 242
Folding the ball neck out/in.................. 240 Notes.................................................... 239 Socket................................................... 242 Trailer stabilisation Function/notes..................................... 189 Transmission Engaging neutral.................................... 167
Transmission (problem)............................ 168
Transmission position display.................. 166
Transporting Vehicle.................................................. 330
Trim element (Care)................................... 312
TuneIn Calling up.............................................. 296
Turn signal indicator Activating/deactivating......................... 126
Turn signal lights Changing bulbs (rear)............................ 135
Two-way radios Frequencies........................................... 359 Notes on installation............................. 358 Transmission output (maximum)........... 359
476 Index
Tyre inflation compressor see TIREFIT kit
Tyre pressure Checking (tyre pressure monitoring system)................................................. 340 Notes.................................................... 338 Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system..................................... 342 Restarting the tyre pressure monitor- ing system............................................. 341 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 318 Tyre pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 341 Tyre pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 340 Tyre pressure table................................ 339
Tyre pressure loss warning system Function................................................ 341 Restarting.............................................. 342
Tyre pressure monitor Function................................................ 340
Tyre pressure monitoring system Checking the tyre pressure................... 340 Checking the tyre temperature............. 340
Restarting.............................................. 341 Tyre pressure table................................... 339 Tyre temperature
Checking (tyre pressure monitoring system)................................................. 340 Tyre pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 340 Tyre tread................................................... 337 Tyre-change tool kit Overview............................................... 346 Tyres Checking............................................... 337 Checking the tyre pressure (tyre pressure monitoring system)................. 340 Fitting.................................................... 351 Flat tyre................................................. 316 Interchanging........................................ 345 MOExtended tyres................................. 317 Noise..................................................... 337 Notes on fitting..................................... 342 Removing.............................................. 350 Replacing...................................... 342, 347 Replacing the wheel trim....................... 347
Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system..................................... 342 Restarting the tyre pressure monitor- ing system............................................. 341 Selection............................................... 342 Snow chains.......................................... 337 Storing.................................................. 346 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 318 Tyre pressure (Notes)............................ 338 Tyre pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 341 Tyre pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 340 Tyre pressure table................................ 339 Unusual handling characteristics........... 337
U Unlocking
see Locking/unlocking Unlocking setting........................................ 76 Updates
Important system updates.................... 263 USB port
Front stowage compartment................. 109
Index 477
Rear....................................................... 120
V Vehicle
Activating/deactivating standby mode..................................................... 185 Additional door lock................................ 79 Collision detection (parking).................. 183 Correct use............................................. 33 Data acquisition...................................... 35 Data storage............................................ 35 Diagnostics connection........................... 32 Equipment............................................... 24 Implied warranty..................................... 35 Locking (automatically)............................ 81 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)....... 82 Locking/unlocking (from inside)............. 80 Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO)........... 80 Lowering............................................... 352 Medical aids............................................ 34 Parking up............................................. 184 QR code rescue card............................... 35 Qualified specialist workshop.................. 33 Raising.................................................. 348 REACH regulation.................................... 34
Registration............................................. 33 Standby mode function......................... 184 Starting (emergency operation mode)... 154 Starting (Remote Online)....................... 155 Starting (start/stop button).................. 153 SVHC (substances of very high con- cern)........................................................ 34 Switching off (start/stop button).......... 177 Towing................................................... 245 Ventilating (convenience opening)........... 86 Vehicle camera Information............................................ 185 Vehicle data Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT).............. 164 Roof load............................................... 372 Vehicle height........................................ 371 Vehicle length........................................ 371 Vehicle width......................................... 371 Wheelbase............................................. 371
Vehicle dimensions................................... 371
Vehicle identification number see VIN
Vehicle identification plate EU general operating permit number.... 360
Paint code............................................. 360 Permissible axle load............................. 360 Permissible gross mass......................... 360 VIN........................................................ 360 Vehicle interior Cooling or heating (Remote Online)....... 155 Vehicle key see Key Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Vehicle sensors Information............................................ 185 Vehicle tool kit TIREFIT kit.............................................. 318 Towing eye............................................ 332 Ventilating Convenience opening.............................. 86 Ventilation see Climate control Vents see Air vents VIN Engine compartment............................. 360
478 Index
Identification plate................................ 360 Windscreen........................................... 360 Vision Demisting windows............................... 145
W Warning lamp
see Warning/indicator lamp Warning system
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Warning triangle
Removing............................................... 314 Setting up.............................................. 315 Warning/indicator lamp ! ABS warning lamp........................ 443 æ Active Brake Assist warning lamp...................................................... 442 J Brake system warning lamp (red)....................................................... 441 J Brake system warning lamp (yellow).................................................. 440 ÿ Coolant warning lamp (red).......... 436
ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yellow)..... 438 ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red).............................................. 440 # Electrical fault warning lamp........ 439 ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp.... 438
å ESP® OFF warning lamp............... 444
÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes.......... 443
÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up........ 444 æ Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up................................................ 439 Ù Power steering warning lamp (red)...................................................... 435 6 Restraint system warning lamp.... 434 ü Seat belt warning lamp flashes.... 434 ü Seat belt warning lamp lights up.......................................................... 435 ! The electric parking brake (yel- low) indicator lamp................................ 440 ï Trailer tow hitch warning lamp..... 436
h Tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem warning lamp flashes..................... 445 h Tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem warning lamp lights up................... 446 L Warning lamp for distance warning function................................... 442 Overview............................................... 432
Warning/indicator lamps PASSENGER AIR BAG.............................. 50
Warranty...................................................... 35 Washer fluid
see Windscreen washer fluid Washing by hand (care)............................ 308 Water tank
see Air-water duct Weather information................................. 272 Web browsers
Overview............................................... 285 Wheel change
Fitting a new wheel................................ 351 Lowering the vehicle............................. 352
Index 479
Preparation............................................ 347 Raising the vehicle................................ 348 Removing a wheel................................. 350 Removing/fitting hub caps.................... 347 Wheel change see Emergency spare wheel Wheel rotation........................................... 345 Wheels Care....................................................... 310 Checking............................................... 337 Checking the tyre pressure (tyre pressure monitoring system)................. 340 Fitting.................................................... 351 Flat tyre................................................. 316 Interchanging........................................ 345 MOExtended tyres................................. 317 Noise..................................................... 337 Notes on fitting..................................... 342 Removing.............................................. 350 Replacing...................................... 342, 347 Replacing the hub cap........................... 347 Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system..................................... 342 Restarting the tyre pressure monitor- ing system............................................. 341
Selection............................................... 342 Snow chains.......................................... 337 Storing.................................................. 346 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 318 Tyre pressure (Notes)............................ 338 Tyre pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 341 Tyre pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 340 Tyre pressure table................................ 339 Unusual handling characteristics........... 337 Wi-Fi Setting................................................... 264 Widescreen cockpit instrument dis- play Instrument cluster................................... 12
Window airbag............................................. 45
Window lifter see Side windows
Windows Care....................................................... 310
Windows see Side windows
Windscreen Demisting.............................................. 143 Replacing the wiper blades.................... 137
Windscreen see Windscreen
Windscreen washer fluid Notes..................................................... 370
Windscreen washer system Topping up............................................. 305
Windscreen wipers Replacing the wiper blades.................... 137 Switching on/off................................... 136
Wing see Front wheel arch
Winter operation Snow chains.......................................... 337
Winter tyres Setting the permanent speed limit........ 198
Wiper blades Care....................................................... 310 Replacing............................................... 137
Wireless charging Function/notes..................................... 120
480 Index
Mobile phone......................................... 122 Wireless vehicle components
Declaration of conformity........................ 26 Specific absorption rate.......................... 26 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop
OneVision PDFengine (Windows 64bit Build 25.092.S) AH XSL Formatter V6.4 MR1 for Windows (x64) : 6.4.3.27525 (2017/01/23 10:11JST)